Home

National Instruments Expandable Direct Injector Driver

1. Error Description No Error KA EngineSimEnable CalPoints Select LB freemen gt CAN Signal AI11_Write AI11_Write Process Variable CAN Tx Signal WRITE TO CAN BUS Add Insert EngineSpeed AI12_Write AI12_Write 599 997314 le rer ECU Analog_ Cluster peste EngineStatus gt AI13_Write AI13_Write 2 000000 Analog ECU Analog_Cluster CrankCount gt Al14_Write All4 Write 89 000000 Move Up Analog ECU Analog_Cluster Move Down l CAN Run CAN_Run Tip Strip Commences communication to external CAN device s Detail If the NI 9862 XNET CAN module is externally powered in its assigned slot and the variables are appropriately mapped to the CAN signal list CAN communication between the DI Driver system and external CAN device s will begin as soon as the CAN Init button is pressed NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 255 Termination Termination Tip Strip Enables 120 Ohm termination at the module Detail The Termination property configures the onboard 120 Ohm termination of the NI XNET interface CAN connector port If your bus already has the correct amount of termination leave this property in the default state of Off However if you require termination set this property to On CAN Interface CAN Interface CAN1 Tip Strip CAN Interface Module when module is externally powered and recognized by the software Detail The interfac
2. File Edit Operate Pairings Calibration Help 5 7 s l IE i y l E al ES rl ent RE p SCM console buttons while DI Driver System user interface is open The DI Driver System can operate automatically when powered up according to settings saved to a system calibration file The calibration file can be saved while the user interface is open by pressing the purple default Options Snapshot calibration save button from the SCM console ai from left The default save function will save all current settings within the setup windows to the default calibration file The default calibration file is located on the DI Driver System controller at C system ni rt LabVIEW Data DefaultCal cdl The file system of the DI Driver System controller can be browsed using an FTP client recommended FTP client is FileZilla It is not recommended to use the FTP connection within the Windows file Explorer 66 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 1 DI Driver Setup Window The purpose of the DI Driver Setup window is to configure the Direct Injector DI Driver Module to the desired settings A DI Driver System can have up to four DI Driver modules DI1 through DI4 There is a DIX Config window corresponding to each DI Driver module Each DI Driver module can be configured with independent boost voltage current profile and operating modes For more information on DI Driver Module slot assignment see the hardwa
3. A NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS z N i gt gt i al us a 9 ae arn EU 5 La 5 f A a rah es T E e 2 a be E i K N m Pos SA E F agi s KN D eS 1 s I D rror a e TO NI 9751 na 9751 h wo ot i pes x 3 Ka ce Th Q M p pes J o National Instruments Expandable Direct Injector Driver System NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual NI EDIDS 2403 NI EDIDS 2406 NI EDIDS 2409 NI EDIDS 2412 NI Expandable Direct Injector Driver System User guide July 2015 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 1 2 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Table of Contents 1 About the NI Expandable Direct Injector Driver System 6 2s ANANING RER ER RC ee eT Oe ee eee ee eet ener ener ere T 2 1 REVERSE DAI VERY POLARITY WARNING RS nn age a tna dsoneetactaeeemaniel 8 222 HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING arrian a nca bete 9 2 Genge AMOR nt eo nn nt ce cine tn ten nn ne 10 Sel Vat LS WMG CG PART eats alan canaband yeasty nnd ain aan aia cow eid ameayenmae naa manele agiawaea gana cauanenanet 11 I2 DO UW AUG RE ora ER ER A 13 3 221 OGM SON Wal IMSIANAUON saxsi2sentojes rie aeiette bart NN die 14 3 2 2 NEXNET Driver Msalato Meera nee mont dei 18 3 2 9 Conn ctindg TO The DI Driver SyS Meeri nes nee nee anis 19 32 951 OU OF n BOX CONNECTION SSSR D sise 20 3 2 3 2 Changing The Network Settings Of The DI Driver System 26 3 2 3 3 Man
4. DBTDC ESTTL1 7_Firing_Window_End B 359 DBTDC ESTTL1 8_Firing_Window_End ls DBTDC EAU mi 359 Tip Strip Specifies the period length in number of cycles for the Skip Fire Sequence Min 1 Detail Specifies the number of cycles included in a Skip Fire Sequence For example if the number 7 is entered the ESTTL1 module will output a continuous seven cycle sequence as long as ESTTL1 SkipFireChanXEnable is enabled for the desired channel 92 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual ESTTL1 SkipFire OnCycle ESTTLI_SkipFire_OnCycle Tip Strip Specifies the number of active cycles during Skip Fire Sequence Min 1 Detail Specifies the number of active cycles included in a Skip Fire Sequence when the DI injector is operated in EPT mode For example if the number 4 is entered and ESTTL1_SkipFire Cycles is set to 7 the ESTTL1 module will output a continuous seven cycle sequence with four active cycles as long as ESTTL1_SkipFireChanXEnable is enabled for the desired channel GlobalTDCOffset GlobalTDCOffset o j Tip Strip Global TDC offset between absolute 0 and TDC1 Units CAD Detail Crank angle degrees between the EPT absolute zero position and TDC1 When TDC1 is before EPT absolute zero position then GlobalTDCOffset is negative When TDC1 is after EPT absolute zero position then GlobalTDCOffset is positive The absolute zero position is specific to the EPT pattern type
5. National Instruments 187 4 11 2 TDC Channel Mapping Tab sm Engine Position Tracking Setup TDC Channel Mapping Toc D11 1_TDC fre on 2 me Toca fona Toc fe TDC4 DI2 1_TDC fe TDCS DI2 2 TDC Tocs DIZ2 3 TDC Toco p4 1_TDC TDCii DI4 2 TDC Toci DI4 3_ TDC GlobalTDCOffset GlobalTDCOffset e Firing Window Overlap Detected 7 HfToci pri_tpe SES PFL Firing_Window _ Start ee PFI2_TDC 310 DBTDC Ama PFI3_ TDC Se E 250 DBTDC Tc PF14_Toc Ere DIl_Firing_Window_Start ie 6 DBTDC DI1_Firing_Window_End 60 DBTDC DI2_Aring_ Window Start eo DBTDC DI2_Firing_Window_End Else DBTDC DI3_Firing_Window_Start eo DBTDC DI3 Fiing_Window _ End S 60 DBTDC DH Firing Window_Start B 60 l DBTDC DI4_Firing_Window_End fa 60 DBTDC Tip Strip Global TDC offset between absolute 0 and TDC1 Units CAD Detail Crank angle degrees between the EPT absolute zero position and TDC1 When TDC1 is before EPT absolute zero position then GlobalTDCOffset is negative When TDC1 is after EPT absolute zero position then GlobalT DC Offset is positive The absolute zero position is specific to the EPT pattern type TDCX 188 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual mail KG DON TDC3 480 TDC4 60 TDCS 300 Toes sao ll TDC7 120 Tocs 360 ll TDC 600 To
6. OFF DI1_ClearFaults Tip Strip Clears any critical faults with DI Driver Detail When this one shot is pressed all critical faults of the DI Driver module will be cleared DIX_OpenCircuitOverride OFF DI1_OpenCircuitOverride Tip Strip Determines whether open circuit faults are indicated Detail When ON the Open Circuit fault indicators will not be updated regardless of open circuit fault conditions NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 77 4 1 1 DI Driver Scope Window sx DI Driver 1 Scope Injector Current EM Power suoo Ey DI1_ScopeRefresh 30 S al ua it E i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i a i i i i 1 i i i i i i i i E E i i i i i i i i i i i i i a i L 0 000 0 500 1 000 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 4 000 4 500 5 000 5 500 6 000 6 500 7 000 7 500 Time msec DIX_ScopeRefresh OFF DI1_ScopeRefresh Tip Strip Refreshes DI scope data Detail When DIX_ScopeRefresh is pressed the graph will refresh with injector current in Amps during the most recent injection command to the associated DI Driver module If multiple channels within the module are operating it is not possible to identify which channel is being displayed Note that the resolution of the current display is approximately 10 usec sampling interval and is for reference only A box instrument oscilloscope and current probe may be necessary for more detailed information The
7. Backup Target This will cause SCM to search the network for a National Instruments RT controller such as the cRIO 9082 If the DI Driver System controller is discovered take note of the discovered IP address The Windows PC used to interface with the system must have a similar IP address and Subnet mask as the system controller but the IP address must be different in the last address number The Subnet mask should be 255 255 255 0 Refer to the Out Of The Box Connection section to see how to change the IP address of the Windows PC The Select RT System dialog may be exited by selecting the Cancel button The Backup Target dialog may be exited by selecting the Back button The Real Time System Backup dialog may be exited by selecting the Exit button M Select RT System Remote RT Systerns IP address MAC address 10 15 1 68 00 80 2F 11 B7 6E 10 15 1 74 00 80 2F 14 23 F2 10 15 1635 O0 80 2F 13 FD 6 Marne Model NI PXI8110 2F PXI 8110 NI DIDS O175F cRIO 9076 NI DIDS 0172C cRIQ 9022 4 Check the System Controller Ethernet Cable Connection NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 29 If the green and amber LEDs directly under the controller Ethernet port are not active or blinking then there is no physical connection to a network router or PC or there is no power to the controller Please diagnose the Ethernet cable connection or controller power problem ACT LINK M000 If none of the abo
8. Begin Update 5 Enter the IP address of the DI Driver System in the Target IP Address field Press the refresh button to the right The information window in the middle of the dialog will provide information about the controller discovered at the 36 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual specified IP address If the controller at the specified IP address is valid then the Begin Update button at the bottom will be enabled DI Driver System Updater Li S ee Target IP Address 10 15 1281 9082 DI Driver System Ready Preserve calibration files Begin Update 6 Two options are available for selection before beginning the update process a Backup target before update This option may be selected if it is desired to create a backup image of the system controller before updating the software to the latest version If selected a Zip file save dialog will open to select the path and name of the backup zip file to be saved b Preserve calibration files This option may be selected if it is desired to preserve the current calibration files on the system controller Otherwise the current calibration files on the system controller will be overwritten during the software update process 7 Press the Begin Update button at the bottom to start the software update process The process will take about 5 to 10 minutes During the update process the cursor will show as busy while hovered over the dialog When the process c
9. HPV_MinDC lo Tip Strip Minimum allowed duty cycle for HPV Units Detail Minimum allowed duty cycle for HPV HPV_DC NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 237 HPV_DC 0 26 Tip Strip Final HPV duty cycle Units Detail Final duty cycle applied to the HPV solenoid HPV_NomResistance HPV_NomResistance 3 O2 Tip Strip Nominal resistance of HPV solenoid Units Ohms Detail Nominal resistance of the HPV solenoid This value is used to calculate the maximum duty cycle applied to the HPV It is important to measure this resistance within 0 5 ohms 238 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 19 Auxiliary PWM Setup Window The purpose of the Auxiliary PWM Setup window is to configure up to four independent internally generated Pulse Width Modulation PWM signals to be assigned to digital input destinations via the Digital Inout Setup window The timing specification can be Frequency or Period and the control specification can be Duty Cycle or Pulse Width s Auxiliary PWM Setup Aux PWM 1 AuxPWM1 TimingMode Frequency AuxPWM1 ControlMode E Pube width Aux PWM 2 AuxPWM2 TimingMode AuxPWM2 ControlMode Pulse width AuxPWM3 TimingMode AuxPWM3 ControMode Elfouty yde Aux PWM 4 AuxPWM4 TimingMode O Frequency AuXPWM4 ControMode Duty ovde AuxPWMX TimingMode AuxPWM1 TimingMode v Fre
10. Move Down Move Down Tip Strip Move selected item down the Write to CAN Bus List box j CalPoints Select 260 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Aer Pe Width FPM Timngeooe ALP iM Contrade Ano M OutyCyce Aad Wi Freguency Andi Prod Au ye P ie idth Aud YMZ TimingHade AP WHS ContrHade ALP WMS Duty yri APMG eg une AP WMP eo An WV P le ich th ALP VMS Tire gode ALP VHS Contrade AnP H Dute AP iis Frequency Alo V4 Period And Vie Pyke ividth ALP VNA Timngsooe CamEdtenanlke Camertensor Carnot tet CamoOhinetEnable CamSelect EncaMask Feng Window Cverap Detected Batty is HPV Current UEGO1_AF_Ratio CalPoints Select suey pe Tip Strip Assigns signal source to write to a CAN Signal Detail Drop down selection control for selecting the input parameter to be mapped into a CAN Signal There are more than 1800 parameters in the list They do not include Tables Arrays or String characters This list is different from Process Variable drop down selection that appears in the Direct Mapping Setup Table Setup Auxiliary PID Controller Setup and Operating Point Setup windows 7 CAN Signal A Not Selected CAN Signal Tip Strip CAN signal list according to a selected database on the Deployed Databases list Detail This list will be populated according to signals defined in the selected database on the controller No duplicate CAN signals are allowed As with Flex control parameter duplicate item
11. NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual crank tooth is received before CurrentPosition has incremented to the correct position then CurrentPosition is incremented at a faster rate until proper synchronization is achieved CurrentPosition is then further incremented at a rate proportional to the previous crank tooth period If CurrentPosition reaches the correct position expected for the next tooth before the tooth is received then CurrentPosition holds its value until the next crank tooth EPT Function Selection There are four EPT function selections available in the EPT Type drop down list Each EPT function type is optimized for a particular range of number of crank teeth For example the DI Driver System provides two encoder pattern EPT functions each optimized for different ranges of crank tooth counts The suggested tooth count ranges are shown below in Table 4 11 b for each pattern type selection The EPT function extrapolation value which is the single digit suffix of each EPT_ Type selection will affect the CAD resolution of the internally calculated CurrentPosition The worst case resolution is 0 500 CAD for very low encoder pattern tooth counts For example if using a 4 stroke 36 1 pattern then the suggested EPT function is the EPT N M 7 The 7 component of the selection refers to the number of bits of binary extrapolation of crank angle between each crank tooth In this case CurrentPosition would increment by 2 7 or 128 C
12. TDC8 360 CAD TDC9 600 CAD TDC10 180 CAD TDC11 420 CAD TDC12 660 CAD Tip Strip Top Dead Center Units CAD Detail Crank angle degrees of offset between the TDC1 and TDCX where X represents the cylinder number Typically engine cylinder 1 will have a TDC of zero because the GlobalT DC Offset is used to specify CAD between absolute zero and TDC1 The other TDC parameters will have non zero values which specify the CAD spacing NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 93 with respect to TDC1 The TDC values are mapped to a specific hardware driver channel using the EST TL1 X_TDC drop down list parameters gall telat af TDC1 ma TDC ESTTL1 2_ TDC ALL E TDC3 TDC2 Le TDC4 ESTTL1 3 TDC n TOCS Efne TDC ESTTL1 4_ TDC EEE TDC Toc ESTTLI 5 TDC Efnocs ESTTL1 6_ TDC DCI Soc 1 TDC11 STTL1 7_TDC TDC12 Toc ESTTLI 8 TDC STE Tip Strip Selects Top Dead Center reference associated with driver channel Detail TDC parameters are mapped to a specific ESTTL1 channel by selecting a TDCX from the drop down list in each ESTTL1 X_TDC parameter where X is the DI Driver module number and Y is the DI Driver channel number ESTTL1 X_Firing Window Start ESTTL1 X Firing Window End 94 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual ESTTL1 1_Firing_Window_Start 359 pBTDC ESTTL1 2 Firing_ Window Start 359 iperoq ESTTL1 3 Fring_Window_ Start
13. TINeg_Out_Ch1 Toa s NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 125 Tip Strip H Bridge channel X integral time for PID when Theta is less than limp home angle Units s Seconds Detail Indicates Integral time for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is less than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position The integral time is equivalent to the electro mechanical time constant of the throttle body Smaller integral times intensify the integral action When TI is set to zero the integral action is disabled TDNeg Out_ChX TDNeg_Out_Chi 0 001 s Tip Strip H Bridge channel X derivative time for PID when Theta is less than limp home angle Units s Seconds Detail Indicates Derivative time for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is less than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position The derivative time is proportional to the electro mechanical time constant of the throttle body Larger times intensify the derivative action When TD is set to zero the derivative action is disabled n LHPsnBand_Out_ChX LHPsnBand Out Chi 0 2 deg Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 limp home angle error threshold LS Units or deg Detail Limp home compensation uLH_ChX is updated when PosSetpoint_ChX is within LH Position Band of LHPsn_Out_ChX above or below uLH_ Out_ChX ULH_Out_Ch1 2 v Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 limp home voltage addition Units V Detail Voltage add
14. ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual lt Comma Tab Colon Delimeter Tip Strip Text file delimiter between data points Detail Selects one of three delimiters to use for separating data in the text log file The options are Comma Tab or Colon Plot Buffer Length Plot Buffer Length 100 samples Tip Strip Units samples Detail Specifies the number of samples to plot in the plot area to the right of the window Sample Period Sample Period 100 msec Tip Strip Should be in multiples of 50 msec Units msec Detail Specifies the time interval for sampling the values of the parameters specified in Variables to Log Log Data Log Data Start Tip Strip Enables logging of selected parameters Detail Enables or disables data logging Stop Trigger Stop Trigger lt None File Size Number of Samples Tip Strip Selects the method by which the data logging is stopped or continued if set to None Detail None Data logging is started and stopped via Log Data File Size Data logging is stopped when the file size reaches the value specified by Max Log File Size NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 281 Number of Samples Data logging is stopped when the number of logged samples reaches the value specified by Max Log Samples The appropriate Stop Trigger parameter will be shown according to the trigger method selected Max Log File Size Max Log File Size
15. 18 Import From Export To File RER ES EE RS NE RU ER ees Detail The operating point table can be imported and exported from to a tab delimited text file which can be manipulated using text editors or spreadsheets National Instruments recommends using a text editor such as Notepad or WordPad when editing the operarting point table outside the provided interface If MS Excel is used to edit the operating point table care must be taken to ensure that any quotation marks around the data added by MS Excel are removed from the text based version of the file before importing back into the DI Driver System application 9 Active Operating Point NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 249 Active Operating Point a dj ll EE i Detail Array of Boolean LED indicators highlighting the active operating point 20 Operating Point Operating Point fo Te Detail Displays the number of the operating point starting from 0 The operating point numbers cannot be changed 21 Operating Point Name Operating Point Name HVTraget_ o HV Target_80 HV Target_90 HVTarget_100 Detail String fields allowing the operator to enter text names for each operating point 22 Process Variables Process Variables 10 AIO AIO AIO Alo Detail Array of drop down selection controls for selecting the Trigger Mode process variable for each operating point The available parameters for selection are analog inputs battery voltage
16. Detail Indicates that the internal boost power supply is overloaded and cannot keep up with the demand otherwise it will overheat This is a critical fault and will shut down the internal boost power supply and all injector channels e DIX_ShortCircuitFault f DI1_ShortCircuitFault Tip Strip Injector short circuit fault Detail Indicates that the current to one of the DI Driver module channels exceeded 40A and is likely experiencing a short circuit condition This is a critical fault and will shut down the internal boost power supply and all injector channels an DIX_ModuleTempFault NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 75 DI1_ModuleT empFault Tip Strip Module over temperature fault 80C Detail Indicates that the internal DI Driver module temperature has exceeded 80 C This is a critical fault and will shut down the internal boost power supply and all injector channels 29 DIX_HighVoltageDriverFault DI1_HighVoltageDriverFautt Tip Strip High voltage driver circuit fault Detail Indicates that the high voltage high side FET is overloaded This fault is often caused by a short circuit condition during high voltage drive phases This is a critical fault and will shut down the internal boost power supply and all injector channels DIX_FIXOpenCircuit DI1_FI1OpenCircuit QO DI1_FI20penCircuit 2 DI1_FI30penCircuit Tip Strip Injector open circuit fault Detail Indicates th
17. INU3 gt LOL ET us SIl EXT PWR GND DI Driver Connector Solenoid Direct Ci Injectors M NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 49 Figure 3 3 3 1 a Diagram of Typical Wiring of Solenoid Injectors to a DI Driver Module Piezo Injector Wiring Driving piezo injectors requires in series inductance on the high side wire INJX wire and shorting of channel 3 Shorting channel 3 is required to discharge the piezo actuator of channel 1 and channel 2 This means that each DI Driver module can only operate two 2 channels of piezo injectors NI provides two 2 piezo inductors per DI driver module in a DI Driver System order Typical wiring for piezo injectors to a DI Driver module is shown in figure 3 3 3 1 b Battery or Power Supply 12 24V Typical 75W Automotive 20A Fuse S Recommended wire 16AWG 200V or higher BATT IMJ INJ INJ2 INJ2 INJ3 INJ3 EXT PWR GND GNO DI Driver Connector Piezo Injectors Figure 3 3 3 1 b Diagram of Typical Wiring of Piezo Injectors to a DI Driver Module 50 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 3 3 2 Port Fuel Injectors to PFI Channels The DI Driver System supports an optional PFI Driver module The PFI Driver module has four channels PFI1 PF14 for driving port fuel injectors Each PFI driver channel is capable of driving low or high impedance port fuel injectors Driving Low Impedance Injecto
18. LS1_ShortCircuitFaut amp LS2_ShortCircuitFautt LS3_ShortCircuitFault PFI_OneShot OFF LS4_ShortCircuitFault PFI_OneShotSelect Prt shortcrcutFaut gt Disabled Sn 2 shorcroutFaut PFI_OneShotTime 1 msec PFI3_ShortCircuitFault o PFI4_ShortCircuitFault PFI_OpenFaultOverride LS1_OpenCircuitFault LS2_OpenCircuitFault LS3_OpenCircuitFault eS LS4_OpenCircuitFault PFI1_OpenCircuitFault e PFI2_OpenCircuitFault PFI3_OpenCircuitFault PFI4_OpenCircuitFault i PFI ModulePresent PFI ModulePresent Tip Strip Indicates PFI Driver module present and externally powered Detail Indicates the presence and recognition of the PFI Driver module The module will only be recognized when PFI ModuleEnable is ON a PFI Driver module is inserted in the assigned slot and the module is properly externally powered PFI ModuleEnable 80 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual on PFI_ ModuleEnable Tip Strip Enables PFI Driver module operation Detail If a PFI driver module is inserted in the assigned slot externally powered and PFl_ ModuleEnable is ON then the controller begins communicating with the module and allows the module to operate 3 PFI Mode Cal TMP EPT es Tip Strip Selects operating mode for PFI Driver module Detail Operating mode applied to the PFI Driver module The PFI Driver module can be assign
19. Table2D 1b InputSelector oy AI m Tip Strip Assigns signal source to the 2D lookup table Y array Detail Drop down selection control for selecting the input parameter for the Y values of the lookup table The available parameters for selection are analog inputs battery voltage digital input parameters cam phase engine speed and user variables Table2D_X_Description Table20 1 Description Injection pulse width Detail Text field for entering a lookup table description Table2D X FlexControlParameters Table20 1 Fe ontrolParsmeters Aund_PIDSetpaint Tip Strip Selects destination of the 2D lookup table output Detail Array of Flex Control parameter selectors Each selector maps the lookup table output to a Flex Control Parameter The selected parameter will be overwritten by the lookup table output The Flex Control Parameter can be selected one of two ways by left unclicking and searching through the full list of Flex Control Parameters shown above or by right unclicking and searching through a hierarchical list of menus to find the particular Flex Control Parameter of interest as shown in the Direct Mapping Section Table2D X NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 217 Table2D_1 1 6 0 6000 0 800 1 000 1 200 1400 1600 1800 _ 2 000 a 0 200C 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 4000 0 6000 0 8000 1 000 1 400 1 600 1 800 2 000 Tip Strip 2D lookup table Detail
20. The left most X column red and the top Y row blue are for input The 2D Z table values are triple interpolated to generate the lookup table output 218 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 17 Auxiliary PID Controller Setup Window The purpose of the Auxiliary PID Controller Setup window is for configuring up to eight general purpose Proportional Integral Derivative PID controller functions for commanding a variety of Flex Control Parameters The purpose of a PID controller is to manipulate a final output parameter in such a way that the error between the PID setpoint and the process variable is zero The process variable for each PID controller can be sourced from a variety of inputs to the system The setpoint for each PID controller can be entered manually or overwritten by lookup table outputs or operating points Each PID controller has proportional gain integral time and derivative time for specifying PID output behavior The PID controller function output is added to a Feed Forward parameter to produce a final output value to be mapped to a Flex Control Parameter The Feed Forward can be entered manually or overwritten by lookup table outputs or operating points While PID operation is enabled the final output value can be overridden by a manual entry for debug purposes Each PID controller can be monitored within a dedicated plot window to assist with PID tuning This document does not discuss the detailed theory of PID contro
21. digital input parameters cam phase engine speed and user variables Typically all operating points would utilize the same process variable For example a set of four operating points could be created for four different ranges of digital input frequency However complex operating point tables may be created using multiple inputs Time Trigger Wildcards Time ms 100000 100000 100000 M 100000 Units msec Detail Array of time values for each operating point while in Timer Mode After the time for each operating point elapses execution will proceed to the next sequential operating point Trigger Wildcards 0 250 l 250 500 500 750 750 1000 Detail Array of text based specifications for each operating point while in Trigger Mode When a Trigger Wildcard specification is TRUE the associated operating point will be executed The behavior of the operating point function while no Trigger Wildcard is satisfied or multiple Trigger Wildcards are satisfied is determined by the settings of the Undefined Trigger Behavior and Multiple Trigger Behavior parameters The syntax for Trigger Wildcard entries is as follows Parenthesis Bounded Lower Value Upper Value Detail Trigger Wildcard is satisfied if the Process Variable is greater than Lower Value and less than Upper Value Example 20 40 Trigger Wildcard is satisfied if the Process Variable is greater than 20 and less
22. the EPT is tracking teeth from 0 to 2xNumberOfCrank Teeth EngineSimEnable ATE EngineSimEnable Tip Strip Enables simulation of select EPT type Detail When SIMULATE CrankSig and CamSig inputs are internally disconnected from the EPT function and simulated signals are connected in their place SimulatedSpeed SimulatedSpeed 1000 RPM Tip Strip Simulated engine speed during Simulation mode Units RPM Detail The simulated crank speed of the simulated signals to the EPT function when EngineSimEnable is set to SIMULATE The EPT will not sync to the simulator unless the engine speed is greater than the StallSpeed NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 179 NumberOfCrankTeeth NumberOfCrankT eeth 60 pulses Tip Strip Number of crank pulses per rotation Units pulses Detail Specifies the number of teeth on the crankshaft trigger wheel as if there were no missing or extra crank teeth For example a 60 2 crankshaft pattern would have NumberOfCrank Teeth 60 For encoders this is the pulses per revolution NumberOfMissing Teeth NumberOmMissing Teeth 2 pulses Tip Strip Number missing adjacent crank teeth for the gap M 1 or 2 Units pulses Detail Specifies the number of missing adjacent teeth on the crankshaft trigger wheel for an N M pattern type For example a 60 2 crankshaft pattern would have NumberOfMissing Teeth 2 This parameter is only applicable for N M pa
23. 1_Restrike2Delay f msec ESTTL1 1_Restrike3Delay msec ESTTL1 1_Restrike4 Delay ESTTL1 1_Restrike1 Dwell a msec ESTTL1 1_Restrike2Dwell al msec ESTTL1 1_Restrike3Dwell a a msec ESTTL1 1_Restrike4Dwell 0 msec 0 msec ESTTL1_ChanXEnable ESTTLI ChaniEnable Tip Strip Enables ESTTL1 Channel output Detail Enables engine synchronous TTL output pulses according to specified Main and Restrike pulses 96 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual ESTTL1_SkipFireChanXEnable ESTTL1_SkipFireChan1 Enable Skip Enable Tip Strip Enables Skip Fire on ESTTL1 Channel Detail Enables the skip fire sequence on a particular ESTTL1 channel as specified by ESTTL1 SkipFire Cycles and ESTTL1 SkipFire OnCycle i ESTTL1 X_MaxDwell ESTTL1 1_MaxDwell 0 msec Tip Strip Maximum allowable Main spark dwell Units msec Detail Specifies the maximum allowable spark dwell associated with an ESTTL1 channel If the main dwell ESTTL1 X_MainDwell is set to a value greater than the max dwell ESTTL1 X_MaxDwell value the main spark pulse will be cut short at the max dwell value s ESTTL1 X_SparkTiming ESTTL1 1_SparkTiming io lernd Tip Strip Main spark timing Units DBTDC Detail Spark is generated with a trailing edge coinciding with Main spark timing see Figure 4 3 2 1 1 The length of the main spark pulse will be according to what is spec
24. 2 DI i 2 4 aS 3 g me HIT i 8 11 i o 5 g DIET 8 i g i z g g a g it fa AL Detail Please see information for DI Driver 1 158 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 10 2 1 DI Advanced Settings Window The DI1 Advanced Settings Window allows users to configure individual channel durations for DI EPT injection command pulse sequences The pulse enable and timing controls can be configured from this window but they apply to all channels of the DI Driver module Similar to the DI EPT Tab Figures 4 10 2 1 a and 4 10 2 1 b below are timing diagrams showing the effect of each DIX Timing Mode parameter An independent EPT injection duration command sequence is provided for each DI Driver channel The command pulse sequence can be configured to operate in Start of Injection SOI mode or End of Injection EOI mode according to a specified angle with respect to the channel s Top Dead Center TDC reference Some parameters are disabled according to the selected DIX_Timing Mode the disabled parameters will retain their most recent value and will not accept a value from the keyboard The DI module can also be operated in a Skip Fire mode wherein the user specifies a Skip Fire Sequence according to the total number of cycles desired in the sequence SkipFire Cycles and the number of active cycles on which an in
25. 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 123 16 Psn FaultThresh ChX Psn_FaultThresh Chi SiC ia Tip Strip Sets the max allowable disagreement of the Primary and Secondary Positions Detail If the Secondary Position disagrees with the Primary Position by more than the value set in Psn_FaultThresh_ChX then Psn_Fault_ChX will be set to TRUE Position Fault is not a latching Boolean output It is continuously updated according to the latest position readings Note If only a single position sensor is used for a throttle body then this parameter is not applicable TLead_Out_ChX TLead_Out_chi lo s Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 lead compensation time Units s seconds Detail Indicates the maximum positive voltage applied to the throttle motor upon finding the maximum position sensor signal TLag Out_ChX TLag_Out_Ch1 Toa s Tip Strip H Bridge channel X lag compensation time Units s seconds Detail Adjusts the lag compensation on the PosSetpoint_ChX value A lead lag compensation function is internally inserted in the PosSetpoint_ChX value to the internal PID function KRPos_ Out _ChX KRPos Out Chi fos lrvdeg Tip Strip H Bridge channel X proportional gain for H Bridge channel PID when Theta is greater than limp home angle Units V 124 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail Indicates proportional gain for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChxX is
26. 3 3 5 a Front View of Optional Enclosure NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 59 60 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 3 5 c Top view of Optional Enclosure NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 61 3 4 Using DI Driver System to Control Fuel Pressure The DI Driver System supports a common rail pressure control feature with optional NI 9758 PFI Driver available with Optional NI 9155 Expansion Chassis and NI 9220 analog input modules A typical common rail high pressure fuel system consists of a high pressure cam drivven pump connected to a fuel rail which supplies fuel to each injector The high pressure pump has an Inlet Metering Valve IMV which is a solenoid proportional valve that meters the fuel to the inlet of the pump The IMV is controlled with a lowside driver channel via PWM operation The fuel rail has a pressure sensor connected to the end providing analog pressure feedback to the NI 9220 analog input module for rail pressure PID control The rail pressure PID control function generates a PWM duty cycle to maintain a specified rail pressure setpoint Some common rail fuel systems will have a High Pressure Valve HPV on the rail as a bleed valve to provide fuel flow through the system for stable pressure control The HPV is also a proportional solenoid valve controlled with a lowside driver channel via PWM operation Refer to the Rail Pressure Control Setup window
27. 421 PRIMU COMMO TASSE cer Min D Cu nn 80 k22 al LS EC TaD ee eee er nee eee er eee 84 A 2 A CS eA Jee ee ert RD oer eee ee ere eee ee 87 SES VES DOI SOUDE un Re an a Rae na tete de nn non 91 49 1 ESTILI TBC Channel Mapping Abies 92 ke aan OA TID a S 96 4 4 General Purpose ESTTL Setup Window iii 99 44 1 ES tli 2 TDC Channel Mapping Tasse uses Andre on ln 100 4 4 2 ESTTL 2 Pulse Generation Setup Tab seregre a a 103 45 THFOUE Driver Seth VVING OW ES NN haan adbtaanaiealaernlaadabetdeaaeseataie 106 4 5 1 Gnanniel X COMMON Absence ie a cie io 109 49 2 Channel X POSON Calibration Tab se a nine 112 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 3 4 5 3 Channel X Control Calibration Tab 0 0 ccc ccccccccccccecccccceccceccccececceueauacsneaeacseeceeceneavaeenss 119 4o AE Os SOUP VV INOW RER EN ER E N 129 A A DIG Italll WHDUL DS SUD WNAWN ctavxanaeaccaasuivaasaadlesatinetquuisabecsuianseaiindavesuetehuseuestanesnsausraviabnsauninenedus ts 136 4 8 Expansion Digital and VR Hall Input Setup Window ccc cccceccceeeseeeseeeeeeteeeteeeteeeseeeseeeaneeaaes 140 4 6 1 NR Fall NDUL Setup VVINGOW ae da rares ans atce es E AE ETEN 144 AF Anag INPUT SELUDy WINGOW sat sa babes e ecdanes sde cernes rdc 146 4 10 Pulse Generation Setup WINKOW ccccceecceecceeeceeecseeeneteneteeeteeeteeeseeeueeesetsueteeeteeetessaeeaeeeaaes 149 7 RO a AU ES TL LOS TAA i cadaashottaeanc eae io apeliohenct andi na
28. Bridge channel 1 stiction compensation value Units V Detail Specifies Voltage added to or subtracted from the PID output when Primary Position is outside the vicinity of LH Position US_ChxX is intended to compensate for valve stiction This parameter assists throttle control during small position errors to overcome stiction Parameter uFc_ChX is updated to a positive or negative value according to the sign of Position Setpoint Primary Position error and added to the PID output USLag ChX USLag_Ch1 lois Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 lag filter time for stiction compensaton Units s seconds Detail Specifies lag filter time applied to the stiction compensation A lag time prevents uFc_ChX from reversing directions too fast LHPsn_ChX LHPsn_Chi 5 867 rdeg Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 limp home angle Units or deg Detail Specifies the default throttle position which results from no power being applied to the motor If this parameter is not known it can be set to any value and the Position Calibration process must be executed The calculated LH Position LHPsn_Out_ChX will be updated in the Control Calibration Out column MotorResistance_ChX MotorResistance_Chi 2 25 ohms Tip Strip H Bridge channel X motor resistance Units Ohms Detail Specifies the resistance of the motor winding A digital multi meter DMM can be used to measure this This value is used to determine safe output ranges NI EDIDS
29. CAD SkipFire_ PFI ChnX SkipFire_PFI_Chn Tip Strip Enables Skip Fire on selected DI channel when EPT Mode is selected Detail Enables the skip fire sequence defined by PFI1_SkipFire Cycles and PFl1_SkipFire OnCycle for its assigned PFI channel PFI1 SkipFire_ Cycles 164 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual PFI1_SkipFire_Cycles EE 1 Tip Strip Specifies the period length in number of cycles for the skip fire sequence in EPT Mode Min 1 Detail Specifies the number of cycles included in a skip fire sequence when the PFI injector is operated in EPT mode For example if the number 7 is entered the PFI injector will continuously repeat a seven cycle sequence as long as SkipFire PFI ChnX is enabled for the desired channel PFI1 SkipFire OnCycle PFI1_SkipFire_OnCycle 1 Tip Strip Specifies the number of active cycles during skip fire sequence in EPT Mode Min 1 Detail Specifies the number of active cycles included in a Skip Fire Sequence when the DI injector is operated in EPT mode For example if the number 4 is entered and PFI SkipFire Cycles is set to 7 the PFI injector will continuously repeat a seven cycle sequence with four active cycles followed by three inactive cycles as long as SkipFire_PFIl_ChnX is enabled for the desired channel It is also manipulated by the corresponding SkipFire OnCycle control in all the PFl Advanced Settings windows TMP Pulse Enable Pulse Enabl
30. DO OFF Tip Strip Enables Current output on the TDK Lambda High Voltage Supply GEN Voltage Limit GEN Voltage Limit g 123 IV Tip Strip TDK Genesys Power Supply Voltage Limit Detail This parameter is part of FlexControlParameter list and thus can be overwritten by a table Auxiliary PID Controller external CAN Variable or User Variable p GEN Current Limit GEN Current Limit 1 A Tip Strip TDK Genesys Power Supply Current Limit Detail This parameter is part of FlexControlParameter list and thus can be overwritten by a table Auxiliary PID Controller external CAN Variable or User Variable GEN Voltage Output GEN Voltage Output fois v Tip Strip Indicates TDK Genesys High Voltage Power Supply Voltage Output i GEN Current Output GEN Current Output 0 A Tip Strip Indicates TDK Genesys High Voltage Power Supply Current Output TDK Error 274 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Tip Strip Indicates error associated with TDK Genesys High Voltage Power Supply communication or current voltage control NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 275 4 25 Active Flex Control Parameters Window The purpose of the Active Flex Control Parameters window is to show within a single window any Flex Control Parameters that are selected to be written by one of the DI Driver System software functions Flex Control Parameters may be selected within the various setup
31. Exp CalSeq Reset ay Den LE a Exp CalSeq Pulses 100 Pulses Exp CalSeq Progress Exp CalSeq Start Exp CalSeq Start Start Tip Strip Starts the specified pulse sequence Detail When pressed starts delivering the number of injection command pulses specified by Exp CalSeq Pulses according to the specified Exp CalSeq Period and Exp CalSeq Duration Exp CalSeq Pause Exp CalSeqg Pause Tip Strip Pauses calibration sequence NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 205 Detail When pressed pauses the delivery of the specified injection command sequence When depressed continues the command sequence at the paused location Pausing the sequence will allow any active injection command to complete Exp CalSeq Reset Exp CalSeq Reset p Tip Strip Resets calibration sequence Detail When pressed resets the internal pulse counter to zero Exp CalSeq Running Exp CalSeq Running Tip Strip Indicates sequence status Detail Indicates the running status of the injection command sequence Exp CalSeq Duration Exp CalSeq Duration _ 1 ims Tip Strip Duration of injection pulses Units msec Detail Pulse width of each pulse during a calibration sequence Exp CalSeq Period Exp CalSeq Period 120 ms Tip Strip Period between start of injection pulses Units msec Detail Time period between the rising edges of injection pulses during a calibration seq
32. Frequency ExpAuxPWMA4 Perod E Frequency 100 ExpAuxPWM4 ControlMode ExpAuxPWM4 DutyCycle ExpAuxPWM4 PulseWidtt puty cycle 50 ji See above descriptions 244 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 21 Operating Point Setup Window The purpose of the Operating Point Table Setup window is to configure two types of operation for automated test cycles Timer Mode Configure time based sequential operating points to be executed according to a specified time for each operating point Trigger Mode Configure triggered operating points to be executed according to one or more process variable ranges As long as the specified range is true for the selected process variable the associated operating point will be executed Up to 254 Flex Control Parameters and up to 254 Operating Points can be implemented The operating point table function is manually started paused and reset The operating point table can be imported and exported from to a tab delimited text file which can be manipulated using spreadsheets In Timer Mode the operating points can be repeated for a specified number of Loops While Operating Points are enabled the values for the selected Flex Control Parameters will be overwritten by the associated values in the table s Operating Point Setup kaONg Enable oP Timer mode OP mode mitre Tage Eror J ndefin rigger Error OFF Pause OP f OFF Reset OP 42000 Current Time si Time E
33. If general purpose Transistor Transistor Logic TTL commands are used from an external controller then the TTL commands may be directly connected to the a pins of the NI 9411 module The commanding device ground must be connected to the NI 9411 module COM pin The NI 9411 b pins may be left disconnected 56 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 3 3 5 Analog Signals to NI 9220 Analog Input Module The DI Driver System supports an optional NI 9220 16 channel analog input module The analog inputs are sampled at an interval of 15 milliseconds The analog inputs are filtered and converted to engineering units via the Analog Input Setup Window The engineering values can be used as inputs to a variety of functions throughout the DI Driver System such as lookup tables and rail pressure control The analog input channels are capable of directly measuring differential 10V signals Therefore each channel has a positive and negative screw terminal connection A COM terminal is provided as a common mode reference for all sixteen 16 channels Refer to the NI 9220 Operating Instructions and Specifications for detailed connection diagrams and specifications NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 57 3 3 4 DI Driver System Component User Manual Reference SCM User Manual NI 9082 User Manual NI 9411 User Manual NI 9751 DI Driver User Manual NI 9220 User Manual NI 9862 CAN Use
34. Indicates the active trigger wildcard This parameter is only applicable in Trigger Mode 11 i Undefined Trigger Behavior v Hold Current OP Undefined Trigger Behavior Goto Error State Tip Strip Determines behavior when no trigger is present Detail Selects the behavior of the operating points function while an operating point is not defined during Trigger Mode This parameter is not applicable to Timer Mode Hold Current OP Do not do anything but remain in the current operating point until one of the Trigger Wildcards is satisfied Goto Error State Change operating point to the point specified by Error OP 12 Multiple Trigger Behavior lt Highest Takes Priority Goto Error State Multiple Trigger Behavior Tip Strip Determines behavior when multiple triggers are present Detail Selects the behavior of the operating points function while there are multiple operating points satisfied by the Trigger Wildcards This parameter is not applicable to Timer Mode Highest Takes Priority Change operating point to the point which has the highest operating point number index Goto Error State Change operating point to the point specified by Error OP 13 Multiple Trigger Error wll Multiple Trigger Error Tip Strip Indicates multiple triggers are present Detail When in Trigger Mode and Multiple Trigger Behavior is set to Goto Error State indicates when multiple simultaneous triggers have b
35. Inj5 Pulse Inj6 Pulse Figure 4 10 2 1 b Pulse Train for EOI Timing Mode The reference timing is TDC position for each individual cylinder Applicable to EPT mode Duration Ch1 msec 160 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Duration Chi msec CD CA 259 CE CN CN Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec Detail Specifies the time duration of the injection pulse The ON OFF button above each Timing and Duration parameter determines whether the pulse will be active or inactive Duration Ch1 CAD Duration chi ca 3 6 1 Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units CAD Detail This parameter is always disabled but automatically updated with a calculated value It is calculated based on Duration msec and engine speed shown in the EPT Tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window DIX Timing Mode DIL Timing Mode lt EOI SOI Tip Strip Selects timing mode of each injection pulse as Start Of Injection or End Of Injection Detail Selector for choosing between Start of Injection SOI Mode and End of Injection EOI Mode When SOI mode is selected the EOI Timing parameters will be disabled and retain their most recently entered end of injection angle When EOI mode is selected the SOI Timing parameters will be disabled and retain their most recently entered start of injection angle Enable Individual DI1 Channel Duration Enable Individual DI1 Channel Tip Str
36. O I HighVotageDree 1 Vary Low 0 8 37 00 0 m Hide Inactive Faults Hide Inactive Faults Detail Filters the fault list to show only active faults Fault Severity Very Low Detail Filters the fault list to show only the faults registered with the specified severity Key Cycle Detail Indicates the number of times the system power has been cycled NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 285 4 Ack All Detail Acknowledges all active faults Cir All Or Al Detail Clears all active faults Fault Count 0 Very Low U Low O Medium High 0 Very High Detail Indicates the number of active faults within each severity category Fault Point Fault Point Detail The name assigned to the fault Description Description Detail The description registered with the fault Count Count Detail Indicates the number of times a fault has occurred Value resets to 0 when fault is acknowledged and cleared 10 Up Rate Up Rate Detail The rate at which the fault counter is incremented while the fault condition is present Down Rate Down Rate Detail The rate at which the fault counter is decremented while the fault condition is not present 286 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Thresh Thresh Detail The fault counter threshold at which the fault is active Severity Severity Detail Shows the severity of the fault e
37. OP Tip Strip Operating point executed during error state Detail Specifies the operating point which will be executed upon an error condition This parameter is only applicable if Undefined Trigger Behavior is set to Goto Error State or Multiple Trigger Behavior is set to Goto Error State and Ignore System Error is FALSE Number of OP Loops Hi Number of OP Loops Tip Strip Number of operating point loops to execute 0 continuous Detail Specifies the number of times to execute the complete set of operating points A special value of zero means that the cycle will repeat continuously This parameter is only applicable to Timer Mode OP Loops Completed jo OP Loops Completed Tip Strip Indicates the number of operating point loops completed This parameter is only applicable to Timer Mode OP Mode Timer Mode P Mode Trigger Mode Tip Strip Mode of executing operating points Detail Timer Mode Executes the number of points specified by Number of OP sequentially according to the Time value associated with each operating point Trigger Mode Executes the operating point specified by the selected Process Variables and their associated Wildcards Current Time Trigger 42000 Current Time Units msec Detail Indicates the current timer value This parameter is only applicable in Timer Mode NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 247 0 Current Trigger Detail
38. R 82579LM Gigabit Network Connection This connection uses the following items Juniper Network Agent M E QoS Packet Scheduler w File and Printer ame for Microsoft Networks Uninstall Description Transmission Control Protocol Intemet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks 9 From the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties dialog select the Use the following IP address radio button Enter 192 168 1 101 for the IP address field Enter 255 255 255 0 for the Subnet mask field Select OK on the Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties dialog and the Local Area Connection Properties dialog to accept the IP address changes NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 21 Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 Properties You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings 6 Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 101 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Validate settings upon exit 10 Open the NI SCM console from the Windows Start menu un
39. RS l io RailP Process as ifs msec LLLLLLLELLELELI Z 999 98 msec NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 293 9 Troubleshooting A Windows Help file chm for the DI Driver System is provided on the cRIO controller along with the DI Driver System software image The help file is downloaded from the controller to the computer along with the user interface windows when making the initial system connection Each window within the user interface contains a Help button in the bottom right corner Pressing this button will open the Help file to the associated help topic page Frequently Asked Questions FAQs Q powered the DI Driver System controller and the USER1 and USER FPGA LEDs are not both blinking after 1 minute What do I do A Is the USER1 LED blinking 3 times followed by a long steady ON If so there is an activation error Please contact the National Instruments support team If the USER1 and USER FPGA LEDs are not blinking at all please try pressing and immediately releasing the controller reset button Wait 1 minute for the LEDs to start blinking If they do not start blinking refer to the section Restoring A Backup Image To The DI Driver System Controller If a system backup image is not available please contact the National Instruments support team Verify power supply voltage and current specifications Q cannot connect to the DI Driver System user interface vi
40. TT TT Er Elo Eo Elo C Bo e e Er NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 253 254 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 23 XNET CAN Setup Window The purpose of the XNET CAN Setup window is to configure the operation of the NI 9862 XNET CAN module to communicate data to and from external devices that are on the same network To use the DI Driver System XNET CAN feature you must download NI XNET driver version 14 1 or later It is freely downloadable from http sine ni com psp app doc p id psp 903 lang en i s XNET CAN Setup CAN_Run CAN Interface Deployed Databases Deployed Clusters Deployed ECUs GNI Tt No Database Selected Mant Analog ECU Analog_Cluste Pan Analog ECU Master nixnet_example Analog ECU Analog_Cluste Termination nixnet_exampleldf Analog_ECU_Slave Refresh Analog ECU Analog ECU Analog_Cluster sa Baud_Rate 1250000 AI1 Read Ali Read CAN Signal Rx gt Flex Control Parameter UserVariable1 CAN Rx Signal Flex Control Parameter READ FROM CAN BUS ag ELA MSG Custer 0000 Add Insert AI2_Read AI2_Read gt UserVariable2 a 599 997314 Delete Analog ECU Analog_Cluster AI3_Read AI3_ Read gt UserVariable3 2 000000 Analog ECU Analog_Cluster A4 Read Al4_ Read gt UserVariable4 71 000000 Move Up Analog ECU Analog_Cluster Move Down
41. The entries in the array can be user edited The default values are valid calibrations for gasoline and diesel fuel The EDIDS stores calibrations for both the LSU 4 2 and the LSU 4 9 sensor The calibration displayed in the NI 9757 O2 Module Setup window is determined by the value of the LSUType indicator 20 UEGO Calibration Lambda Array LSU 4 9 and UEGO Calibration Ip Array LSU 4 2 UEGO Calibration Lambda Array LSU 4 9 Bit 65 ry 6732 66 3 aj un I J1 TETE J418 d9 Tip Strip UEGO Calibration Lambda Array LSU 4 9 F ali 4 134 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail The array of lambda values corresponding to pump values for a given sensor type and fuel The entries in the array can be user edited The default values are valid calibrations for gasoline and diesel fuel EGOX Cluster EGOX_Enable Disable Tip Strip Enables EGO channel Detail Allows each individual sensor interface to be enabled or disabled EGOX Sensor 0 45 v Tip Strip EGO Sensor Voltage Detail The voltage being sourced by the EGO sensor EGOX Status COLD SENSOR Tip Strip EGO Sensor Status Detail Indicates EGO sensor status COLD SENSOR When a narrow band sensor is cold the sensor input circuit will report a voltage of approximately 450 millivolts and will not fluctuate with rich and lean exhaust mixtures This enumeration is reported when the sensor value remains in the range
42. The first tab shows information about system configuration The second tab is used to change the system controller network interface settings The third and fourth tab shows software processes NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 289 4 30 1 Static Info The Static Info Tab of the Execution Information window displays configuration information for the DI Driver System ao Execution Information LS Es Static Info Network Run Time Info Expansion Misc Execution Info 192 168 1 100 DefaultCal NI DIDS 2F131F17 cRIO 9082 9082 3 140 F5 9082 14550b 14 0 0 12 DI1 Module Revision DI2 Module Revision DIS Module Revision DI4 Module Revision PFI Module Revision PFI Module Revision 2F131F17 Activated NO ERROR FPGAError Target IP Address CalFile Name Target Name Controller Model Chassis Model Software Version SCM Build DI Driver System Size DI Driver System Serial Number 290 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 30 2 Network The Network tab of the Execution Information window displays the current network settings of the controller and allows the network settings to be changed Execution Information Static Info Network Run Time Info Expansion Misc Execution Info Current Network Status 192 168 1 100 IP Address 255 255 0 0 Subnet Mask 299 295 255 255 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS Server IP Address Settings Obtain an IP address auto
43. The purpose of the PFI LS 1 4 tab is to enable individual PFI Driver lowside LS channels 1 4 and configure their Pulse Width Modulation PWM parameters Each LS channel is capable of 1 5A continuous A special mode of operation is provided to combine current drive capacity among pairs of channels LS channels one and two can be locked together to provide up to 3A current drive capacity Likewise LS channels three and four can be locked together to provide 3A current drive capacity When channels are locked together they operate in lock sync with each other When channels one and two are locked together the PWM parameters for channel one are commanded to both channels one and two When channels three and four are locked together the PWM parameters for channel three are commanded to channels three and four Channels one and three of the Lowside channels on the first PFl Module are also provided special modes of operation for common rail diesel fuel pressure control It is typical that common rail diesel fuel systems have high pressure pumps with Inlet Metering Valves IMV which are proportional solenoid valves requiring PWM operation to control rail pressure by regulating the inlet fuel flow to the pump Common rail diesel fuel systems may also have a High Pressure Valve HPV as a bleed valve on the fuel rail These valves also require PWM operation to control the pressure bleed rate to return fuel to the tank Channels one and three are provided with
44. This mode can only be entered when ModeStatus ChX is IDLE Starts the position calibration process guided by Position Cal Settings cluster parameters This mode will remain and repeat until the ModeRequest is changed When ModeRequest is changed to IDLE the ModeStatus will immediately change to IDLE When ModeRequest is changed to CONTROL the ModeStatus will change to CONTROL upon completion of the current position calibration process CONTROL CALIBRATION This mode can only be entered when ModeStatus ChX is IDLE Starts the control calibration process guided by Control Cal Settings cluster parameters When the control calibration process is complete Mode Status returns to IDLE This operating mode is not currently implemented and forces the Mode Status back to IDLE CONTROL This mode can only be entered when ModeStatus ChX is IDLE This mode controls the throttle position to the Position Setpoint input This mode is exited only when Mode Request is set to IDLE It is not possible to move directly from this mode to a Position Calibration or Control Calibration mode ModeStatus_ChX ModeStatus Chi CONTROL Tip Strip Indicates the throttle mode status L Detail Status of operating mode for Channel X See detail of ModeRequest_ChX for description of each operating mode PrimaryPsnSwitch_ChX PrimaryPsnSwitch_Chi Analog 1 Tip Strip Indicates the Position Calibration currently in use for the Primary Position Detail Determ
45. Tip Strip Period of PWM signal Units msec Detail When AuxPWMX TimingMode is set to Period this field is enabled for specifying the time between rising edges of the PWM signal AuxPWMX PulseWidth AuxPVWM1 PulseWidth 5 ms Tip Strip Pulse width of PWM signal Units msec Detail When AuxPWMxX ControlMode is set to Pulse Width this field is enabled for specifying the time between rising and falling edges of the PWM signal 240 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual i Aux PWX 2 4 Aux PWM 2 AuxPWM2 TimingMode eH Period AuxPWM2 ControlMode Pulse width AuxPWM3 TimingMode A Frequency AuxPWM3 ControlMode e Duty Cycle AuxPWM4 TimingMode ie Frequency AuxPWM4 ControlMode A Duty Cycle AuxPWM2 Frequency AuxPWM2 Period 100 Hz f 10 ms AuxPWM2 DutyCycle AuxPWM2 PulseWidth w 5 lim AuxPWM4 Frequency AuxPWM4 Period Hz AuxPWM4 PulseWidth See above descriptions NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 241 4 20 Expansion Auxiliary PWM Setup Window The purpose of the Expansion Auxiliary PWM Setup window is to configure up to four independent internally generated Pulse Width Modulation PWM signals to be assigned to digital input destinations via the Expansion Digital Input Setup window The timing specification can be Frequency or Period and the control specification can be Duty Cycle or Pulse Width s Expansion
46. Undefined Trigger Error If another higher operating point Wildcard is satisfied then the higher operating point will be executed if the Multiple Trigger Behavior control is set to Highest Takes Priority Otherwise the Error OP operating point will be executed Flex Control Parameters Not Selected Flex Control Parameters LUE Eos MOT SEC CeO Detail Array of drop down selection controls for selecting the Flex Control Parameter to be manipulated by each operating point There are many Flex Control Parameters to choose from related to many different controls from various setup windows within the DI Driver System The value for each selected Flex Control Parameter will be overwritten by the value entered for each active operating point in the table The Flex Control Parameter can be selected one of two ways by left unclicking and searching through the full list of Flex Control Parameters shown above or by right unclicking and searching through a hierarchical list of menus to find the particular Flex Control Parameter of interest as shown in the Direct Mapping Section 29 Operating Point Table Values NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 251 Detail The table values are shown as a two dimensional array of values specifying the value to overwrite each selected Flex Control Parameter during each active operating point Most Flex Control Parameters are single point precision cont
47. Units s seconds Detail Adjusts the lag compensation on the PosSetpoint_ChX value A lead lag compensation function is internally inserted in the PosSetpoint_ChX value to the internal PID function TLag_ChX can be increased to slow the change in Position Setpoint This parameter is not changed by a position or control calibration procedure KRPos ChX KRPos_Chi oo V deg Tip Strip H Bridge channel X proportional gain for H Bridge channel PID when Theta is greater than limp home angle Units V Detail Specifies proportional gain for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is greater than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position in the Control Calibration Out column This parameter is changed by a control calibration procedure TIPos ChX TiPos Chl lois Mis Tip Strip H Bridge channel X integral time for PID when Theta is greater than limp home angle Units s Seconds Detail Specifies Integral time for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is greater than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position The integral time is equivalent to the electro mechanical time constant of the throttle body Smaller integral times intensify the integral action When TI is set to zero the integral action is disabled This parameter is changed by a control calibration procedure 120 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual TDPos_ChX TDPos_ Chi 0 02 fs Tip Strip H Bridge channel X derivative time for PID when T
48. _SyncTiming o DBTDC ESTTL2 5_SyncTiming s Elo mma ESTTL2 6_SyncTiming B a DBTDC ESTTL2 1_PulseDelay 0 msec ESTTL2 2_PulseDelay 0 msec ESTTL2 3_PulseDelay a 0 msec ESTTL2 4_PulseDelay A 0 msec ESTTL2 5_PulseDelay Flo tmseq ESTTL2 6_PulseDelay a 0 msec ESTTL2 1 PulseDuration Sfo msec ESTTL2 2 PulseDuration 0 msec ESTTL2 3_PulseDuration a 0 msec ESTTL2 4_PulseDuration a 0 msec ESTTL2 5 PulseDuration Elo ESTTL26 PulseDuration a 0 msec i msec i ESTTL2 _SyncTiming Bro pemoc o msec ESTTL2 8_SyncTiming ESTTL2 8_PulseDelay s s Elo Ijma Eo Jimed ESTTL2 7_PulseDelay ESTTL2 7 PulseDuration 0 msec ESTTL2 8_PulseDuration 0 msec i m STTL2_Chan8Enable m STTL2 8_PulseEnable i i ESTTL2 ChanXEnable ESTTL2_ChanlEnable Tip Strip Enables ESTTL 2 Channel output Detail Enables engine synchronous TTL output pulses according to specified Main and Restrike pulses ESTTL2 X_PulseEnable NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 103 ESTTL2 1 PulseEnable Pulse Enable Tip Strip Enables an auxiliary engine synchronous pulse Detail Enables engine synchronous TTL output pulse according to specified pulse delay and duration Reference Engine Synchr
49. all twelve digital input sources are available If there is only one NI 9411 module inserted in the 9411_ 1 slot then only 136 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual six digital input sources associated with the 9411_1 slot are available If there is only one NI 9411 module inserted in the 9411 2 slot then only six digital input sources associated with the 9411 2 slot are available There are four internally generated PWM signal sources always available that are configured via the Auxiliary PWM Setup window Multiple destination controls that are not on the same row can have the same selected digital signal source However controls that are on the same row cannot have the same selected digital signal source Across a given row once a digital signal source is selected it will be grayed out Each of the destination controls listed below have a similar drop down selection of digital signal source and are described below Not Assigned NIS411 1 0 NI 9411 1 1 NI 9411 1 2 NI 9411 13 NI 9411 1 4 NI 9411 1 5 NI 9411 2 0 NI 9411_2 1 NI 9411_2 2 NI 9411_2 3 NI 9411_2 4 NI 9411_2 5 Aux PWM 1 Aux PWM 2 Aux PWM 3 Aux PWM 4 Crank_DigChanAsn Crank_DigChanAsn re Mot Assigned Tip Strip Assigns digital signal source to crank signal Detail Signal directed to the EPT crank trigger input The EPT is configured via the Engine Position Tracking Setup window This signal is applicable for all EPT pattern ty
50. at ni com environment This page contains the environmental regulations and directives with which NI complies as well as other environmental information not included in this document 375518A 01 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 315
51. begins communicating with the module and allows the module to operate ModulePresent ModulePresent Tip Strip Indicates Throttle Driver module present and externally powered Detail Indicates the presence and recognition of the associated Throttle Driver module The module will only be recognized when Throttle ModuleEnable is ON a Throttle Driver module is inserted in the assigned slot and the module is properly externally powered HXSense HiSense 1 72 A Tip Strip H Bridge channel X current draw Units A Detail The filtered load current of h bridge circuit X in Amps ThrottleAnX ThrottleAnt 3 34 V1 Tip Strip Filtered voltage of external analog input X Units V Detail The filtered voltage of external analog input X typically from a potentiometer in a throttle body to indicate position feedback HXFault HiSense 11 72 A Tip Strip H Bridge channel X Fault indicator Detail When TRUE then an over current or over temperature fault has occurred with h bridge circuit 1 and operation will be interrupted until the fault is removed NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 107 Battery Battery 13 74 v Tip Strip Battery voltage measured by the H Bridge channel driver module Detail The filtered battery voltage supplied to the module Temperature Temperature 35 9 C Tip Strip H Bridge channel driver module temperature Detail The filtered internal module te
52. doing injector flow calibrations Calibration mode is configured via the Calibration Mode Setup window for a specified number of injection events command duration and command period Only one channel of each module may be enabled for Calibration mode If more than one channel is enabled then commands will not be delivered Triggered Multi Pulse TMP Mode The DI Driver module channels are commanded by a specified sequence of pulses and triggered by an external digital rising or falling edge to the assigned digital input channel The pulse sequence is configured via the DI T MP tab of the Pulse Generation Setup window The external trigger channel is assigned via the Digital Inout Setup window Engine Position Tracking EPT Mode The DI Driver module channels are commanded by a specified sequence of pulses and triggered by crankshaft angle events for each pulse with respect to an assigned Top Dead Center TDC reference value The pulse sequence is configured via the DI EPT tab of the Pulse Generation Setup window The TDC reference value is configured via the TDC Channel Mapping tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window Engine position tracking parameters are configured via the EPT tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window for a variety of crank and cam signal patterns DIX_PowerSupplyEnable on DI1_PowerSupplyEnable Tip Strip Enables internal boost power supply DI Driver Setup window Detail When ON the module interna
53. end of each delivered command pulse NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 83 4 2 2 PFI 1 4 Tab The purpose of the PFI 1 4 tab is to enable individual PFI Driver PFI channels 1 4 and configure current control parameters s PFI and LS Driver Setup PFI Module Control PFI1_FirstPeak PFI1_ChanEnable mr Phase 2 1 5 Setpoint Amps PFI1_RecircAlways 0 Duration msec OFF PFI2_FirstPeak PFI2_ChanEnable mra Phase 1 Phase 2 3 1 5 setpointiAmps PFI2_RecircAlways 15 0 Duration msec OFF Sees ten PFI3_ChanEnable Co Phase 1___ Pha 13 is Setpoint Amps PF RecicAways 1 5 fo Duration msec PFI4_FirstPeak S PFI4_ChanEnable OF RAS se L_ OF Phase 1 Phase 2 3 1 5 Setpoint Amps PFI4_RecircAlways 1 5 fo Duration msec 1 PFIX_FirstPeak PFIL_FirstPeak oF Tip Strip Causes phase 2 to begin after current reaches first peak Detail A software option of the PFI Driver module to transfer operation from the first phase to the second phase upon reaching the first current peak corresponding to the first phase current setpoint The first phase duration should be set to a minimum value long enough for the first peak to be reached 84 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 2 PFI Phase Setpoint amp Duration Phase 1 Phase 2 3 15 Setpoint Amps 1 5 0 Duration msec Tip St
54. fess ESTTL1 4_Firing_Window_Start 2135 nend ESTTL1 5_Firing_Window_Start 359 pBTDC ESTTL1 6_Firing_Window_Start 359 mema ESTTL1 7_Firing_Window_Start 359 petpc ESTTL1 8 Firing_Window_Start 359 DBTDC ESTTL1 1_Firing_Window_End B 359 DETDC ESTTL1 2_Firing_Window_End EB 359 DBTDC ESTTL1 3_ Firing Window _ End B 359 DBTDC ESTTL1 4_Firing_Window_End ir F5 359 DBTDC ESTTLI 5 _Fiing_Window_ End 2359 ppTpc ESTTL1 6 Firing Window End 359 memc ESTTL1 7_Firing Window End 359 liner ESTTL1 8_Firing_Window_End 2350 led Tip Strip Start of angle based window around all spark events for a channel End of angle based window around all injection events for a channel Units DBTDC Detail Even though the channels within the ESTTL1 module are independent and the output pulses can overlap the pulse sequence needs to be reset each engine cycle The span of this window depends on the stroke of the engine For example for 2 Stroke engines the span is 360 Crank Angles i e 180 degrees around the reference TDC For 4 Stroke engines the span is 720 Crank Angles two crank rotations i e 360 degrees around the reference TDC The window may not overlap from cycle to cycle For example for 4 Stroke engines the ESTTL1 X_Firing Window_ Start and ESTTL1 X Firing Window End cannot be exactly 360 and 360 DBTDC r
55. field is enabled for specifying the time between rising edges of the PWM signal ExpAuxPWMX DutyCycle Exp AuxPWM1 DutyCycle 50 96 Tip Strip Duty cycle of PWM signal Units Detail When ExpAuxPWMX ControlMode is set to Duty Cycle this field is enabled for specifying the time between rising and falling edges of the PWM signal ExpAuxPWMX Period ExpAuxPWM1 Period 10 ms Tip Strip Period of PWM signal Units msec Detail When ExpAuxPWMX TimingMode is set to Period this field is enabled for specifying the time between rising edges of the PWM signal ExpAuxPWMX PulseWidth ExpAuxPWM1 Pulsewidth sli Tip Strip Pulse width of PWM signal Units msec NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 243 Detail When ExpAuxPWMX ControlMode is set to Pulse Width this field is enabled for specifying the time between rising and falling edges of the PWM signal Expansion Aux PWMX 2 4 Expansion Auxiliary PWM 2 ExpAuxPWM2 TimingMode ExpAuxPWM2 Frequency ExpAuxPWM2 Period A Frequency 100 Hz ms ExpAuxPWM2 ControlMode ExpAuxPWM2 DutyCyde ExpAuxPWM2 PulseWidth Duty cycle Expansion Auxiliary PWM 3 ExpAuxPWM3 TimingMode ExpAuxPWM3 Frequency ExpAuxPWM3 P j S Frequency 100 Hz ExpAuxPWM3 ControlMode ExpAuxPWM3 DutyCycle ExpAuxPVW M3 PulseWidtl Duty Cyde 5 2 Expansion Auxiliary PWM 4 ExpAuxPWM4 TimingMode ExpAuxPWM4
56. for this purpose and configured via the Auxiliary PID Controller Setup window The auxiliary PID controller setpoint can be used to define the desired crank angle location of the cam signal rising edge The CamX_RisingEdge from this tab can be used as feedback to the PID control function Engine Position Tracking Setup TOC Channel Mapping Cami_Capture_Start Cam2_Capture_Start 60 mga 2leo ioerod CamRE_TDC Ref Cami_Capture_ End Cam2_Capture_ End Gma Cr DBTDC Breo DBTDC Cam1_RisingEdge Cam 2_RisingEdge r rr L jm S ie D 3 CamRE_TDC Ref Cam_Rising Edge oe des L i L L L a L L Cam_Capture pug any CamRE_TDC Ref 192 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual TDCI0 TRC11 TDC12 Tip Strip Selects Top Dead Center reference associated with cam edge capturing Detail Selects the TDCX reference for the CamX Capture window Cam1_ Capture Start Cami_Capture_ Start fso DB TDC Tip Strip Start of angle based capture window for cam signal Units DBTDC Detail Defines the start of a window with respect to the selected TDCX to search within for Caml rising edge Cami_Capture End Cami_Capture_End 2 60 DBTDC Tip Strip End of angle based capture window for cam signal Units DBTDC Detail Defines the end of a window with respect to the selected TDCX to search within for Caml rising edge Cam1_RisingEdge Cami_Rising
57. gt SA L 2m typ s i J Os K Sockets 06 4 CONNECTOR 8 PIN CONNECTOR Fig 3 RS232 cable with DB9 connector P N GEN 232 9 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 307 PFI Module Connector TDK Rear Panel RS232 Connector In a 7 Additional Support Feedback Please contact NI Systems Support at 1 210 248 9308 or powertraincontrolsinfo ni com 308 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 8 Important Information NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 309 8 1 Warranty Remove the following paragraph for software products The EXPANDABLE DIRECT INJECTOR DRIVER SYSTEM is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment as evidenced by receipts or other documentation National Instruments will at its option repair or replace equipment that proves to be defective during the warranty period This warranty includes parts and labor The media on which you receive National Instruments software are warranted not to fail to execute programming instructions due to defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 90 days from date of shipment as evidenced by receipts or other documentation National Instruments will at its option repair or replace software media that do not execute programming instructions if National Instruments receives notice of such defects during the warranty pe
58. in a star fashion instead of daisy chain Daisy chain grounding can lead to problematic ground loops where sensors and actuators use signal ground reference wires as a return path for current back to ground The wire used for NI 9411 COM ground reference should not be considered as a power ground return path If noise spikes are still causing false triggering of the digital input circuit digital filtering may be implemented within the DI Driver System using the integrated digital filter function The digital filter rejects signal pulses up to a specified width The filter times are specified via the Digital Input Setup window It is common to use a filter time of 1 to 5 microseconds If filter times higher than 10 microseconds are required then it is likely that noise problems can be resolved in the external wiring Troubleshooting Achieving reliable clean crank and cam signals can sometimes be a trial and error process It is National Instruments experience that reliable sync is often not achieved with the first attempt at running the engine over the entire speed and load range Even though sync may occur successfully at low engine speeds it does not always mean that sync will be consistent at high speeds or loads due to trigger wheel imperfections sensor placement distance from the trigger teeth ignition or injection radiated noise or camshaft position lash or stretch with respect to the crankshaft The system engineer should take care to c
59. increment decrement reaches the specified threshold terminating the calibration process for that direction Typically 0 005 V is adequate If this parameter is 0 then the calibration process will push harder toward the minimum maximum positions When this happens the minimum and maximum positions can be difficult to achieve during control and cause the final output to the throttle motor to exceed the limit This parameter should be a positive value PsnCalDiff_Thresh_ChX PsnCalDiff_Thresh_Ch1 3 V Tip Strip Minimum threshold for the expected range of throttle plate travel Positive Units V Detail At the completion of the position calibration process the absolute value of the difference between the maximum and minimum position sensor signal voltages is compared against this threshold If it is less than the threshold then there was something wrong with the position calibration process because the throttle plate did not move through the expected range of travel or the position sensor is faulty This fault is indicated by the Pos Cal Diff Fault Boolean indicator within the Position Cal Out cluster AnalogXRange_ChY NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 115 AnalogiRange_Ch1 0 5 4 63 IV Tip Strip Only change in Idle mode Not needed if Position Cal is used Element 0 Minimum Position V Element 1 Maximum Position V Units V Detail Typically electronic throttle bodies have two posit
60. input Scope Controls NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 195 Cursors x Y ma 230000 7 BE Cursor2 245000 7 E fr Sync LAN Crank Fan Enc Z Eas i p i Cam 1 cas Cam 2 Fan Offset Cam AN em A sate A Tip Strip Scope Controls Update Refreshes the EPT scope display Clear Clears the EPT scope display Detail Used to manipulate the EPT Scope display and define cursors for measuring time and logic level of the various signals Scope Definitions Count Pulses of crank between Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Result 25 Tip Strip Defines information to be shown on scope trace Detail This collection of parameters is used to count pulses rising edges or falling edges of a specified signal between the cursors in the EPT Scope Scope Channel Assignments Crank_DigChanAsn Cami_DigChanAsn Engine Speed Efmat1o lmanuiz 901 015 RPM Encoder DigChanAsn Cam2_DigChanAsn Engine Status Mot Assigned f Not Assigned Tip Strip Scope channel assignments Detail The assignment controls are exact copies of the same controls within the Digital Input Setup window The EngineSpeed and EngineStatus indicators are exact copies of the indicators on the EPT tab These controls and indicators are placed here in duplicate for convenience RUNNING Run EPT Scope Run EPT Scope 196 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series Use
61. lowside driver circuits This means that one side of the port fuel injector solenoid or ignition coil primary is connected to battery while the other side lowside is connected to the engine controller and programmatically switched to ground during fuel injection pulses or ignition dwell respectively In order to utilize these lowside driver outputs to command the DI Driver System a pull up resistor must be connected between a constant voltage source such as 5V or battery and the digital input a pin of the NI 9411 module as described above Then the port fuel injector or ignition output pin of the engine controller must be connected to the a pin of the digital input channel to be commanded The pull up resistors act as a low current load to the fuel injector or ignition outputs of the engine controller This physical arrangement provides for an active low injection command because the engine controller s lowside drivers will pull the digital inputs of the NI 9411 module low when injection events are desired This configuration requires the Invert button of the associated digital input channel be set to Active Low via the Digital Input Setup window NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 55 Using ECU PFI or ignition driver outputs to command DI Driver System injection events requires that the DI Driver module or PFI Driver module be configured for Direct mode or TMP mode via the DI Driver Setup window or the P
62. mode selectors to operate as IMV or HPV controls It is typical that IMV and HPV solenoids require up to 3A current drive Therefore it is recommended that channel one be locked with channel two when operating as IMV or HPV control Likewise it is recommended that channel three be locked with channel four when operating as IMV or HPV control When channel one or channel three is configured for IMV or HPV control then the Rail Pressure Control Setup window should be configured to implement PID control of common rail pressure using those channels There are no dedicated IMV or HPV control modes available on the Lowside channels on the second PFI Module Only generic PWM parameters are available on PFI2 LS1 4 tab LS channels one and two and LS channels three and four can still be locked together to supply up to 3A current drive much like the first PFl Module Cc Fr s PFI and LS Driver Setup i s PFI and LS 2 Driver Setup PFI Module Control PFI 2 Module Control PFI 2 PFI 1 4 PFI2 LS 1 4 PFILS1_ChanEnable PF tS Source Host Configuration Only Pr G a J PFI2 LS1_ChanEnable PFI2 51 TimingMode PF24514 Frequency PFHS1 TimngMode PFILS1 Frequency PFI LS1 Pe a a Frequency Fos Hz Frequency 100 Hz 1 ms Lock PFILSiand2 J J Lock PFI2 LS1and2 PFI2151 ControMode PFI2AS14 DutyCycle UNLOCKED pie iat PFHS1 DutyCyde PFI LS1 PulseWidt UNLOCKED Duty Gade Fo 9 Duty Cycle 50 i
63. o bytes Units bytes Detail When Stop Trigger is set to File Size data logging is stopped when the file size reaches the value specified by Max Log File Size Max Log Samples Max Log Samples Elo samples Units samples Detail When Stop Trigger is set to Number of Samples data logging is stopped when the number of logged samples reaches the value specified by Max Log Samples Free Storage Space Free Storage Space C 1971077120 by Detail Local drive space c available for data storage Units bytes Log File Size Log File Size lo Tip Strip Size of log file Units bytes Detail Indicates the current file size of the log file in process 12 Values Logged Values Logged os Tip Strip Number of samples logged Units samples Detail Indicates the current number of samples logged to the log file in process 282 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 13 Log Write Error O Log Write Error Tip Strip Error encountered writing to log file Detail Set to TRUE when an error is encountered during the data logging process such as insufficient memory available 1 File Creation Error File Creation Error Tip Strip File creation error Detail Set to TRUE when an error is encountered during log file creation Clear Errors Clear Errors Tip Strip Select to clear log file fault Detail Clears the error indicated by Log Write Error or File Creation Error LEDs 16 Variab
64. of Flex Control Parameter selector It maps the CAN signal list to a Flex Control Parameter The selected parameter on the Flex Control Parameter list will be overwritten by the CAN signal output value as soon as CAN_Run is enabled The rate at which it is written depends on what is defined in the database see section 4 23 1 for more details The Flex Control Parameters can be selected one of two ways by left unclicking and searching through the full list of Flex Control Parameters shown above or by right unclicking and searching through a hierarchical list of menus to find the particular Flex Control Parameter of interest as shown below A selected flex control parameter cannot be selected twice as it may otherwise lead to double overwriting When there are duplicate flex control parameters the entries will be highlighted red and the CAN_Run button will be disabled _ ee ee 2 mme 2e come ON _IPhaseCurrentlLower_Elementl gt Flex Control Parameter Not Sek D Lhrrser 1 Parameters DH IPhaseCurrentlower Elernenti DI Driver 2 Parameters DO _IPhaseCurrentLower_ Elements Flex Control Parameter CH Driver 3 Pararveters k DH PhaseCurrentLower Elernenril ss Ts DI_JPhaseCurrentLower Elements PFI LS ie 1 Parameters Dil_IPhaseCurrentLower_Element6 cor Spark Porameters i DH _IPhaseCurrentlower_Elenent General Purpose ESTTLA Parameters P DIL IPhaseDuration Elementi Throttle Driver Para
65. of PID final output to selected Flex Control Parameters Detail When Enabled enables the writing of the AuxPIDX_FinalOutput value to the array of selected Flex Control Parameters in AuxPID_X_FlexControlParam AuxPIDX_FinalOutput AuxPID1_FinalOut 0 936 fe Tip Strip Result of PID output PID feed forward Units Detail Displays the result of AuxPIDX_FF added to AuxPIDX _PIDOutput 8 AuxPIDX ManualOverride AuxPID1 Manual verride Disabled Detail When Enabled causes AuxPIDX ManualOutput to override AuxPIDX FinalOutput NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 223 19 AuxPIDX_ManualOutput AuxPID1i ManualOutput fo Units Detail Value to override AuxPIDX_FinalOutput when AuxPIDX ManualOverride is Enabled 20 AuxPID_X_FlexControlParam AuxPID 1 FlexControlParameters Not Selected Not Selected Enable Operating Points Pause OP ResetOP Log _ Data Tip Strip Select flex control parameters to be controlled by this PID control Detail Array of Flex Control Parameter selectors Each selector maps the AuxPIDX_FinalOutput value to a Flex Control Parameter The selected parameter will be overwritten by the AuxPIDX_FinalOutput The Flex Control Parameter can be selected one of two ways by left unclicking and searching through the full list of Flex Control Parameters shown above or by right unclicking and searching through a hierarchical list of menus to find the par
66. one shot is pressed all critical faults of the PFI Driver module will be cleared ShortCircuitFaults f gt LS1_ShortCircuitFault 152 Srortcrcuitraut s3_shortcrcuiFaut LS4_ShortCircuitFault PF Srortcircutraut D PFI2_ShortCircuitFautt PFI ShortCrcuiFaut f PFI4_ShortCircuitFautt Tip Strip Lowside channel short circuit fault 82 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail Indicates that the current rise rate to the associated channel is indicative of a short circuit condition This is a critical fault and will shut down the associated channel a PFI_OpenFaultOverride Show Fault PFI_OpenFaultOverride Tip Strip Determines whether open circuit faults are indicated Detail When set to OVERRIDE the open circuit faults will be ignored and will not be indicated OpenCircuitFaults 151_OpencircuitFaut D 152 OpenCrcuitFaut g LS3_ OpenCircurtFault as LS4_OpenCircuitFault PFI1_OpenCircuitFaut os PFI2_OpenCircuitFault D PFI3_OpenCircuitFault E PFI4_OpenCircurtFault Tip Strip Lowside channel open circuit fault Detail An open circuit fault is detected when the current never reaches the requested current level specified by the lowest current setpoint in Phase 1 or Phase 2 of the PFI 1 4 tab This is not a critical fault If an open circuit fault is indicated pulses will continue to be delivered to the channel as normal The open circuit fault indicator is updated at the
67. output See the equation above for reference Smaller values cause less proportional contribution to the PID output Larger values cause more proportional contribution to the PID output Negative values will generate PID outputs that are inversely proportional to the error Setpoint Process Variable AuxPIDX Kc_Action AuxPID1 Kc_Action 6ST Tip Strip Proportional contribution of PID controller Detail Indicates the contribution of the proportional term to the total PID output AuxPIDX Ti AUXPID1 Ti 0 005 Tip Strip Integral time constant for PID controller lower stronger action 0 disabled Detail Integral time constant A value of zero disables integral contribution to the PID output Smaller non zero values cause more contribution to the PID output Larger values cause less contribution to the PID output Negative values should not be used AuxPIDX Ti_Action AuxPID1 Ti Action _ Tip Strip Integral contribution of PID controller Detail Indicates the contribution of the integral term to the total PID output AuxPIDX_Td AuxPID1_Td_ b I Tip Strip Derivative time constant for PID controller higher stronger action 0 disabled Detail Derivative time constant A value of zero disables derivative contribution to the PID output Smaller values cause less contribution to the PID output Larger values cause more contribution to the PID output Negative values should not be used NI ED
68. parameter as specified in Table1D X InputSelector The 1D lookup table output is routed to the Flex Control Parameters selected in Table1D_ X_FlexControlParameters The Flex Control Parameters are a list of many controls from the various setup windows of the DI Driver System When a Flex Control Parameter is selected here the value from the lookup table output will overwrite that parameter The table is only active when it is enabled via Enable Table1D_X button s Table Setup gt LE Table2D_1 Table2D_2 Table2D_3 Table2D_4 Table2D_5 Table2D_6 Table2D_7 Table2D_8 Table1D_1 Table1D_2 Table1D_3 Table1D_4 Table1D_5 Table1D_6 Table1D_7 Table1D_8 Enable Table1D_1 Table1D_1 Table1D_1_HexControlParameters Table1D_1_InputSelector ne 0 500 A 9411 1 0 Freq Hz SimulatedSpeed J xX Y ee Table1D_1_Description 7 0000 5000 Not Selected X 111 1 1000 Converting frequency to 222 2 1500 rer up simulated engine speed 333 3 2000 a 444 4 2500 555 6 3000 666 7 3500 DRE ie 4000 7 888 9 4500 1000 5000 Enable Table1D_X Enable TableiD_1 Tip Strip Enables 1D Table Detail When ON the lookup table is enabled and the selected Flex Control Parameters will be overwritten by the lookup table output Table1D_X_InputSelector NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 213 Table1D_1_InputSelector Not Selec
69. passes the Sim_ AIX directly to AIX bypassing the filter and conversion lookup table This is useful for tuning PID control gains when AIX is being used for feedback control 10 Sim AIX 0 Sim_Al0 Tip Strip Simulation value Units Same as AIX _Units Detail The value in engineering units that is simulated when SimEnable_ AIX is ENABLED 148 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 10 Pulse Generation Setup Window The purpose of the Pulse Generation Setup window is to configure injection command pulse sequences for the DI Driver modules and the PFI Driver modules when configured for EPT or TMP operating modes The operating mode of each module is configured via its associated module setup window This window is not applicable for modules which are configured for Direct Mode NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 149 4 10 1 DI TMP Tab The DI TMP tab is for configuring Triggered Multi Pulse TMP injection command pulse sequences with up to 6 pulses per sequence Below is a timing diagram showing the effect of each parameter An independent TMP command sequence is provided for each DI Driver module The TMP command sequence associated with a DI Driver module can be configured to apply to all channels of that module or each channel can be configured to have its own sequence The configured TMP command sequence can be triggered to a specific channel via a button associated with each channel of each DI D
70. positions were not met during Position Cal Detail At the completion of the position calibration process the absolute value of the difference between the maximum and minimum position sensor signal voltages is compared againsts the Pos Cal Diff Thresh V within the Position Cal Settings cluster If is is less than the threshold then there was something wrong with the position calibration process because the throttle plate did not move through the expected range of travel or the position sensor is faulty Such a fault is indicated by this Boolean when TRUE and Position Calibrated will be set to FALSE upon completion of the calibration process 118 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 5 3 Channel X Control Calibration Tab 26 The purpose of the Channel X Position Calibration Tab is to configure parameters associated with controlling throttle position Prior to a position calibration and control calibration The Control Calibration Out values will exactly reflect the values of the corresponding Control Calibration In cluster Some of the Control Calibration Out parameters will be modified following a position calibration and or control calibration The modified values will be shown in the Control Calibration Out cluster s Throttle Driver Setup ThrottleModuleEnable ModulePresent HiSense o 31 A H2Sense los Jia ThrotteAni B m ThrottleAn2 1 54 V HiFault H2Fault 13 86 v Temperature 3
71. reference otherwise the module will not be able to read the proper digital signal level Refer to the operating manual for the NI 9411 module for further details Variable Reluctance VR position sensors are not supported by the DI Driver System VR position sensors are passive sensors and are sometimes referred to as inductive or magnetic mag pickup sensors They typically have only two wires These sensors output a positive negative sinusoidal waveform with an amplitude proportional to the speed of the trigger wheel The NI 9411 digital input module does not support such waveforms Supported Pattern Types The EPT function supports three crank and cam pattern types described in Table 4 11 a below NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 167 EPT Type te Pattern Type Pattern Description N M patterns have N evenly spaced teeth and M missing adjacent teeth gap on the crankshaft trigger wheel M is limited to 1 or 2 missing teeth N is stated in terms of evenly spaced teeth as if there were no missing teeth For example a 60 2 pattern would consist of 58 physical teeth followed by two missing teeth EPT N M function can N M EPT N M 7 be configured to track 360 or 720 degrees depending upon an optional camshaft input When tracking 360 degrees for 2 stroke engines the camshaft input is ignored When tracking 720 degrees for 4 stroke engines the camshaft input signal must be TRUE during every other crank
72. than 40 Bracket Bounded Lower Value Upper Value 250 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail Trigger Wildcard is satisfied if the Process Variable is greater than or equal to Lower Value and less than or equal to Upper Value Example 20 40 Trigger Wildcard is satisfied if the Process Variable is greater than or equal to 20 and less than or equal to 40 Note A Trigger Wildcard can combine the usage of parenthesis and brackets Example 20 40 Trigger Wildcard is satisfied if the Process Variable is greater than or equal to 20 and less than 40 Single Point Value Detail Trigger Wildcard is satisfied if the Process Variable is exactly equal to the single point value It is not recommended to use this type of Trigger Wildcard for continuously variable Process Variables This type of Wildcard should be used for Boolean Process Variables Example A Trigger Wildcard single point value of 1 is satisfied if a Boolean parameter such as 9411 1 0 State is equal to 1 or TRUE Note For single point value Wildcards do not use text such as TRUE or FALSE Use 1 to represent TRUE and 0 to represent FALSE Blank Detail If Trigger Wildcard is blank then the associated operating point is always satisfied This type of Wildcard can be useful to specify a default operating point if it is used for operating point 0 If no other Wildcard is satisfied then the default operating point will be executed without setting the
73. the selected window to the top with focus Pressing the X in the upper right corner of the main user interface window or pressing the red square button in the SCM console ae from left will close all open setup windows and stop user interface communications with the DI Driver System However the system will still continue to operate according to the most recent user interface settings The user interface can be started again by pressing the green run button within the SCM console The DI Driver System can operate automatically when powered up according to settings saved to a system calibration file The calibration file can be saved while the user interface is open by pressing the purple default calibration save button from the SCM console ai from left The default save function will save all current settings within the setup windows to the default calibration file The default calibration file is located on the DI Driver System controller at C system ni rt LabVIEW Data DefaultCal cdl The file system of the DI Driver System controller can be browsed using an FTP client recommended FTP client is FileZilla It is not recommended to use the FTP connection within the Windows file Explorer Please refer to the NI Direct Injector Driver System Interface for documentation of the parameters in the setup windows 24 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual sm NI Direct Injector Driver System NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS System ri
74. the system NI Software Calibration Management Toolkit SCM must be downloaded and installed to a PC with Windows 7 or newer To download SCM follow the link below Download SCM Software The link will take you to this webpage click on download to begin the download process FE e amp http sine ni com nips cds view p X e United States Contact Us NI Software Calibration Ma Conta NATIONAL Industries amp Support amp Events amp PMNSTRUMENTS Products Applications nee Community Academic Tank NI Home gt Products amp Services gt NI Powertrain Controls gt Powertrain Controls Systems gt NI Software Calibration Management Toolkit NI Powertrain Controls NI Software Calibration Management Toolkit for LabVIEW contact us fale aaa Modules for NI E mail this Page Print PDF Rich Text Call me now m ins 800 531 5066 Powertrain Controls Systems Simplify and optimize programming E mail NI m gt CompactRIO Engine Control large projects a communications between target and host for My Cart Bundle Plottrend capabilities of individual calibration x parameters CalPoints using memory buffers Total tems 0 NI Direct Injector Driver System Seater eee ee CalPoint types SGL 132 U32 18 U8 1D 2D Array Subtotal 0 NI Combustion Analysis System 1D 2D Lookup Table String Enumerated U32 l Fast efficient CalPoint communication wit
75. tooth gap The cam signal can be manipulated using the offset and extend functions to satisfy this requirement N 1 patterns have N evenly spaced teeth and a single additional tooth Plus1 placed between two evenly spaced teeth on the crankshaft trigger wheel The Plus1 tooth can be located at one of two different positions between two evenly spaced teeth advanced or retarded N is stated in terms of evenly spaced teeth as if there were no additional teeth For example a 6 1 pattern would consist of 6 physical evenly spaced teeth and N 1 EPT N 19 an additional physical tooth placed between two evenly spaced teeth EPT N 1 function can be configured to track 360 or 720 degrees depending upon an optional camshaft input When tracking 360 degrees for 2 stroke engines the camshaft input is ignored When tracking 720 degrees for 4 stroke engines the camshaft input signal must be TRUE during every other Plus1 tooth The cam signal can be manipulated using the offset and extend functions to satisfy this requirement Encoder patterns have N evenly spaced teeth on the crankshaft with a separately sensed single reference index tooth on the crankshaft or camshaft The rising edge of the reference must occur between the same EPT Enc 2 a Encoder EPT Enc 4 two crankshaft teeth rising edges each engine cycle The EPT Encoder function can be configured to track 360 or 720 degrees When tracking 360 degrees the reference tooth is located on th
76. tooth immediately following the Plus1 tooth while CamSig is FALSE and CamSig is TRUE respectively Tooth numbering for the two different Plus1 tooth location configurations is shown in figures 4 11 c and 4 11 d below 174 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 6 1 advanced Crankshaft Trigger Wheel Figure 4 11 c 6 1 advanced crankshaft trigger wheel tooth numbering NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 175 3 11 lusr 6 1 retarded Crankshaft Trigger Wheel Figure 4 11 d 6 1 retarded crankshaft trigger wheel tooth numbering Encoder Patterns Pattern Description Encoder patterns have N evenly spaced teeth on the crankshaft with a separately sensed single reference index EncZ tooth on the crankshaft or camshaft The rising edge of the reference must occur between the same two crankshaft teeth rising edges each and every cycle The EPT ENC function can be configured to track 360 or 720 degrees When tracking 360 degrees the reference tooth is located on the crankshaft yet is internally connected to the CamSig input of the EPT function via the EncZ digital input When tracking 720 degrees the reference tooth is located either on the crankshaft or on the camshaft When located on the crankshaft then an additional cam phase signal must be present in order to mask using EncZMask every other crank reference such that every other crank reference is allowed to pass through to
77. uPsnCalNeg_Init_Ch1 3 V Tip Strip The initial drive voltage to the throttle motor for negative position calibration Negative Units V NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 113 Detail Indicates the initial drive voltage to the throttle motor for negative position calibration This voltage should be selected to move the throttle plate most of the way toward minimum position without hitting minimum position This parameter should be a negative value uPsnCallnc_ChX uPsnCalinc_Ch1 SJo2 IM Tip Strip Incremental drive voltage applied to the throttle motor to keep the throttle plate moving toward the maximum position Positive Units V Detail Indicates the incremental drive voltage to the throttle motor to keep the throttle plate moving toward maximum position This incremental value is applied as necessary after the throttle plate stops moving due to the uPsnCalPos_Init_ChX voltage This parameter should be a positive value uPsnCalDec_ChX uPsnCalDbec Chil 0 2 v Tip Strip Decremental drive voltage applied to the throttle motor to keep the throttle plate moving toward the minimum position Negative Units V Detail Indicates the decremental drive voltage to the throttle motor to keep the throttle plate moving toward minimum position This decremental value is applied as necessary after the throttle plate stops moving due to the u Pos Cal Negative Init voltage This parameter shoul
78. windows but the function may be optionally enabled or disabled The green LED for each parameter indicates whether the parameter is actively being written by the function For example the screen shot in Figure 4 24 a shows that the 1D Table 1 output which is configured via the Table Setup window is actively writing to the PFl_ Duration Chan1_EPT Flex Control Parameter because the table is enabled The SimulatedSpeed Flex Control Parameter is also selected to be written by the 1D Table 2 function but the table is not enabled and is not actively writing the parameter Active Flex Control Parameters PFI_Duration_Chan1_EPT 1D Table 1 r s SimulatedSpeed 1D Table 2 Figure 4 25 a Active Flex Control Parameters 276 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 26 CalScopes Window The purpose of the CalScopes window is to configure up to eight oscilloscope like displays for monitoring various software variables within the DI Driver System This is an advanced feature which is documented within the SCM user manual s CalScopes _CalScope Scope Channels Memory Sample Units Add Remove Open Engine 5000 Engine Speed 2500 RPM All 2500 Scope 2 5000 Open Scope 3 5000 Open Scope 4 5000 Open baba Run Control use Trigger INORA Source Channel Triggered Position RISING _ ABSOLUTE Dynamic Level Channel EngineSpeed RPM Sampl
79. with optional NI 9220 and NI 9862 modules purchased separately For more information on the hardware included see What Is Included The DI Driver System software can only communicate with the modules when they are in their assigned slots shown in figure 3 3 1 a The NI 9411 modules can communicate with the any of the DI Driver modules in their appropriate slots For example the NI 9411 module in Slot 1 NI 9411_ 1 has the ability to communicate digital input signals to any of the DI Drivers in Slots 2 3 5 or 6 Please note the nomenclature of the DI Drivers and their corresponding slots as this the identification used in the application interface Figure 3 3 1 a 6 9 and 12 Ch DI Driver System Configuration With Optional NI 9220 and NI 9862 CAN Module The NI 9220 and NI 9862 CAN modules are optional modules that may be purchased separately For more information on the functionalities of these modules please see Using The DI Driver System to Control Fuel Pressure Module Assignments for NI 9155 MXle Expansion Chassis Each NI EDIDS may be expanded with an NI 9155 MXle expansion chassis to support the additional I O modules shown below For more information on the optional expansion I O modules see What Is Included 44 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual HA Sy LEHIA Gat HO REA REP LA TRES LAE PL LF PGT Lis ray NI 9759 ETET Figure 3 3 1 b NI 9155 MxXle Expansion Chassis With Current Optio
80. zero position is specific to the EPT pattern type 100 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual TDC10 oau TDC12 Tip Strip Top Dead Center Units CAD CAD Detail Crank angle degrees of offset between the TDC1 and TDCX where X represents the cylinder number Typically engine cylinder 1 will have a TDC of zero because the GlobalT DC Offset is used to specify CAD between absolute zero and TDC1 The other TDC parameters will have non zero values which specify the CAD spacing with respect to TDC1 The TDC values are mapped to a specific hardware driver channel using the EST TL2 X_ TDC drop down list parameters 3 ESTTL2 X_TDC ped 1_ TRC oj TDCI ESTUZ 2 TDC ej TDC2 ESTTL2 3_TOC GIE TUG T ESTTL24_ TDC Efc ESTTL2 TDC focs ESTTL26_ EEE TDC6 ESTTL2 T TOC a TOC ESTTL2 8_ TOC Le TOCE TDCI TDC TDC4 TDC6 TDC1O0 TDC11 TOC12 Tip Strip Selects Top Dead Center reference associated with driver channel Detail TDC parameters are mapped to a specific ESTTL2 channel by selecting a TDCX from the drop down list in each ESTTL2 X TDC parameter where X is the DI Driver module number and Y is the DI Driver channel number NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 101 4 ESTTL2 1_Firing_ Window_Start ESTTL2 X Firing_ Window Start ESTTL2 X Firing Window End ESTTL2 1_Fi
81. zip file downloaded contains both the exe and upd files The software update utility and associated upd files are only compatible with existing DI Driver Systems using CRIO 9082 controllers A software update cannot be performed on new cRIO controllers without a working copy of the DI Driver System software NOTE The system controller network interface settings are not changed by updating the software image The DI Driver System must be in static IP address mode for the update to restore correctly For more information on changing your system to static IP mode see Changing The Network Settings Of The DI Driver System To update the DI Driver System controller software following the instructions below 1 Take note of the DI Driver System software version on the Static Info tab of the Execution Information window of the user interface 2 Using a web browser navigate to the DI Driver System product page and check the version of the software update If the software update is a later version than the currently running software download it to the PC 3 Download the updater utility zip file to the PC and unzip it to produce the executable 4 Run the DI Driver System Updater utility to see the dialog shown below DI Driver System ater ig DID Sys Upd Target IP Address a Please enter the IP address of the SADI DI Driver System target and click the refresh button Backup target before update 4 Preserve calibration files
82. 0 Series User Manual 4 11 Engine Position Tracking Setup Window The purpose of the Engine Position Tracking EPT Setup window is to configure angular position tracking of the engine crankshaft for supervising the generation of engine synchronous injection commands The Engine Position Tracking Setup window contains a tabbed pane with four tabs EPT Tab for configuring parameters related to the EPT functions TDC Channel Mapping Tab for assigning Top Dead Center TDC values to each DI Driver and PFI Driver channel Cam Phase Capture Tab for configuring the crank angle capture of rising edges of Cam1 and Cam2 signals EPT Diagnostics Tab for diagnosing problems with engine position tracking and signals Configuration of EPT is only applicable if one or more of the DI Driver modules or PFI Driver module is configured for EPT mode EPT supports a variety of crank and cam signal patterns including encoder patterns N M patterns and N 1 patterns Position Signal Types and Connections The DI Driver System only supports digital crank and cam position signal types wired to the NI 9411 digital input module s Hall effect sensors are a common example of digital position sensors They are active sensors requiring power and ground There are a wide variety of Hall effect position sensors and they typically have three wires Some drive their outputs digitally low and high from 0 V signal ground to the sensor power supply voltage resultin
83. 1 2 Manage NI XNET Databases Dialog Vs 269 4 24 TDK HV Supply Control Setup Window iii 272 4 25 Active Flex Control Parameters Window cccccccecessecseeeseceeeteeeteeeseeuneeeneesuetseeeeeeeaeeneeeseeeaaes 276 20 CAlSCODES V VINGOW ES E na ne date matin ee a Om eines 217 RAT CANON VeVi ON ous a a De re Ed en 278 4 26 LOU ala Setup VVINGOW SE dns etienne ile etienne tous en tn 279 e A oars 6 Rae A A LAS O SR SR ne ne eee a ee ne eee eee A 285 4 30 Execution Information WINKOW ccccceccseeceecceeeceeeceeceneteneteuetseetaeeseceaeeenetsnetsesteeetseeseeeeaesanes 289 SO ES QUO MIO a a ad a a eh er 290 D 3s AIN WOK a a an dance a do ne date en a Cou 291 SOS ROIS AO a ae a ne a a do 292 4 30 4 Expansion Misc Execution Info iii 293 DT OUDIS SOON D na ne D De ne a Ne tie 294 CD E r E ene D a ee ae er RR EE eee ne OT 296 T Additional Suppor Feedback ernennen a abr tgaduanulbiseniadenamauseitsen 308 OTD OF ane FONE ON aa A cine 309 4 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Cd VAN IN PS Te E tate teontato 310 O 2 0 6 0 2 Een eee eee eRe a ee ere an mee ee oe ere 311 D PAG Wl AEG dca aisle oa ie en eee ne anda date en de ne ne eae use 312 DR URS EEE A EEE De N A E EE E AA E E E a 313 8 5 Warning Regarding Use of NI Products LR 314 3 6 Environmental Management sessirnir e e r Eea daa 315 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 5 1 About the NI Expandable Direct Inj
84. 1_Chan3Enable DI2_ChaniEnable J DI2_Chan2Enable mi gt i Tip Strip Selects destination of the 1D lookup table output Detail Array of Flex Control Parameter selectors Each selector maps the lookup table output to a Flex Control Parameter The selected parameter will be overwritten by the lookup table output The Flex Control Parameter can be selected one of two ways by left unclicking and searching through the full list of Flex Control Parameters shown above or by right unclicking and searching through a hierarchical list of menus to find the particular Flex Control Parameter of interest as shown in the Direct Mapping Section NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 215 4 16 2 Table2D A 2D lookup table control consists of a set of X and Y 1D input arrays and a matching Z 2D output array The X values correspond to the input parameter as specified in Table2D Xa InputSelector The Y values correspond to the input parameter as specified in Table2D Xb InputSelector The 2D lookup table Z output is routed to the Flex Control Parameters selected in Table2D X FlexControlParameters The Flex Control Parameters are a list of many controls from the various setup windows of the DI Driver System When a Flex Control Parameter is selected here the value from the lookup table output will overwrite that parameter The table is only active when it is enabled via Enable Table2D_X button Table1D_ 1 Table2D
85. 400 Series User Manual 4 NI Direct Injector Driver System Interface s NI Direct Injector Driver System 7 NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS System fiver D jector ny by CalScopes CalTrends Log Data Setup Faults Execution Information NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 65 The main user interface window contains a list of all setup windows used to configure the various DI Driver System functions Double clicking on a setup window name will open the window and make the listed name bold Multiple setup windows may be open simultaneously Pressing the X in the upper right corner of each window will close the window Also double clicking the bolded window name within the main window list will close the window A single click of a bolded window name will bring the selected window to the top with focus Pressing the X in the upper right corner of the main user interface window or pressing the red square button in the SCM console ae from left will close all open setup windows and stop user interface communications with the DI Driver System However the system will still continue to operate according to the most recent user interface settings The user interface can be started again by pressing the green run button within the SCM console s Software Calibration Management 192 168 1 100 gt DIDS 9082 Hostvi File Edit Operate Pairings Calibration Options Snapshot Help gGu
86. 8 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 2 2 HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE This device is capable of operating at voltages up to 190V Extreme care should be taken to protect against shock Even when the device is completely powered down allow approximately five minutes for the internal high voltage to dissipate Do not touch any of the driver module screw terminals or injector terminals while the device is powered NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 9 3 Getting Started This guide will provide instructions to set up the NI Direct Injector Driver System hardware and software 10 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 1 What Is Included Software 1 DI Driver System software image pre installed on the system controller 2 NI Software Calibration Management Toolkit SCM for LabVIEW downloaded from www ni com Hardware 1 Expandable Direct Injector Driver System CRIO 9082 NI 9751 Integrated Digital Input DI Driver Controller amp Chassis Module Module 781787 02 779005 01 782076 01 Table 3 1 a I O Hardware Included In The Expandable DI Driver System DI Driver System Optional I O modules supported by all DI Driver Systems e NI 9220 16 Channel 100 kS s ch 16 bit 10 V Analog Input Module 37 Pin D SUB P N 782615 01 e NI 9862 1 Port High Speed FD NI XNET CAN C Series Module P N 781639 01 Optional I O modules supported by O
87. 8 24 C TLead_ ChX TLead_Ch1 Bp Jlis L Throttle Channel 2 Channel 1 Control Control Calibration In TLead_Ch1 fa lo s TLag_Ch1 fa o a Es KRPos_Ch1 E 0 5 v deg TIPos_Chi fe 015 s TDPos_Chi 0 02 s KRNeg_Ch1 S C v deg TiNeg_Ch1 oa s TONeg_ ch 10 001 s Channel 1 Position Calibration LHPsnBand_Ch1 0 2 deg ULH chi BE mv ULHLag Chi 20 06 IIS US chi Flos vV la USLag_Chi is lois EI LHPsn Chi TDPOS_ Out _ chi oor s ahha chi S 6 899 deg 1 v MotorResistance_Ch1 TINeg_Out_Ch1 fa 25 Ohms 0 1 s Psn _FaultThresh_Chi TDNeg_Out_Ch1 B jo ICI 0 001 s Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 lead compensation time Channel 1 Control Calibration Control Calibration Out LHPsn_ Out Chi 6 923 deg MotorResistance Qut_Ch1 2 5 ohms Psn_FaultThreshQut_Ch1 Go iS NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 119 Units s Seconds Detail Adjusts the lead compensation on the PosSetpoint_ChX A lead lag compensation function is internally inserted in the PosSetpoint_ChX value to the internal PID function TLead_ChX can be increased to intensify the change in Position Setpoint This parameter is not changed by a position or control calibration procedure TLag_ChX TLag_Ch1 Slo1 hrs Tip Strip H Bridge channel X lag compensation time
88. AN communication on the NI EDIDS they must install NI XNET Drivers The drivers are free to download at http sine ni com psp app doc p id psp 903 lang en For installtion instructions refer to NI XNET Hardware and Software Installtion Guide For additional information on NI XNET refer to NI XNET Support 18 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 2 3 Connecting To The DI Driver System This section provides information about connecting to the DI Driver System user interface via SCM and how to change the network interface settings of the system controller NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 19 3 2 3 1 Out Of The Box Connection This section describes how to establish a connection with the DI Driver System user interface via SCM NI ships the DI Driver System with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 and a Subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 The Windows PC used to interface with the system must have a similar IP address and Subnet mask but the IP address must be different in the last address number The directions below illustrate how to make the initial network connection to the system and open the system user interface 1 The customer must provide a Windows 7 or later PC with an Ethernet LAN port 2 Install SCM for LabVIEW to the PC 3 Check the Windows Firewall settings or 3rd party firewall settings to allow SCM to communicate with the external system 4 Power up the DI Driver System controller The DI Driver
89. APPLICATION WHERE A SYSTEM FAILURE WOULD CREATE A RISK OF HARM TO PROPERTY OR PERSONS INCLUDING THE RISK OF BODILY INJURY AND DEATH SHOULD NOT BE RELIANT SOLELY UPON ONE FORM OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DUE TO THE RISK OF SYSTEM FAILURE TO AVOID DAMAGE INJURY OR DEATH THE USER OR APPLICATION DESIGNER MUST TAKE REASONABLY PRUDENT STEPS TO PROTECT AGAINST SYSTEM FAILURES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO BACK UP OR SHUT DOWN MECHANISMS BECAUSE EACH END USER SYSTEM IS CUSTOMIZED AND DIFFERS FROM NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS TESTING PLATFORMS AND BECAUSE A USER OR APPLICATION DESIGNER MAY USE NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS IN COMBINATION WITH OTHER PRODUCTS IN A MANNER NOT EVALUATED OR CONTEMPLATED BY NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS THE USER OR APPLICATION DESIGNER IS ULTIMATELY RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING AND VALIDATING THE SUITABILITY OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS WHENEVER NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS ARE INCORPORATED IN A SYSTEM OR APPLICATION INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE APPROPRIATE DESIGN PROCESS AND SAFETY LEVEL OF SUCH SYSTEM OR APPLICATION 314 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 8 6 Environmental Management National Instruments is committed to designing and manufacturing products in an environmentally responsible manner NI recognizes that eliminating certain hazardous substances from our products is beneficial not only to the environment but also to NI customers For additional environmental information refer to the NI and the Environment Web page
90. AT between each crank tooth The range of CurrentPosition would be from 0 to MAX_CAT 2 36 128 9216 This is the total number of angular positional ticks that are tracked by the EPT over a complete 4 stroke engine cycle Therefore CurrentPosition will track from 0 to 9216 and roll over to 0 at the occurrence of tooth 0 This provides an angular resolution of 0 078 CAD CAT The calculated CurrentPosition is maintained with a 16 bit integer and cannot exceed 65535 Therefore NumberOfCrank Teeth should not exceed a value that causes MaxCAT to exceed 16 bit representation The calculated MaxCAT value is displayed on the EPT tab Extrapolation MaxCAT 180 EPT ENC 4 max 720 EPT ENC 4 min EPT N M 7 ma EPT N M 7 mi EPT N 1 9 ma So S So am AA gt L RER Re x lt EPT N 1 9 min Stroke Extrapolation CS RE PS ee ee x ES PE PS PE RE PS RE OS RE RE eX Table 4 11 6 EPT function Extrapolation Values and Suggestion Tooth Count Ranges Loss of Sync The EPT will lose sync under normal conditions if the crankshaft speed falls below the stall speed as specified by the StallSpeed parameter of the EPT tab Keep in mind that the EPT function uses a 24 bit 40MHZ timer to measure the period between each physical tooth Therefore a StallSpeed should be specified such that the tooth period timer will not exceed 24 bit representation This is a straight forward calculation for encoder patterns For exampl
91. Auxiliary PWM Setup Expansion Auxiliary PWM 1 ee 1 Timin gMode ExpAuxPWM1 Frequency ExpAuxPVV M1 Period Frequency 0 10 EpAu xPWM1 ControlMode Duty Cycle Expansion Auxiliary PWM 2 ExpAuxPWM2 Timin gMode aj Frequency ExpAUxPWM2 ControMode El Duty Cycle Expansion Auxiliary PWM 3 Sale 2 Timin gMode Eat lt ELE oi xpAuUxPVWYM3 Periog i Frequ ency 100 Hz ExpAUxPWM3 ControMode ExpAuPUM3 Dutycyc A Duty ie Expansion Auxiliary PWM 4 ExpAuxPWM4 Timin gMode A Frequency EAU WM4 ControlMode El Eur Se E ExpAuxPWMX TimingMode ExpAuxPVWVM1 TimingMode Period Tip Strip Format of PWM signal command Detail Selects the specification mode for the time between rising edges of the PWM signal The options are Frequency or Period The fields for Frequency or Period will be enabled according to the selection ExpAuxPWMX ControlMode ExpAuxP WM1i ControlMode Duty Cycle Pulse Width 242 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Tip Strip Format of PWM signal command Detail Selects the specification mode for the time between rising and falling edges of the PWM signal The options are Duty Cycle or Pulse Width The fields for Duty Cycle or Pulse Width will be enabled according to the selection ExpAuxPWMX Frequency Exp AuxPVV M1 Freguency 100 Hz Tip Strip Frequency of PWM signal Units Hz Detail When ExpAuxPWMX TimingMode is set to Frequency this
92. Driver module PFI channels are commanded by a specified sequence of pulses and triggered by crankshaft angle events for each pulse with respect to an assigned Top Dead Center TDC reference value The pulse sequence is configured via the PFI tab of the Pulse Generation Setup window The TDC reference value is configured via the TDC Channel Mapping tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window Engine position tracking parameters are configured via the EPT tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window for a variety of crank and cam signal patterns PFI OneShot PFL_OneShot or Tip Strip Generates one shot command to selected channel Detail When pressed the PFI Driver module will deliver a one shot pulse to the PFI channel selected in PFI OneShotSelect having a duration specified by PFl_ OneShotTime This button returns to the OFF state automatically NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 81 PFI_OneShotSelect PFI OneShotSelect Disabled PFI1 PFI PFI3 PFI4 Tip Strip Selects channel for one shot command Detail PFI OneShotSelect selects the PFI Driver channel to which a one shot pulse is delivered To disable one shot functionality set to Disabled PFIl_OneShotTime PFI OneShotTime 1 msec Tip Strip Duration of one shot command Units msec Detail Duration of one shot pulses PFI FaultClear on PFI_FauttClear Tip Strip Clear PFI module short circuit faults Detail When this
93. Edge fo DBTDC Tip Strip Captured angle of rising cam edge Units DBTDC Detail The crank angle location of a Cam1 signal rising edge in Degrees Before TDC DBTDC captured in the window defined by Cam1_Capture_Start and Cam1_Capture_End NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 193 Cam2_Capture_ Start Cam2_Capture_Start fso DBTDC Tip Strip Start of angle based capture window for cam signal Units DBTDC Detail Defines the start of a window with respect to the selected TDCX to search within for Cam2 rising edge Cam2_Capture_End Cam _Capture_End E 60 DBTDC Tip Strip End of angle based capture window for cam signal Units DBTDC Detail Defines the end of a window with respect to the selected TDCX to search within for Cam2 rising edge Cam2_RisingEdge Cam 2_RisingEdge 0 DBTDC Tip Strip Captured angle of rising cam edge Units DBTDC Detail The crank angle location of a Cam2 signal rising edge in Degrees Before TDC DBTDC captured in the window defined by Cam2_Capture_ Start and Cam2_ Capture End 194 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual a Engine Position Tracking Setup 230000 7 MB cursor2 245000 7 185000 190000 EPT Scope Mode En 2 Fred Sample Not Assigned EPT Scope Tip Strip Displays scope traces determined by setup Units Samples Detail Displays the logic level of each EPT function
94. Exp_CalSeqStart_DigChanAsn VR Hall Module Setup a Not Assigned K Ww o m 7 8 A z D mi a n Channel Name 9411 3 DI0 9411 3 DI1 9411 3 DI2 9411 _3 DI3 9411 3 DI4 9411 3 DIS5 VR Hall Ch1 VR Hall Ch2 VR Hall Ch3 VR Hall Ch4 VR Hall Ch5 VR Hall Ch6 O S A Lu LITTLE oO O oO 3 O O oO olo S 8 103000038 Fr Le i o S aD HR ee o S There are thirteen destination functions which can be assigned a digital input VR Hall input or an internal PWM signal source There are up to sixteen digital signal sources The Crank Cam and Encoder destinations are always applicable The PFIX destinations are only applicable if a PFI Driver module is inserted in its assigned slot The number of applicable signal sources depends on the NI 9411 digital input module and NI 9760 VR Hall module inserted in the system and the slots in which they are inserted If these modules are inserted in the assigned slots then all twelve digital input sources are available There are four internally generated PWM signal sources always available that are configured via the Expansion Auxiliary PWM Setup window 140 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Multiple destination controls that are not on the same row can have the same selected digital signal source However controls that are on the same row cannot
95. FI and LS Driver Setup window Since most engine controllers have diagnostic features to detect fault conditions with the fuel injector or ignition loads and pull up resistors are not inductive loads the engine controller may report open circuit faults Such faults should be ignored If the engine controller refuses to operate the channels due to such faults then another command method must be arranged Figure 3 3 3 4 c illustrates this configuration 5V or BATT External Engine Controller 1K r NI 9411 a pin Port Fuel Injector Command Active Low Configuration Figure 3 3 3 4 c Connecting an Engine Controller Port Fuel Injector Output to the DI Driver System Using External ECU Direct Injector Driver Outputs When using another direct injected engine control unit ECU to command the DI Driver System it is sometimes possible to use the ECU direct injector driver outputs However it is likely that an ECU direct injector driver output will not tolerate resistive loads and internal faults will be generated which will shut down the ECU channel Typically ECU direct injector driver outputs will have a positive and negative terminal for each injector The negative terminal is a lowside switch to ground and can be connected similarly to Figure 3 3 3 4 c If the engine controller refuses to operate the channels due to diagnostic faults then another command method must be arranged Using Transistor Transistor Logic TTL Commands
96. GES EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF This limitation of the liability of National Instruments will apply regardless of the form of action whether in contract or tort including negligence Any action against National Instruments must be brought within one year after the cause of action accrues National Instruments shall not be liable for any delay in performance due to causes beyond its reasonable control The warranty provided herein does not cover damages defects malfunctions or service failures caused by owner s failure to follow the National Instruments installation operation or maintenance instructions owner s modification of the product owner s abuse misuse or negligent acts and power failure or surges fire flood accident actions of third parties or other events outside reasonable control 310 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 8 2 Copyright Under the copyright laws this publication may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording storing in an information retrieval system or translating in whole or in part without the prior written consent of National Instruments Corporation National Instruments respects the intellectual property of others and we ask our users to do the same NI software is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws Where NI software may be used to reproduce software or other materials belonging to others y
97. HPV_ManualOverride a HPV_ManualDC Slo I HPV_DC HPV_NomResistance HPV_Current NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 225 Battery or Power Supply 12V Typical gt 5A Automotive 5A Fuse PFI Module Connector Figure 4 10 a Diagram of Typical Wiring of an Inlet Metering Valve IMV and a High Pressure Valve HPV to a PFI Driver Module PFI ModulePresent PFI_ModulePresent Tip Strip Indicates PFI Driver module present and externally powered Detail Indicates that the system software detects that the PFI Driver module is externally powered and inserted in the assigned slot RailP_Channel RailP_Channel None AIO All Al AI3 Tip Strip Assigns analog signal source to IMV and HPV rail pressure controller Detail Selects one of the four channels of the NI 9220 analog input module assigned to rail pressure PID control feedback 226 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual RailP_Max_Thresh RailP Max _Thresh gt ber Tip Strip Rail pressure maximum threshold which causes a critical fault and shuts down associated PFI LSX channels Units bar Detail An upper threshold for rail pressure which defines a critical fault level that could potentially damage the fuel system If this threshold is exceeded the low side channels controlling the IMV and HPV turn off until the RailPFault error has been cleared RailP_ Fault Rail
98. IDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 221 AuxPIDX Td_Action AuxPID1 Td_Action Tip Strip Derivative contribution of PID controller Detail Indicates the contribution of the derivative term to the total PID output TT AuxPIDX PIDMax AUxXPID1 PIDMax Tip Strip PID output maximum limit before feed forward is added Detail Maximum output allowed from the PID controller 12 AuxPIDX_PIDMin AuxPID1_ PIDMin b I Tip Strip PID output minimum limit before feed forward is added Detail Minimum output allowed from the PID controller 13 AuxPIDX FF AUXPIDI FF Tip Strip Feed forward value added to PID output Result placed in PID final output Detail Feed forward value that is added to the PID output value The result is placed in AuxP ID1_FinalOutput i AuxPIDX_PIDOutput AuxPID1_PIDOutput 0 536 Tip Strip PID controller output before feed forward is added Detail Output value from the PID controller This value is limited by the values in AuxPIDX_PIDMin and AuxPIDX PIDMax This value is added to AuxPIDX FF and the result is placed in AuxPIDX FinalOutput 222 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual sis Aux PID X Plot Aux PID 1 Plot Tip Strip Launches a plot displaying AuxPIDX_ProcessVariable AuxPIDX_PIDSetpoint and AuxPIDX_FinalOutput mas CS Gd 6 AuxPID1_FlexControlParamWrite AuxPID1 FexControlParamWrite Disabled Tip Strip Enables writing
99. Interfaces you should see NI 9862 CAN1 There should be a warning mark next to it which indicates a incompatibility issue between the XNET CAN module and the controller Click on the NI 9862 CAN1 device and push Update Firmware on the right window and click OK You don t have to stop the user interface or the application that is running on the controller while the firmware is updating Click the CAN Run button again on the XNET CAN Setup Window If the error still persists please contact the National Instruments support team 294 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 295 6 Diagrams 1 Reverse Battery Relay Protection Diagram System Power Tyco Relay PN V23232 A0001 X003 12V Tyco Relay PN V23232 A0002 X009 24V Bosch Relay PN 0 332 002 156 12V Bosch Relay PN 0 332 002 256 24V 2 NI cRIO 9082 Slot Assignments 3 NI 9155 MXle Express RIO Chassis Slot Assignments 296 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Rs NI 9754 NI 9754 2 ul T W LUE j ll L pa i b i Slot 2 is Reserved for future support modules 4 NI cRIO 9082 Front Panel LEDs T RAJ 45 Ethernet Ports 1 and 2 13 DIP Switches Power Connector 8 MAXI Express Connector RJ 50 RS 485 Serial Port 9 VGA Video Connector NOT SHOWN Grounding Screw 10 AS 232 Serial Port 14 cFAST SSD Module USB Ports 1 4 11 Power Button 15 CXM Expansion Conn
100. P Fault Tip Strip Indicates the rail pressure fault status Detail Indicates that the rail pressure has exceeded the value specified in RailP_Max_Thresh This fault must be manually cleared by Clear RailP Fault BattV BattV 23 538 l V Tip Strip Battery voltage measured by the DI Driver module Units V Detail Battery voltage measured by the DI Driver module Battery voltage is used to calculate in real time the current supplied to the IMV and HPV solenoids to ensure that the current does not exceed 3A RailP_Setpoint RailP_Setpoint lo bar Tip Strip Rail pressure setpoint to PID controller Units bar Detail Desired rail pressure setpoint NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 227 i RailP RailP 0 5 bar Tip Strip Rail pressure in bar Units bar Detail Rail pressure used as feedback to the PID controller The analog channel utilized for pressure feedback is selected via RailP Channel The analog channel must be converted to units of bar via the Analog Input Setup window RailP_ControlMode Raill_ControMode IMV PID MODE HPV PID MODE Tip Strip Selects the IMV or HPV as controlled by PID Detail Selects between IMV PID Mode or HPV PID Mode When in IMV PID Mode the HPV PID control parameters will be disabled grayed out and the HPV will be controlled by a constant duty cycle and frequency When in HPV PID Mode the IMV PID control parameters will be disabled g
101. PFI LS2 parameters are not active because PFI LS1 controls PFI LS2 Likewise when PFI LS34 Lock is ON then PFI LS4 parameters are not active because PFI LS3 controls PFI LS4 Lock PFI LS1and2 Lock PFILSiand2 UNLOCKED Tip Strip Lock PFI LS1 amp 2 Channels This can only be Enabled when PFI LS1_ChanEnable and PFI LS2 ChanEnable buttons are OFF Detail When ON PFI LS1 and PFI LS2 channels are locked together for synchronous operation This button is only active when both PFI LS1 and PFI LS2 channels are disabled This rule ensures that LS channels one and two will be in lock sync when enabled Lock PFI LS3and4 Lock PFI LS3and4 UNLOCKED Tip Strip Lock PFI LS3 amp 4 Channels This can only be Enabled when PFI LS3 ChanEnable and PFI LS4 ChanEnable buttons are OFF Detail When ON PFI LS3 and PFI LS4 channels are locked together for synchronous operation This button is only active when both PFI LS3 and PFI LS4 channels are disabled This rule ensures that LS channels three and four will be in lock sync when enabled PFI LS1 Source PFI LS1 So0urce lt Host Configuration Rail Pressure IMV PID Rail Pressure HPV PID Tip Strip Source of lowside PWM command Detail Selects the mode of operation for PFI LS1 Host Configuration Allows PWM parameters to be entered directly via this tab 88 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual IMV Control Causes PWM parameters for the associated channel to be sourced from the IMV
102. Patterns Indicates FAULT when a gap occurs before the expected number of Crank teeth have been counted N 1 Patterns Indicates FAULT when a Plus1 tooth occurs before the expected number of Crank teeth have been counted The FAULT condition causes a loss of sync Re sync is not allowed until the flag is cleared by pressing the SyncFlagClear button MissedGapFlag MissedGapFlag Tip Strip Indicates that the crank gap was not detected when expected Detail This indicator only applies to N M patterns Indicates FAULT when an excess number of crank teeth are counted before the gap is detected In other words physical teeth are received at the location where a gap is expected This condition causes a loss of sync Re sync is not allowed until the flag is cleared by pressing the SyncFlagClear button e MissedCamFlag D MissedCamFiag Tip Strip Indicates that the EncZ rising edge was not detected when expected Detail This indicator only applies to encoder patterns Indicates FAULT when an excess number of crank teeth are counted before the EncZ rising edge occurs This condition causes a loss of sync Re sync is not allowed until the flag is cleared by pressing the SyncFlagClear button MissedPlus1Flag D MissedPlus1Flag Tip Strip Indicates that the crank Plus1 pulse was not detected when expected Detail This indicator only applies to N 1 patterns Indicates FAULT when an excess number of crank teeth are counted bef
103. Series User Manual 17 Connecting Solenoid Direct Injectors to the DI Driver Battery or Power Supply 12 24V Typical 75W i Automotive 20A Fuse p Recommended wire 16AWG 200V or higher INJ INJ2 ADE e ree ee ie ee INJ3 X INU34 EXT PWR DI Driver Connector 5 E A i LL EH L L Solenoid Direct Injectors 18 Connecting Piezo Direct Injectors to the DI Driver NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 303 Battery or Power Supply 12 24V Typical 75W Automotive 20A Fuse S BATT INJ INJ INJ2 INJ2 7 B DI Driver Connector 19 Connecting Port Fuel Injectors to the PFI Driver 304 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Recommended wire 16AWG 200V or higher Battery or Power Supply 12V Typical gt 5A g PFI Module Connector Inj 4 Port Fuel o Injectors 20 Connecting General Purpose Solenoids to the PFI Driver LS Channels NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 305 Battery or Power Supply 12V Typical gt 5A Automotive 5A Fuse S oe fF Actuator ee Actuator a Actuator Relay or Actuator PFI Module Connector 21 Connecting Inlet Metering High Pressure Valves to the PFI Driver 306 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual cRIO 9082 RS232 serial connector Automotive 5A Fuse Battery or Power Supply 12V Typical
104. Sticky Sticky Detail Indicates whether the fault is register as Sticky When registered as Sticky the fault will remain active for the time shown in Sticky Time Sticky Time Sticky Time Detail Indicates the amount of time a fault will remain active after the fault condition is removed 16 Sticky Cycle Sticky Cycle Detail Indicates the number of Key Cycles the fault will remain active after the fault condition is removed Fault Time Fault Time Detail Indicates the date and time of the last occurrence of the fault 18 Fault Cycle Fault Cycle Detail Indicates the number of Key Cycles since the fault condition was removed NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 287 Clear Time Clear Time Detail Indicates the date and time when the fault was last cleared 20 Trip Count Trip Count Detail Double clicking on the cell related to the fault in the Trip Count column will clear that fault s trip count al Disable Disable Detail Double clicking the Disable cell associated with the fault will disable the fault from becoming active even if the fault condition is present 288 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 30 Execution Information Window The purpose of the Execution Information window is for diagnostic purposes It is divided into four tabs titled Static Info Network Run Time Info and Expansion Misc Execution Info
105. Units Detail Final duty cycle applied to the IMV solenoid si IMV_NomResistance IMV_NomResistance 2 5 0 Tip Strip Nominal resistance of IMV solenoid Units Ohms Detail Nominal resistance of the IMV solenoid This value is used to calculate the maximum final duty cycle allowed to the IMV It is important to measure this resistance within 0 5 ohms 32 IMV_Current IMV_Current 0 A Tip Strip Estimated current to IMV based on battery voltage and nominal solenoid resistance Units A Detail An estimate of the current flowing through the IMV based on the duty cycle battery voltage and the nominal resistance of the valve HPV_Enable HPV_Enable OFF Tip Strip Enables PWM control of HPV Detail Enables the final PWM parameters to the lowside channels configured for HPV via the PFI and LS Driver 1 Setup window NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 233 HPV_LSChanAsn HPV_LSChanAsn Tip Strip Indicates the PFI Driver lowside channels assigned to drive the HPV The channel assignment is configured via the PFI and LS Driver 1 Setup window HPV Freq HPV_Freg o 1000 Hz Tip Strip Operating Frequency of HPV PWM command Units Hz Detail Frequency of the PWM signal to the HPV solenoid HPV_Kc HPV_Ke lo l bar Tip Strip HPV PID proportional gain Units bar Detail Proportional gain A value of zero disables proport
106. User Manual 8 4 Patents For patents covering the National Instruments products technology refer to the appropriate location Help Patents in your software the patents txt file on your media or the National Instruments Patent Notice at ni com patents NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 313 8 5 Warning Regarding Use of NI Products WARNING REGARDING USE OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS 1 NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS PRODUCTS ARE NOT DESIGNED WITH COMPONENTS AND TESTING FOR A LEVEL OF RELIABILITY SUITABLE FOR USE IN OR IN CONNECTION WITH SURGICAL IMPLANTS OR AS CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN ANY LIFE SUPPORT SYSTEMS WHOSE FAILURE TO PERFORM CAN REASONABLY BE EXPECTED TO CAUSE SIGNIFICANT INJURY TO A HUMAN 2 INANY APPLICATION INCLUDING THE ABOVE RELIABILITY OF OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE PRODUCTS CAN BE IMPAIRED BY ADVERSE FACTORS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO FLUCTUATIONS INELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY COMPUTER HARDWARE MALFUNCTIONS COMPUTER OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE FITNESS FITNESS OF COMPILERS AND DEVELOPMENT SOFTWARE USED TO DEVELOP AN APPLICATION INSTALLATION ERRORS SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY PROBLEMS MALFUNCTIONS OR FAILURES OF ELECTRONIC MONITORING OR CONTROL DEVICES TRANSIENT FAILURES OF ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS HARDWARE AND OR SOFTWARE UNANTICIPATED USES OR MISUSES OR ERRORS ON THE PART OF THE USER OR APPLICATIONS DESIGNER ADVERSE FACTORS SUCH AS THESE ARE HEREAFTER COLLECTIVELY TERMED SYSTEM FAILURES ANY
107. V_PIDMax This value is added to IMV_PIDFF and the result is placed in IMV_DC IMV_ManualOverride IMV_ManualOverride o Tip Strip Causes ManualDC to override IMV PID final output Detail When ON Cause the PID controller to be bypassed and sets PWM parameters for the IMV with a constant duty cycle defined by IMV_ManualDC IMV_ManualDC IMV_ManualDC a 0 Tip Strip Value to override IMV PID final output when ManualOverride TRUE Units Detail Manual duty cycle applied to IMV when IMV_ManualOverride is on a IMV_MaxDCCalc IMV_MaxDCCale 0 Tip Strip Maximum allowed duty cycle for IMV based on battery voltage and nominal solenoid resistance to limit current to 3A for channel pair Units Detail Maximum duty cycle limit based on the battery voltage and the nominal resistance of the valve This value prevents the current from exceeding the limitations of the LS channels driving the IMV solenoid IMV_MaxDC IMV_MaxDC 0 Tip Strip Maximum allowed duty cycle for IMV This value is effective if lower than IMV_MaxDCCalc Units Detail Maximum allowed duty cycle for IMV This value is effective if lower than IMV_MaxDCCalc 232 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual IMV_MinDC IMV_MinDC 0 Tip Strip Minimum allowed duty cycle for IMV Units Detail Minimum allowed duty cycle for IMV ii IMV_DC IMV_DC 0 Tip Strip Final IMV duty cycle
108. _1 Enable Table2D_1 ue Table2D_1 0 5 0 5 0 0 000 Table1D_2 Table2D_2 Table2D_1a_InputSelector oe Y a0 Table2D_1b_InputSelector a Y 1 000 Ja o Table1D_3 Table2D_3 Table1D_4 Table2D_4 Table2D_1_Description injection pulse width 1 600 Table1D_5 Table2D_5 1 700 1 800 4 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 de 0 000 Table1D_6 Table2D_6 Table2D_1_FlexControlParameters 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 Enable Table2D_X Enable Table2D_1 Tip Strip Enables 2D Table Detail When ON the lookup table is enabled and the selected Flex Control Parameters will be overwritten by the lookup table output Table2D_Xa_InputSelector Table2D 13 InputSelector Sl 216 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Tip Strip Assigns signal source to the 2D lookup table X array Detail Drop down selection control for selecting the input parameter for the X values of the lookup table The available parameters for selection are analog inputs battery voltage digital input parameters cam phase engine speed and user variables Table2D Xb_InputSelector
109. _Chi o Tip Strip Only change in Idle mode Not needed if Position Cal is used Element 0 Minimum Position Element 1 Maximum Position Units or degrees Detail This array contains the position range of the throttle plate The units for Position Range are arbitrary and correspond to the same units for Position Setpoint input and Primary Position output Element 0 The minimum position Element 1 The maximum position 116 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual PrimaryAnalogRange_ChxX PrimaryAnalogRange_Ch1 0 5 4 79 IV Tip Strip Indicates the Position Cal currently in use for the Primary Position Units V Detail Upon the first call of this application Position Calibration Out will reflect the corresponding values of Position Calibration In If the calibration process is not run then Position Calibration Out will continue to reflect the corresponding values of Position Calibration In If the calibration process is run then Position Cal Out parameters will be updated to the values learned from the calibration process The PrimaryAnalogRange array will be set according to the value of PrimaryPsnSwitch_ChX Boolean input SecondaryAnalogRange_ChxX SecondaryAnalogRange_Ch1 0 02 0 07 v Tip Strip Indicates the Position Cal currently in use for the Secondary Position Units V Detail Upon the first call of this application Position Calibration Out will reflect the corresponding values of P
110. _End cannot be exactly 360 and 360 DBTDC respectively It is recommended that the Start and End windows are offset by One Crank Angle degree from these absolute bounds respectively ESTTL2 X Firing Window Start Defines the start of the window in Degrees Before Top Dead Center DBTDC The TDC reference for the window is the DCX value associated with the applicable ESTTL 2 module channel ESTTL2 X_Firing_Window_End Defines the end of the window in Degrees Before Top Dead Center DBTDC The TDC reference for the window is the DCX value associated with the applicable ESTTL 2 module channel 102 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 4 2 ESTTL 2 Pulse Generation Setup Tab The purpose of the ESTTL 2 Pulse Generation Setup Tab is to enable individual ESTTL 2 channel outputs 1 8 and configure auxiliary digital command pulses s General Purpose ESTTL Setup ESTIL 2 TDC Channel Mapping Reference Engine Synchronous x R ao A a Ps i x R E A z J i H z A A z J m z a A B m i t z D 4 D F J i ESTTL2_Chan6Enable i ESTTL2 1 PulseEnable i m STTL2 2 PulseEnable i 7 STTL2 3 PulseEnable i ESTTL2 4_PulseEnable i L 5 PulseEnable i z i I Timing DBTDC Pulse elay Puse Duration ESTTL2 1_SyncTiming a DBTDC ESTTL2 2_SyncTiming B o DBTDC ESTTL2 3_SyncTiming fo DBTDC ESTTL2 4
111. a SCM and I do not know the system controller IP address What do I do A Refer to the section Manually Resetting The Controller Network Interface to DHCP to troubleshoot and establish a network connection to the controller If a connection still cannot be established please contact the National Instruments support team or visit www ni com getting started Q got the following error message on the XNET CAN Setup Window upon enabling the CAN_Run button NI XNET Hex 0xBFF63020 An invalid reference has been passed to a NI XNET session function Solution Only pass reference retrieved from Create Session or from an IO name of a session in LabVIEW project What do I do A Follow these debugging steps a Verify that the XNET module is appropriately powered on the Vsup pin pin 9 and COM pin either pin 3 or 6 b Disable the CAN_Run button Ensure that the CAN Interface and deployed databases clusters and ECUs all show up on the XNET CAN Setup Window Click the Refresh Database button and ensure that the appropriate database cluster s and ECU s are selected Click the CAN_Run button again If the error still persists follow step c c Download and install NI RIO 14 0 http Awww ni com download ni rio 14 0 1 4862 en This should install NI MAX Measurement and Automation Explorer if you don t already have it installed c Open up NI MAX then under remote systems find your controller and expand the tree Under Devices and
112. a wireless broadband dial up ad hoc or VPN connection or set up a router or access point Connect to a network Connect or reconnect to a wireless wired dial up or VPN network connection Choose homegroup and sharing options see als Access files and printers located on other network computers or change sharing settings HomeGroup A T lesh Ta roubleshoot problems Diagnose and repair network problems or get troubleshooting information Windows Firewall 7 A list of network connections available on the PC will open Right click the Local Area Connection port to select Properties 20 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual r OG F gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network Connections gt s Search Net P File Edit View Tools Advanced Help Organize v Disable this network device Diagnose this connection Rename this connection Change settings of this connection 33 Gil Bluetooth Network Connection Local Area Connec Disable D VMware Network 4 U VMware Network 4 Status Diagnose aff Wireless Network _ willl Wireless Network Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename 8 From the Local Area Connection Properties dialog scroll down to select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and select the Properties button below the scroll window H Local Area Connection Properties Connect using a Intel
113. able through National Instruments There are a few considerations for selecting the proper power supply system specifically whether to use a 12V power supply QS10 121 or a 24V power supply PS 17 NI recommends using a 24V power supply in order to increase the efficiency of the DI Driver modules internal boost supply However if an optional PFI Driver module is used and the associated actuators are not rated for 24V then the lower 12V power supply should be used DI Driver Systems with one or two DI Driver modules EDIDS 2403 and EDIDS 2406 can typically be powered by a single recommended supply listed above DI Driver Systems with three or four DI Driver modules EDIDS 2409 and EDIDS 2412 should be powered by two identical supplies wired in parallel Power supplies wired in parallel will create a supply having the same voltage as the individual supplies but double the current capacity Please refer to the power supply documentation for wiring instructions 46 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Power Wiring Guidelines NI recommends powering and grounding each component in the system in a star wiring configuration such that each component is wired individually from a single star point for both positive and negative terminals of the power supply buses In contrast it is not recommended to power the components in a daisy chain configuration because it will cause some modules to experience supply voltage fluctuations NI
114. ables remote start through an external digital trigger configured by CalSeqStart_DigChanAsn CalSeqStart_DigChanAsn CalSegStart_DigChanAsn NI AI1 1 0 NI 9411 1 1 NI 411 1 2 NI 9411 1 3 NI A11 1 4 NI 9411 1 5 NI 9411 2 0 NI 9411 2 1 NI 9411 2 2 MI 411 2 3 NI 9411 24 NI 411 2 5 Aux PWM 1 Aux PWM 2 Aux PWM 3 Aux PWM 4 Tip Strip Selects the digital signal used for triggering the calibration sequence Detail Allows the user to select an external digital signal for triggering the start of the calibration sequence CalSeqProgress NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 203 CalSeq Progress 34 Pulses Tip Strip Indicates sequence progress Detail Indicates the progress through the calibration sequence The progress bar fill rate is automatically adjusted for the value of CalSeg Pulses 204 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 14 Expansion Calibration Mode Setup Window The purpose of the Calibration Mode Setup window is to configure a series of uniform injection command pulses to the enabled channel of each PFI Driver module Only one channel of each PFI Driver may be enabled at a time otherwise no commands will be delivered to a module with multiple channels enabled This window is only applicable when one or more PFI Driver modules are configured for Calibration mode sos Expansion Calibration Mode Setup Exp CalSeg Start Exp CalSeq Running Exp none DT m Exp Calseg Pause
115. added to the end of the table to revert back to 50V Pause OP OFF Pause OP Tip Strip In Timer Mode pause operating point execution Detail When ON pauses the table to remain at the current operating point When OFF operating point operation resumes This parameter is only applicable when Enable OP is ON Reset OP OFF Reset OP Tip Strip In Timer Mode reset operating point execution to point 0 Detail In Timer Mode when ON resets the operating point back to zero This parameter is not applicable to Trigger Mode This parameter is only applicable when Enable OP is ON Manually Set OP 212 OFF Manually Set OP Tip Strip Causes execution of Manual OP Detail When ON sets the operating point to the point specified by the value to the left of the button In Timer Mode when set to OFF execution will resume at the current operating point In Trigger Mode when set to OFF execution will resume at the operating point determined by the Process Variable Trigger Wildcards Number of OP 4 Number of OP Tip Strip Number of operating points to be considered for execution Detail Specifies the number of operating points to be considered by the operating point function For example if Number of OP is set to 3 then operating points 0 1 amp 2 will be applicable to the function Operating points 3 and greater will not be considered 246 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Error OP ji Error
116. ail Indicates the contribution of the derivative term to the total PID output a IMV_PIDMax 230 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual IMV_PIDMax 20 9 Tip Strip IMV PID output maximum limit before feed forward is added Max 30 Min 0 Units Detail Maximum output allowed from the PID controller before the feed forward IMV_PIDFF is added al IMV_PIDMin IMV_PIDMin 20 Tip Strip IMV PID output minimum limit before feed forward is added Units Detail Minimum output allowed from the PID controller before the feed forward IMV_PIDFF is added a IMV_PIDFF IMV_PIDFF Sf2 Tip Strip Duty cycle feed forward added to the IMV PID output Units Detail Feed forward value that is added to the PID output value The result is placed in IMV_DC This parameter is only applicable when RailP_ControlMode is set to IMV PID Mode IMVNonPIDFF IMV_NonPIDFF Efo li Tip Strip Duty cycle feed forward for the IMV while doing PID control of the HPV Units Detail Feed forward duty cycle applied to the IMV when RailP_ControlMode is in HPV PID Mode 7 IMV_PID IMV_PID lo NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 231 Tip Strip IMV PID controller output added to IMV_PIDFF Result is directed to selected PFI LS channel duty cycle parameter Units Detail Output value from the PID controller This value is limited by the values in IMV_PIDMin and IM
117. al 3 3 3 3 Proportional Solenoid Valves to PFI Lowside Channels The lowside drivers of the PFI Driver module are capable of driving a wide variety of automotive relays and proportional solenoid valves Examples of actuators include EGR valves turbocharger wastegate valves fuel pressure regulators or any single solenoid actuator which draws less than 1 5 amps The DI Driver System provides a software mechanism to combine adjacent channels to double the current capacity Refer to the PFI amp LS Driver Setup window for information about locking LS channels together for synchronized operation Each LS channel is independently controlled via pulse width modulation PWM PWM duty cycle from 0 to 100 is possible Each PWM controller utilizes a 20 bit timer operating at 2 MHz This provides a resolution of 500 nsec and a minimum PWM frequency of 2 Hz Since 0 and 100 duty cycles are possible relays and actuators may be controlled in continuous on or off states Wiring diagram for up to four relays or proportional solenoid valves to the LS channels of the PFI Driver module NI recommends using 18 AWG wire or larger for connected devices Battery or Power Supply 12V Typical gt 9A BATT Automotive 5A Fuse N p LS3 LS4 Se EE Actuator PFI PF 2 PFI3 Poio A Actuator PFI4 GND jo Actuator Relay or Actuator PFI Module Connector Figure 3 3 3 3 a Connecting general purpose solenoids
118. aller values cause less contribution to the PID output Larger values cause more contribution to the PID output Negative values should not be used 47 PV Ta Action HPV_Td_Action Tip Strip Derivative contribution of HPV PID controller Detail Indicates the contribution of the derivative term to the total PID output HPV_PIDMax HPV_PIDMax 20 Tip Strip HPV PID output maximum limit before feed forward is added Units Detail Maximum output allowed from the PID controller before the feed forward HPV_PIDFF is added HPV_PIDMin NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 235 HPV_PIDMin 20 Tip Strip HPV PID output minimum limit before feed forward is added Units Detail Minimum output allowed from the PID controller before the feed forward HPV_PIDFF is added 44 HPV_PIDFF HPV_PIDFF 20 Tip Strip Duty cycle feed forward added to the HPV PID output Units Detail Feed forward value that is added to the PID output value The result is placed in HPV_DC This parameter is only applicable when RailP_ControlMode is set to HPV PID Mode HPV_NonPIDFF HPV_NonPIDFF Sajao 9 Tip Strip Duty cycle feed forward for the HPV while doing PID control of the IMV Units Detail Feed forward duty cycle applied to the HPV when RailP_ControlMode is in IMV PID MODE HPV_PID HPV_PID 0 2 Tip Strip HPV PID controller output a
119. an atdnanesdaneaimariaaetes 150 7 RO ZAR LE ce PRI EE SR codec E aeanetaisunsachiene sudaauatoeueasganneatesuergapsatenentes 154 4 10 2 1 DI Advanced Settings Window 159 O SRRA TD ene ern RE ee ee ee ee ae 163 4 11 Engine Position Tracking Setup Window LL 167 Aer ee We VAUD RE ae oeraasanecicaaieeda E tue ae aneltarineanchiene pmaaauee air aeganneatesuengabeuteneees 178 ATE TDC Channel WiADDING AD ane since queen der a 188 Aco CIm Phase Capire ADS talent eh desde 192 AIRA ERD AIO UGS AO T ten Mochi ants ie 198 4 13 Calibration Mode Setup Window iii 201 4 14 Expansion Calibration Mode Setup Window 205 ti bo a 16 EMADI SR ie ene Aan nay ree A en ere Cen 209 HO Tape SE CB VNC OWY tes a uate toa tu a a De Io asians pour as tannic nd An ot 212 NOE Wy Th OV WN PR A RU eae A A 213 RO OO a a ne do 216 4 17 Auxiliary PID Controller Setup Window cc cccccccecccceeceeeeeceeeceeeeaeeeseeeeeueeseeeseueesueeseuesseeeseeeeaes 219 4 18 Rail Pressure Control Setup Window iii 225 4 19 Auxillary PWM SCLUD VWVINGOW anne rm sane nantes auront at estate te teinte etienne 239 4 20 Expansion Auxiliary PWM Setup Window iii 242 4 21 Operating Point Setup WINKOW ccccccssscsssceesseususecusccusscussouusesensursusecuscourseuuseeenscusuresuscourseurs 245 a PPVU E S E E a EEEE E en Re nn 253 4 23 XNET CAIN SSW WINGOW raen a E A EA 255 BAZIN NI XNET Database EditOl nes a a a a a iaaa 263 425371 ts SAIN SIG MAL IIAIOG ess E S 265 4 23
120. and PFI Driver modules do not need to be powered if simply attempting to establish a connection to the user interface Wait about 1 minute for both the USER1 and USER FPGA1 LEDs to start blinking 5 Using a CAT5E Ethernet cable connect the Windows PC LAN port directly to the Ethernet port of the cRIO 9082 controller If the green and amber LEDs directly under the controller Ethernet port are not active then there is no physical Ethernet connection to the PC Please diagnose the Ethernet cable connection problem 6 Go to the Windows Control Panel and select Network and Sharing Center From the Network and Sharing Center select Change adapter settings from the left menu Ov hak gt Control Panel Network and Internet Network and Sharing Center v Search Con D File Edit View Tools Help Control Panel Home A s View your basic network information and set up connections Manage wireless networks A A D See full map ki MGOLD LT Multiple networks Internet Change advanced sharing This computer settings s View your active networks Connect or disconnect plis Access type 3 Connections ll Wireless Network Connection Domain network i NI Access type No network access Unidentified network Connections VMware Network Adapter 7 y Public network VMware Network Adapter VMnet8 Change your networking settings te Set up a new connection or network lt Set up
121. are connected then the application will time out 30 seconds with its attempt to bring the sensors up to temperature and discontinue heater control UEGOModule Enable must be set to FALSE and back to TRUE in order to make another attempt at sensor control It is important that disconnected wide band sensors are NOT connected while UEGOModule Enable is TRUE It is possible to damage the sensor element of a cold sensor if the sensor connection is made while the UEGOModuleEnable is TRUE and the heater duty cycle is approaching 100 Sensors should already be connected when UEGOModule Enable is set to TRUE so that the temperature is brought up according to a profile specified by Bosch UEGOModule Present UEGOModule Present Tip Strip UEGO Module Present Detail Indicates that the module is plugged in to the proper slot externally powered and recognized by the DI Driver System software Software may not recognize the module if the software and hardware revisions do not match Fuse Status FUSE OK Tip Strip Fuse status Detail A single fuse is located in the module circuit which feeds battery voltage to both sensor heaters FUSE OK The heater circuit fuse is OK FUSE BLOWN The heater circuit fuse is blown UEGO Battery o V Tip Strip Module Battery Voltage as read by UEGO module Units V Detail Indicates battery voltage sensed internal to the module while enabled UEGOX Cluster 130 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual
122. ark Restrike dwell Units msec Detail Specifies the time duration of Y spark Restrike dwell See Figure 4 3 2 1 1 for illustration 98 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 4 General Purpose ESTTL Setup Window The purpose of the General Purpose ESTTL Setup window is to configure the operation of the second Engine Synchronous TTL Output module The TTL outputs of this module which resides in the fourth slot of the MX Expansion chassis are intended to be used for commands to auxiliary devices such as laser or high speed camera systems for optical engine diagnostics and measurements The ESTTL Spark Setup window contains a tabbed pane with two tabs ESTTL 2 TDC Channel Mapping Tab Used for assigning Top Dead Center TDC reference values to each auxiliary digital command pulse ESTTL 2 Pulse Generation Setup Tab Used for configuring auxiliary digital pulse that is associated with each of the eight EST TL 2 output channels Each of the ESTTL 2 output channels are non multiplexed and therefore can be independently controlled The ESTTL module is an optional module for the NI 9155 MXle Expansion Chassis This setup window is only applicable if the ESTTL module is inserted in the assigned slot NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 99 4 4 1 ESTTL 2 TDC Channel Mapping Tab The purpose of the ESTTL 2 TDC Channel Mapping Tab is to assign Top Dead Center TDC reference values to each auxiliary digi
123. at the associated DI Driver channel cannot drive current above 1 5A at any point within the injection command This is a non critical fault and cannot be cleared This fault does not interfere with injector channel operation The fault will be automatically cleared upon the next injection command during which 1 5A is reached 31 DIX _HighVoltageLimitFault DI1_HighVoltageLimitFault Tip Strip Internal boost power supply over voltage fault Detail Indicates that the high voltage supply has exceeded 195V This can occur if the high voltage supply is not used at all during injection events while energy is recovered from the injector to the internal boost supply during BackBoostTime This can also occur if an external high voltage supply is used and is configured for outputting more than 195V Such a condition is strongly discouraged because the components of the DI Driver module are only rated for 200V This is a critical fault and will shut down the internal boost power supply and all injector channels 32 DIX _ LowVoltageDriverFault O DI1_LowValtageDriverFault Tip Strip Low voltage driver circuit fault 76 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail Indicates that the low voltage high side FET is overloaded This fault is often caused by a short circuit condition during low voltage drive phases This is a critical fault and will shut down the internal boost power supply and all injector channels DIX _ClearFaults
124. ble to be logged over the network to another computer After the data logging is completed the data file may be copied to another computer via File Transfer Protocol FTP connection over the network Options for logging data include Sample Period RAM Buffer Size Stop Trigger Filename Suffix and Data Delimiter The variables to be logged are specified in an array of drop down selection lists A logging parameter plot is available within the window and parameters may be individually selected for plotting Log Data Setup Fie Path cz naortyL abi Tew Data hoagtibe it Fie Mode Append Append Suffix Don t Append Fie Name Suffe O Delmeter Comma Plot Buffer Length 100 Sample Pernod 1100 msec Log Data Start Stop Trigger Wien Free Storage Space Cr 1971077120 bytes Log File Sire a bytes Values Logged simples 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 M 36 3B 40 Sample e Log Write Error t i Fic creation Error Clear Errors a aa File Path File Path 9 c ni rt LabVIEW Data logfile tet ren Tip Strip Location to save log data Detail Specifies the txt file path on the cRIO controller where the log file will be saved An FTP browser button is available to the right of the path field for assistance with specifying the path via the FTP Browser dialog shown in Figure 4 28 a The default data storage directory is c ni rt LabVIEW Data File Paths
125. c10 iso TDC11 420 TDC12 660 Tip Strip Top Dead Center CAD Units CAD Detail Crank angle degrees of offset between the TDC1 and TDCX where X represents the cylinder number Typically engine cylinder 1 will have a TDC of zero because the GlobalT DC Offset is used to specify CAD between absolute zero and TDC1 The other TDC parameters will have non zero values which specify the CAD spacing with respect to TDC1 TDC values are independent from any particular DI Driver or PFI Driver channel The TDC values are mapped to a specific hardware driver channel using the DIX Y_TDC and PFIX_TDC drop down list parameters 3 DIX Y_TDC TDC3 Tpc2 DI1 1_TDC DI1 2_TDC DI1 3_TDC Tpcs 2 TDC6 TDC4 DI2 1_TDC DI2 2_TDC DI2 3_TDC TDC7 Tpco Tpcs DI3 1_TDC DI3 2_TDC DI3 3_TDC Tpc11 Tpc10 Tpc12 DI4 1_TDC DI4 2_TDC DI4 3_TDC TDCI TOC TDC4 TDC6 TDC10 TDC11 TOC12 Tip Strip Selects Top Dead Center reference associated with driver channel Detail TDC parameters are mapped to a specific DI Driver channel by selecting a TDCX from the drop down list in each DIX Y_TDC parameter where X is the DI Driver module number and Y is the DI Driver channel number DIX_Firing Window_Start DIX_Firing Window_End NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 189 DI1_Fir
126. ce Some parameters are disabled according to the selected DIX_ Timing Mode The disabled parameters will retain their most recently entered value and will not accept a value from the keyboard The DI module can also operate in a Skip Fire mode wherein the user specifies a Skip Fire Sequence according to the total number of cycles desired in the sequence SkipFire Cycles and the number of active cycles in which an injection occurs SkipFire OnCycle Only one Skip Fire Sequence can be defined for the entire DI Driver System but it can be enabled on all present channels s Pulse Generation Setup rol amp x DI TMP DI EPT PFI PFI 2 DI1 Timing Mode DIL Adv Settings SkipFire_Cycles ee Sfo mune 5 EOL Ting DETOC cone Uniform Dur msec one pami iata Uniform Dur CAD Br DI2 Timing Mode DI2 Adv Settings DI Driver 2 SOI Timing DBTDC il AE ikh EOI Timing DBTDC Uniform Dur msec Uniform Dur CAD DI Driver 3 SOI Timing DBTDC i 3 f ie AL 1 EOI Timing DBTDC Uniform Dur msec Uniform Dur CAD DI Driver 4 SOI Timing DBTDC D 3 z amp f JE ft fg i bd Ld un a g 8 rer EOI Timing DBTDC Uniform Dur msec Uniform Dur CAD Pulse Pulse 2 Pulse 3 Pulse 1 Pulse 4 Pulse 5 Pulse 6 Cor C or C or C or or J or Tip Strip Enables injection pulse Detail When ON t
127. control function configured by the Rail Pressure Control Setup window HPV Control Causes PWM parameters for the associated channel to be sourced from the HPV control function configured by the Rail Pressure Control Setup window PFI LS3 Source PFI L53 Source lt Host Configuration Rail Pressure IMV PID Rail Pressure HPV PID Tip Strip Source of lowside PWM command Detail Selects the mode of operation for PFI LS3 Host Configuration Allows PWM parameters to be entered directly via this tab IMV Control Causes PWM parameters for the associated channel to be sourced from the IMV control function configured by the Rail Pressure Control Setup window HPV Control Causes PWM parameters for the associated channel to be sourced from the HPV control function configured by the Rail Pressure Control Setup window PFI LSX TimingMode PFI LS1 TimingMode lt Frequency Period Tip Strip Format of lowside PWM command Detail Selects whether to use frequency or period parameters for PWM specification f PFI LSX ControlMode PFI LS1 ControlMode Duty Cycle Pulse Width Tip Strip Format of lowside PWM command Detail Selects whether to use duty cycle or pulsewidth parameters for PWM specification PFI LSX Frequency PFI LS1 Freguency 100 Hz Tip Strip Frequency of lowside PWM command Units Hz Detail Specifies the frequency of PWM operation for the associated PFI LS channel NI EDIDS 2400 Series Use
128. ctive EOI Timing cor Tmo ooroo ESS ES SE CR FT Tip Strip End Of Injection angle with respect to TDC Units DBTDC Detail When DIX Timing Mode is set to EOI this parameter specifies the End of Injection EOI timing in Degrees before TDC When DIX Timing Mode is set to SOI this parameter is disabled and retains its most recent value NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 155 4 Inj1 EOI Inj2 EOI gni EO Inj3 EOI j _Inj5 EO Inj4 EO gt l ult 1 paton Inj2 Inj3 Duration Inj4 a Inj5 Duration Inj6 Dugrtion p x 8 Inj1 Pulse Inj2Pulse Inj3 Pulse Inj Pulse Inj5Pulse Inj6 Pulse Figure 4 10 2 b Pulse Train for EOI Timing Mode The reference timing is TDC position for each individual cylinder Applicable to EPT mode Duration unform our cao 10 729 45 f lo lo fo Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units CAD Detail This parameter is always disabled but automatically updated with a calculated value It is calculated based on Duration msec and engine speed shown in the EPT Tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window DIX Timing Mode DIL Timing Mode lt EOI SOI Tip Strip Selects timing mode of each injection pulse as Start Of Injection or End Of Injection Detail Selector for choosing between Start o
129. d RUNNING Tip Strip Scope channel assignments Detail The assignment controls are exact copies of the same controls within the Digital Input Setup window The EngineSpeed and EngineStatus indicators are exact copies of the indicators on the EPT tab These controls and indicators are placed here in duplicate for convenience Run EPT Scope Run EPT Scope NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 199 Tip Strip Starts the EPT scope Detail When pressed the EPT diagnostic function will begin to acquire EPT signals While the acquisition is running this control can be pressed again to abort the acquisition Data Buffer Full Data Buffer Full Tip Strip Indicates data stream is too fast and some samples may have been lost Detail Indicates that the sampling rate is too fast for all samples to be recorded This can happen if the engine speed and sampling rate specified in the Scope Mode Options are too high i EPT Sync w EPI Sync Clr Flag Tip Strip Indicates if the system is currently in sync Clr Flag Clears EPT errors Detail When TRUE indicates that the EPT function is in sync When FALSE indicates that the EPT function is not in sync Scope Mode Options EPT Scope Mode Fixed Sample Samples Per Rev Number of Samples 36000 al 144000 Tip Strip Defines amount and type of information to be displayed in scope trace Detail When set to Fixed Sample the data acqui
130. d Products File folder autorun exe Application 170 KB No La Libraries autorun inf Setup Information 1KB No Documents _ nidist id ID File 1KB No d Music __ patents txt Text Document 6KB No b Pictures amp readme_SCM html HTML Document 5KB No E Videos d Application 1325KB No 5 setup ini Configuration settings 7 KB No 1 Computer hi Network 4 TT gt Type Application q setup exe Compressed size 1 29 MB Ratio 4 F 3 Date modified 6 12 2014 10 59 AM Size 1 33 MB When prompted at the User Information screen enter the relevant information and select the option to install the evaluation version of the license The evaluation license is a free perpetual license of SCM that allows users to interface to SCM supported targets but does not allow them to modify any code 16 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual LY Software Calibration Management Toolkit for LabVIEW 2014 User Information Enter the following information Full Name Windows User Organization G Install Software Calibration Management Toolkit for LabVlEW 2014 with this serial number Serial Number S Install Software Calibration Management Toolkit for Labi lE 2014 Evaluation Serial number not required From there follow the instructions and prompts to finish installing the software NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 17 3 2 2 NI XNET Driver Installation If the user plans to utilize C
131. d and CalSeg Duration CalSeq Pause Calseq Pause aas Tip Strip Pauses calibration sequence NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 201 Detail When pressed pauses the delivery of the specified injection command sequence When depressed continues the command sequence at the paused location Pausing the sequence will allow any active injection command to complete CalSeq Reset CalSeq Reset O Reet Tip Strip Resets calibration sequence Detail When pressed resets the internal pulse counter to zero CalSeq Running CalSeq Running Tip Strip Indicates sequence status Detail Indicates the running status of the injection command sequence CalSeq Duration CalSeq Duration 1 ms Tip Strip Duration of injection pulses Units msec Detail Pulse width of each pulse during a calibration sequence CalSeq Period CalSeq Period 120 ms Tip Strip Period between start of injection pulses Units msec Detail Time period between the rising edges of injection pulses during a calibration sequence CalSeq Pulses 202 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual CalSeq Pulses 100 Pulses Tip Strip Number of pulses for calibration sequence Units Pulses Detail Number of injection pulses to be commanded during a calibration sequence RemoteStartEnable RemoteStartEnable Remote Start __ Tip Strip Enables remote start through External Digital Trigger Detail En
132. d be a negative value uPsnCallnc_Thresh_ChX uPsnCalInc Thresh Chi BM Tip Strip Threshold for incremental throttle motor positive voltage after the throttle plate stops moving Positive Units V Detail Indicates a threshold for incremental throttle motor positive voltage after the throttle plate stops moving When this incremental threshold is reached the drive stops and transitions to the negative calibration phase This parameter should be a positive value uPsnCalDec_Thresh_ChX 114 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual uPsnCalDec Thresh_Chi i i JIM Tip Strip Threshold for decremental throttle motor negative voltage after the throttle plate stops moving Negative Units V Detail Indicates a threshold for decremental throttle motor negative voltage after the throttle plate stops moving When this decremental threshold is reached the drive stops and transitions to the post calibration phase This parameter should be a negative value PsnCalOffset_ChX PsnCalOtfset_Chi1 E 0 005 v Tip Strip The amount that the signal must change before the motor voltage increment decrement reaches the specified threshold terminating the calibration process for that direction Positive Units V Detail The position calibration process tracks the primary position sensor signal as the throttle plate moves toward the minimum and maximum positions This offset is the amount that the signal must change before the motor voltage
133. dVoltageVRHall_Ch4 J VR Adaptive Arm ModeSelectVRHall_Ch5 Arming _ThresholdVoltageVRHall_Ch5 a VR Adaptive Arm ModeSelectVRHall_Ch6 Arming_ThresheldVoltageVRHall_Ch6 VR Adaptive Arm F 3 k LE r VRHall_Module Present VRHall Module Present Tip Strip VR Hall Module Present Detail Reports presence of NI 9760 VR Hall module in chassis VRHallFaultClear 144 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual VRHallFaultClear OFF Tip Strip VR Hall Fault Clear Detail Clears a fault condition where an input voltage is too negative to safely engage pull up resistor on the positive side of input channels ModeSelectVRHall ChxX ModeSelectVRHall_Chi VR Manual Arm ir Hall GTI VR Adaptive Arm Hall w Pull up Tip Strip Mode select for VR Hall Channel Detail Selects the mode of operation for each channel of the NI 9760 VR Adaptive Arm Disabled pull up resistor Self adaptive arming threshold for zero crossing detection VR Manual Arm Disabled pull up resistor Manually or programmatically set arming threshold for zero crossing detection Hall Disabled pull up resistor Manually or programmatically set logic threshold no zero crossing detection Hall w Pull up Enabled pull up resistor Manually or programmatically set logic threshold no zero crossing detection See hardware manual for a more detailed description of each arming threshold mo
134. dded to HPVPIDFF Result is directed to selected PFI LS channel duty cycle parameter Units Detail Output value from the PID controller This value is limited by the values in HPV_PIDMin and HPV_PIDMax This value is added to HPV_PIDFF and the result is placed in HPV_DC wi HPV_ManualOverride HPV ManualOverride pe 236 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Tip Strip Causes ManualDC to override HPV PID final output Detail When ON causes the PID controller to be bypassed and sets PWM parameters for the HPV with a constant duty cycle defined by HPV_ManualDC js HPV_ManualDC HPV_ManualDC Tip Strip Value to override HPV PID final output when ManualOverride TRUE Units Detail Manual duty cycle applied to HPV when HPV_ManualOverride is enabled HPV_MaxDCCalc HPV_MaxDCCalc 0 Tip Strip Maximum allowed duty cycle for HPV based on battery voltage and nominal solenoid resistance to limit current to 3A for channel pair Units Detail Maximum duty cycle limit based on the battery voltage and the nominal resistance of the valve This value prevents the current from exceeding the limitations of the LS channels driving the HPV solenoid HPV_MaxDC HPV_MaxDC 0 Tip Strip Maximum allowed duty cycle for HPV This value is effective if lower than HPV_MaxDCCalc Units Detail Maximum allowed duty cycle for HPV This value is effective if lower than HPV_MaxDCCalc HPV_MinDC
135. ddress is configured to a similar IP address but different in the last address number After making changes to the network settings select the Apply Change button associated with the changed settings sx Execution Information Static Info Network Run Time Info Current Network Status 192 168 1 100 IP Address 2 A Subnet Mask 192 168 1 1 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS Server IP Address Settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following settings 192 168 2 34 IP Address 2732372920 Subnet Mask 192 168 1 1 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS Server Apply Change You must reboot the DI Driver System for this change to take effect Note you will also need to find the target again in CalVIEW NI DIDS 017F5D02 Target Name 3 Reset the controller or cycle the controller power to reboot the system Wait for the USER1 and USER FPGA1 LEDs to start blinking before performing the Search for SCM Target step NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 27 3 2 3 3 Manually Resetting The Controller Network Interface To DHCP This section assumes that all attempts have failed to establish connection with the DI Driver System user interface and the system controller IP address is unknown Before resetting the controller network settings to DHCP mode consider the following 1 Reboot the System Controller Press and release the reset button on th
136. de Arming_ThresholdVoltageVRHall_ Chx Arming_ThresholdVoltageVRHall_Ch2 op Tip Strip Assigns digital signal source to channel during Direct and TMP Modes Detail Arming VR or logic Hall threshold voltages used in VR Manual Arm or Hall modes of operation Min OV Max 2 97V NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 145 4 9 Analog Input Setup Window The purpose of the Analog Input Setup window is to configure input processing of the analog signals to the NI 9220 Analog Input module The window has sixteen tabs Each tab is associated with one channel of the NI 9220 and provides signal identification monitoring filtering and conversion to engineering units s Analog Input Setup aiw aria mn aB aria aris A2 a3 AI4 AIS AIG N7 AIO_Name AIO_Units ato Name ato Fo Al0_Cony vefe Im Le 3 500 05 6 los Aro Units Disable Enable_A10_Fit Disabled SimEnable_A10 Disable Init_AIO_Filt cd he 25 AIO FilterBreak AIX _ Name AIO Name Rail Pressure Tip Strip Text name Detail Name assigned to each analog input AIX_Units AIO Units bar Tip Strip Text units Detail Units assigned to each analog input AIX_Raw 146 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual AIO Raw 5 0 2 5 E l 1 44159 Tip Strip Raw voltage input Units V Detail Raw voltage signa
137. de command to the PFI Driver module will be active for the specified duration When OFF the command will be inactive but the specified timing and duration will still be implemented Therefore the timing of the adjacent pulses will remain the same whether the pulse is ON or OFF Timing Timing DBTDC 300 Tip Strip Start Of Injection angle with respect to TDC NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 163 Units DBTDC Detail Specifies the Start of Injection SOI timing in Degrees before TDC Duration Ch1 msec Duration Chi msec of Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec Detail Time duration of the EPT mode injection pulse The ON OFF button above each Timing and Duration parameter determines whether the pulse will be active or inactive Duration Ch1 CAD Duration Chi CAD 0 Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units CAD Detail This parameter is always disabled but automatically updated with a calculated crank angle degrees duration value It is calculated based on Duration msec and engine speed shown in the EPT Tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window Duration Ch2 4 msec and CAD Duration ch2 msec M Duration Ch2 CAD 0 Duration Ch3 msec Duration Ch3 CAD O Duration Ch4 msec Duration Ch4 CAD QO Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec and CAD Detail See information for Duration Ch1 msec and Duration Ch1
138. der National Instruments gt gt Software Calibration Management K Windows Fax and Scan eo Windows Media Center lvadmin Documents d Accessories Pictures Jl Games l JKI Music Maintenance D Microsoft Silverlight re Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support E NISCM User s Manual 2014 Startup 4 Back 11 Within the SCM console right click inside the Target Items list pane and select Select Target 22 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual r s Software Calibration Management 0 0 0 0 gt Users vi File Edit Operate Pairings Calibration Options Snapshot Help PACE TIGE Target Items Open All Items Close All Items Select Target 0 0 0 0 Refresh Auto Pairing Remove Bad Pairings Messages Host VI Pairings ime _ Message 4 HostVI S Group Name ____ Host Item 5 5 2014 10 10 22 AM Messages Cleared 12 A dialog will open titled Search for SCM Target If the Windows PC and the system controller have compatible network settings then SCM will locate the DI Driver System on the network automatically A Download Files checkbox will be presented within the dialog box and should be checked before pressing the OK button After pressing OK SCM will take about 30 seco
139. determined according to the pattern that is being tracked and is discussed within the Pattern Specific Information section below CrankCount is provided in terms of a complete engine cycle and is reported as if there were no missing or extra teeth in the pattern For example if the pattern type is N M NumberOfCrankTeeth 60 and Stroke TRUE then CrankCount will range from 0 to 119 CrankCount is for monitoring purposes only Crank Position During sync the EPT function calculates the latest crankshaft position in terms of absolute Crank Angle Ticks CAT over a complete engine cycle referenced to position 0 It is internally converted to a crank angle position in terms of Crank Angle Degrees CAD referenced to position 0 so that injection angles may be specified in CAD Position 0 is determined according to the pattern that is being tracked and is discussed within the Pattern Specific Information section below The CurrentPosition in CAD is calculated according to the following CurrentPosition CAD CurrentPosition CAT Stroke 360 MAX CAT Where Stroke 2 if 4 stroke and Stroke 1 if 2 stroke CurrentPosition is not displayed on the EPT tab because it changes very rapidly Position Tracking Between each crank tooth CurrentPosition is incremented smoothly at a rate proportional to the previous crank tooth period In the presence of crankshaft acceleration or deceleration sync is still properly maintained If a new 170 ni com
140. e OFF Tip Strip Enables injection pulse Detail When ON the TMP Mode command to the PFI Driver module will be active for the specified duration When OFF the command will be inactive but the specified timing and duration will still be implemented Therefore the timing of the adjacent pulses will remain the same whether the pulse is ON or OFF 10 Delay Delay msec CES Tip Strip Time until beginning of this injection pulse Units msec Detail Specifies the delay of the start of injection from the trigger event Duration Ch1 Duration Ch1 msec CT Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec Detail Time duration of the TMP Mode injection pulse The ON OFF button above each Delay and Duration parameter determines whether the pulse will be active or inactive 2 Duration Ch2 4 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 165 Duration Ch2 msec 0 Duration Ch3 msec CS 0 Duration Ch4 msec Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec Detail See information for Duration Ch1 TMP OneShot_PFI_ChnX TMP OneShot_PFI_Chni TMP OneShot_PFI_Chn2 TMP OneShot_PFI_Chn3 TMP OneShot_PFI_Chn4 Tip Strip Manually triggers TMP injection command sequence Detail Pressing this button will trigger the configured TMP command sequence to the associated PFI Driver module channel The sequence will be triggered once with each button press 166 ni com NI EDIDS 240
141. e FALSE Mask TRUE Pass When the encoder is mounted to the crankshaft of a two stroke engine or the camshaft of a four stroke engine then masking may be disabled via the Engine Position Tracking Setup window EncZMask control so that every encoder Z pulse passes through to the EPT cam input Exp CamX_DigChanAsn Exp _ Cami_DigChanAsn Exp Come DigChanAsn Mot Assigned Not Assigned F Not ASe lc Tip Strip Assigns digital eue source to cam signal Detail There are two available Cam signal destinations named Cam and Cam2 Both have similar function For EPT encoder patterns one of the Cam signals can be selected via the Engine Position Tracking Setup window as the mask for the encoder Z pulse For EPT N M or N 1 patterns one of the cam signals can be selected as the direct EPT cam trigger input for four stroke engine phase information Other functions can be implemented on the Cam signals for capturing the angle of the cam rising edges configured via the Cam Phase Capture tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window Exp PFIX Y DigChanAsn i _DigChanAsn PFI2_ DigChanAsn PFI3_DigChanAsn PF _ DigChanAsn SIRET 1 0 Tip Strip Assigns digital signal source to channel danas Direct and TMP Modes Detail Up to eight PFI channel destinations are available which will directly command the PFI channels from the selected digital signal source These destinations are only available wh
142. e if a 180 count encoder were used on the crankshaft and it is desired to have a StallSpeed of 50 RPM then the resulting tooth period timer for that speed 266666 must be checked so that it does not exceed a 24 bit value 2424 It does not so a StallSpeed of 50 RPM is acceptable When EPT N M 7 function is selected extra attention must be given to the StallSpeed parameter For example if a 60 2 crank pattern is used then there is a two tooth gap which means that the timer period during the gap will be three times the period between the other evenly spaced teeth NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 171 A true crankshaft StallSpeed of 50 RPM correlates to an evenly spaced tooth period of 20 milliseconds Therefore the period during the gap would be 60 milliseconds at 50 RPM Sixty milliseconds correspond to a 40 MHz timer value of 2400000 which can be represented by a 24 bit value Therefore a 50 RPM StallSpeed is acceptable for this example The EPT function will lose sync in error when missing or extra crank cam pulses are encountered where unexpected In all conditions when sync is lost CrankCount will be set to 0 and SyncStopped will be set to Stopped A loss of sync due to an error condition will be further signaled by the appropriate pattern specific error flag on the EPT tab An error condition causing loss of sync will prevent any further sync until the error flag is cleared using the Sy
143. e if the Plus1 tooth is retarded and NumberOfCrank Teeth 6 then CrankCount would increment from 0 to 5 such that tooth 5 would correspond to the tooth immediately after the Plus1 tooth and tooth O would correspond to the second tooth following the Plus1 tooth 4 Stroke Applications Stroke TRUE For advanced Plus1 tooth configurations position 0 and tooth 0 coincides with the first tooth following the Plus1 tooth while the CamSig input is TRUE For retarded Plus1 tooth configurations position 0 and tooth 0 coincide with the second tooth following the Plus1 tooth while the CamSig input is TRUE The CamSig is actually only used for achieving initial sync Once sync is achieved it is maintained according to the location of each Plus1 tooth However CamSig is still monitored to report whether the signal is normally alternating high and low at each Plus1 tooth The CamHistory indicator of the EPT tab reports whether the signal is Normal Always High Always Low or an unexpected pattern reported as Error CrankCount will increment from 0 to 2 NumberOfCrank Teeth 1 CrankCount will not increment at the Plus1 tooth For example if the Plus1 tooth is advanced and NumberOfCrankTeeth 6 then CrankCount would increment from 0 to 11 such that tooth 5 and tooth 11 would correspond to the tooth immediately before the Plus1 tooth while CamSig is FALSE and CamSig is TRUE respectively Tooth 6 and tooth 0 would correspond to the
144. e slot 7 can be used for a variety of analog sensors The optional NI 9862 XNET CAN module slot 8 can be used to send and receive parameter values within the system to from other CAN communication devices The cRIO 9082 controller may be expanded with a NI 9155 MXle Expansion Chassis for additional optional modules with designated slots Examples of optional modules designated to expansion slots are NI 9758 Port Fuel Injector Driver Module NI 9754 Engine Synchronous TTL Output Module NI 9757 Bosch LSU 4 2 and 4 9 O2 Sensor Module NI 9759 Throttle Driver Module and the NI 9760 VR Hall Sensor Module Throughout this manual the module model numbers NI 9XXX ex NI 9751 and module model names ex DI Driver module are used interchangeably Also the NI Expandable Direct Injector Driver System will be referred to as the NI Direct Injector Driver System 6 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 2 Warnings Please read the following warnings for your safety and that of the product NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 7 2 1 REVERSE BATTERY POLARITY WARNING NI Powertrain Controls power modules are not internally protected against reverse battery polarity Do not reverse the battery polarity or damage will occur This event is not covered under warranty All NI Powertrain Controls modules with a 10 pin screw terminal block have identical external power and ground connections Please take necessary precautions to
145. e Period Trigger Level g 10 a 2 2 14 4 Net A ay 16 6 IN ok J 8 8 1 ms 20 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 l i 1 1 Sample Rate Hz Plot Length ms 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 4999 1000 5000 Time ms Save Data to File lt Not A Path gt NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 277 4 27 CalTrend Window The purpose of the CalTrend window is to configure up to eight multi variable plot windows for monitoring various software variables within the DI Driver System This is an advanced feature which is documented within the SCM user manual sm Callrends _CalTrend Trend Channels Units Add Remove n al Trend 1 Engine Speed RPM All i Trend 2 Open Trend 3 Open Trend 4 Open Trend 5 Open Trend 6 Open Trend 7 Open Trend amp Open s Trend 1 920 Active Channel 900 EngineSpeed RPM l 880 860 2 ee SamplePeriod s 820 4 i 1 2 800 3 _8 5 780 2 J 9 i 60 1 740 Save Snapshot to File 720 700 lt Not A Path gt I 3 55 54 PM 3 56 40 PM 3 57 30 PM 3 58 13 Ph 4 278 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 28 Log Data Setup Window The purpose of the Log Data Setup window is to configure data logging of a variety of DI Driver System software parameters to a text file stored on the cRIO controller file system The data files are NOT a
146. e Value 0 Mum Bits 32 tone ATA Write Gina ANS Write Data Type IEEE Float tens Al Read Scaling Factor tens AT Read Bene ATS Read Scaling Offset RER His AM Read rame Overview Byte Order Big Endian Er AIS Read Maximum 3000 ren A6 Read EF E m AN Read Minimum mm ATS Write H m A Write Default Value 23 22 2120 19 18 17 6 15 14 13 12 M1 10 83 8 ma REG ES ES SA LES aq lel Unit Comment You must create ECUs within a cluster in order for the CAN signals to show up in the XNET CAN Setup Window Please follow these instructions to create ECUs 1 Right click on a cluster within a database and select Create ECU NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 265 2 Once an ECU is created you may edit the ECU name and add a comment 266 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 2 Analog NI XNET Database Editor File Edit Options Help a Networks ZE Analog_Cluster E mm AIO Read ECU Properties 7 Tews ATO Write Gr ATI Write Name Analog_ECU fens ATI Write ren ALIS Write Ge ALI4 Write 7 m ATS Write E fee ATL Read Tews AT Read mm ATS Read mm AT4 Read ie ATS Read He ATG Read E mm AIF Read mm ALS Write mm ATO Write my lt ECUs gt Transmitted Frames LA Received Frames 3 Select and assign frames to be transmitted or received by a certain ECU in the Trans
147. e crankshaft yet is directed to 168 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual tracking 720 degrees the reference tooth is located either on the crankshaft or on the camshaft When located on the crankshaft then an additional cam phase signal must be present in order to mask using EncZMask every other crank reference such that every other crank reference is allowed to pass through to the CamSig input of the EPT function This would cause the crank encoder pattern to effectively generate twice the teeth between each reference tooth seen by the EPT function Table 4 11 a Supported EPT Patterns Brief Glossary of EPT Function Terms CAD Crank Angle Degrees There are 360 CAD per two stroke cycle or one crankshaft rotation There are 720 CAD per 4 stroke cycle or two crankshaft rotations In a 4 stroke engine the camshaft completes exactly one rotation per two rotations of the crankshaft There are two strokes of the piston up and down within the cylinder during a single rotation of the crankshaft A single stroke of the piston covers 180 CAD EXTRAP The single numerical digit suffix of each EPT function selection refers to the level of EPT Position Extrapolation This is a fixed power of two by which the angular resolution of tracked crankshaft position is improved over the physical teeth alone For example if the EPT function has a fixed extrapolation level of 7 then the crank angle resolution between each physical tooth is i
148. e front of the cRIO 9082 controller Wait about 1 minute for both the USER1 and USER FPGA LEDs to start blinking The typical time to start blinking is about 25 seconds A connection cannot be established with the user interface via SCM until both User LEDs are blinking If both LEDs are not blinking refer to the Troubleshooting section 2 Use Search for SCM Target to Discover the IP Address If the IP address of the controller is discovered via the Search for SCM Target dialog but the Download Files checkbox does not appear in the dialog then take note of the discovered IP address The Windows PC used to interface with the system must have a similar IP address and Subnet mask as the system controller but the IP address must be different in the last address number The Subnet mask should be 255 255 255 0 Refer to the Out Of The Box Connection section to see how to change the IP address of the Windows PC 3 Use SCM Real Time Target Backup Feature to Discover the IP Address From the SCM console select File then Real Time Backup and Restore to open the Real Time System Backup dialog Select the Backup Real Time System button to open the Backup Target dialog E Real Time System Backup Restore Real Time System Select the Browse button to open the Select RT System dialog 28 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual M Backup Target IP Address Target Descripton Browse Note Reboot controller in safe mode
149. e represents a single CAN on an NI hardware device Within NI XNET the interface is the object used to communicate with external hardware described in the database If the module is in the assigned slot and is externally powered the module should appear under a generic CANX If the field is blank check the module slot assignment and power wiring to the module Baud_ Rate Baud Rate 250000 Tip Strip CAN communication data transfer rate Units bit s Detail NI XNET CAN hardware currently accepts the following numeric baud rates 33333 40000 50000 62500 80000 83333 100000 125000 160000 200000 250000 400000 500000 800000 and 1000000 Refresh Database Database Tip Strip Refreshes a list of deployed databases on this controller Detail Press this button to refresh database list after deploying or undeploying a database 256 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Deployed Databases Deployed Databases No Database Selected a nxnet example nxnet_exampleldf Analog ECU Tip Strip A list of deployed databases on the controller Detail Use NI XNET database editor see section 4 23 1 to create edit deploy and undeploy databases from the controller The Deployed Databases list will be updated once the Refresh Database button is pressed Deployed Clusters Deployed Clusters Analog ECU Analog Cluster Tip Strip A list of clusters from selected database on the controller Detai
150. ector USB Retention Standoff 12 Reset Button 16 CMOS Reset Button NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 297 5 COMBICON power connector for NI cRIO 9082 1 Connector Screws 2 Terminal Screws 6 NI 9155 MXle Express RIO Front Panel EE NATIONAL NI 9155 instruments MX Express AE POWER WILLS d on mm Sa Leu oil F ej r fij refi yee O rpa P Hi ie al eet 1 LEDs 4 Downstream Port 2 Upstream Port 5 Power Connector 3 MXI Express LINK LEDs 6 DIP Switches 298 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 7 COMBICON power connector for NI 9155 MXle Express RIO Chassis 1 Connector Screws 2 Terminal Screws 8 NI 9411 Digital Input Module Terminal Assignments BATT INJ INJ INJ2 INJ2 INJ3 INJ3 EXT PWR GND GND NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 299 11 NI 9862 1 Port CAN Module Terminal Assignments Connector Pin Signal No Connection NC 7 CANL FT a 3 COM o a a oO 1 4 dl 6 a 5 5 n EE 7 o alila 5 SHLD Se o 4 E o g o o We 6 COM Se n 7 CAN H 1 g NC 9 Vsup 12 NI 9754 ESTTL Output Module Terminal Assignments 300 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 14 NI 9758 PFI Driver ModuleTerminal assignments NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 301 302 ni com NI EDIDS 2400
151. ector Driver System The NI Expandable Direct Injector Driver System features an NI cRIO 9082 controller NI 9751 Direct Injector DI driver module s and NI 9411 digital input module s The system can synchronize injector channels with production crank cam position sensors or optical encoders The system will also accept external digital fuel command signals from a production engine controller The included DI driver module s provide the power electronics necessary to drive high power solenoid or piezoelectric direct injectors The NI Expandable Direct Injector Driver System comes in four different base models corresponding to different direct injector channel configurations the NI EDIDS 2403 drives 3 solenoid injectors or 2 piezoelectric injectors the NI EDIDS 2406 drives 6 solenoid injectors or 4 piezoelectric injectors the NI EDIDS 2409 drives 9 solenoid injectors or 6 piezoelectric injectors and the NI EDIDS 2412 drives 12 solenoid injectors or 8 piezoelectric injectors The systems provide a digital input per injector channel for directly commanding each injector The system controller is delivered with a pre installed feature rich application The deployment version of the NI Software Calibration Manager Toolkit SCM is included for interfacing with and calibrating the system The NI Expandable Direct Injector Driver System supports optional C series modules in slots 7 amp 8 of the CRIO 9082 The optional NI 9220 analog input modul
152. ed a mode of operation which will apply to all PFI channels The lowside channels are not affected by this mode parameter The PFl_ Mode refers to the mode of sending injection commands to the channels of the module Direct Mode The PFI Driver module PFI channels are commanded directly by external digital inputs of the NI 9411 modules The digital input which commands each channel can be configured via the Digital Input Setup window The digital input level which commands the PFI channel ON is configured via the Invert buttons of the Digital Input Setup window The duration of the injection command is determined by the direct duration of the digital input Calibration Mode Calibration mode is for the purpose doing injector flow calibrations Calibration mode is configured via the Calibration Mode Setup window for a specified number of injection events command duration and command period Only one PFI channel of the module may be enabled for Calibration Mode If more than one channel is enabled then commands will not be delivered Triggered Multi Pulse TMP Mode The PFI Driver module PFI channels are commanded by a specified sequence of pulses and triggered by an external digital rising or falling edge to the assigned 9411 digital input channel The pulse sequence is configured via the PFI tab of the Pulse Generation Setup window The external trigger channel is assigned via the Digital Inout Setup window Engine Position Tracking EPT Mode The PFI
153. ed at a time If injection events within a DI Driver System must be operated simultaneously the simultaneous events must be connected to channels on separate DI Driver modules Channel Sequencing When operating multiple sequential direct injectors the operating sequence of channels should be planned so that the time between injections events within a single module is maximized For example as shown in Table 3 5 a an 8 cylinder 4 stroke engine will have injection events separated by 90 degrees If a 12 Channel DI Driver system is used sequential injectors should be staged from one DI Driver module to the next By doing this channels within a single module will have a spacing of 360 degrees providing maximized time for boost power supply charging and multiple injection events per cylinder 8 Cylinder 4 Stroke Engine With 12 Ch DI Driver System Event CAD DI Driver Module Table 3 5 a Optimization of 8 Cylinder 4 Stroke Engine With A 12 Ch DI Driver System Injection Command Duration Limitation The maximum allowed injection pulse command is internally limited to 5 milliseconds If an external or internal command is generated which exceeds 5 milliseconds the actual injection pulse will be halted at 5 milliseconds If multiple external direct commands are active simultaneously on a single DI Driver module then all three driver channels of the module will be made inactive until only one channel is commanded 64 ni com NI EDIDS 2
154. ed in terms of evenly spaced teeth as if there were no additional teeth For example a 6 1 pattern would consist of 6 physical evenly spaced teeth and an additional physical tooth placed between two evenly spaced teeth EPT N 1 function can be configured to track 360 or 720 degrees depending upon an optional camshaft input When tracking 360 degrees for 2 stroke engines the camshaft input is ignored This is designated by configuring the function with Stroke 2 STROKE When tracking 720 degrees for 4 stroke engines the camshaft input signal must be TRUE during every other Plus1 tooth This is designated by configuring the function with Stroke 4 STROKE 2 Stroke Applications Stroke FALSE NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 173 For advanced Plus1 tooth configurations position 0 and tooth 0 coincide with the first tooth following the Plus tooth For retarded Plus1 tooth configurations position O and tooth 0 coincide with the second tooth following the Plus1 tooth The CamSig input is ignored CrankCount will increment from 0 to NumberOfCrankTeeth 1 CrankCount will not be incremented at the location of the Plus1 tooth For example if the Plus1 tooth is advanced and NumberOfCrank Teeth 6 then CrankCount would increment from 0 to 5 such that tooth 5 would correspond to the tooth immediately before the Plus1 tooth and tooth 0 would correspond to the tooth immediately following the Plus1 tooth As another exampl
155. ed or subtracted to the PID output when Position Setpoint is in the vicinity of LHPsn_Out_ChX As Position Setpoint moves through the limp home region ULHc_ChX is updated to a positive or negative value negative closing force positive opening force and added to the PID output in order to assist throttle control through the region 126 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 2f ULHLag_ Out _ChX ULHLag_Out_Chi 0 06 s Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 lag filter time applied to limp home compensation Units s Seconds Detail Indicates lag filter time applied to the limp home compensation A lag time prevents uLHc_ChX from reversing directions too fast US Out ChX US _Qut_Ch1 0 5 IV Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 stiction compensation value Units V Detail Indicates Voltage added to or subtracted from the PID output when Primary Position is outside the vicinity of LH Position US ChX is intended to compensate for valve stiction This parameter assists throttle control during small position errors to overcome stiction Parameter uFc_ChX is updated to a positive or negative value according to the sign of Position Setpoint Primary Position error and added to the PID output USLag Out _ChX USLag_Out_Ch1 0 15 s Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 lag filter time for stiction compensaton Units s seconds Detail Indicates lag filter time applied to the stiction compensation A lag time prevents uFc_ChX from re
156. een encountered and the error state will be executed 14 Undefined Trigger Error wll Undefined Trigger Error Tip Strip Indicates no trigger is defined for selected CalPoints Detail When in Trigger Mode indicates when no trigger condition is satisfied by the specified Trigger Wildcards and the error state will be executed 248 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual ii Time Wildcard Error ae Time Error Tip Strip Invalid entry for an operating point time value an Wildcard Error Tip Strip Invalid entry for a wildcard Detail When in Timer Mode indicates when one or more of the Time fields have non numeric characters entered and the error state will be executed When in Trigger Mode indicates when one or more of the Wildcard fields have an invalid entry and the error state will be executed 16 System Error ssl System Error Tip Strip Indicates DI Driver System error has occurred Detail Indicates when a critical error is present related to the DI Driver modules PFI Driver module or EPT and the error state will be executed if the Ignore System Error button is FALSE Ignore System Error Ignore System Error Tip Strip When enabled OP will continue regardless of DI Driver System errors Detail When set to True normal execution of the operating point function will take place regardless of the state of the System Error When FALSE and a System Error is present the error state will be executed
157. emarks of Vernier Software amp Technology Vernier Software amp Technology and vernier com are trademarks or trade dress Xilinx is the registered trademark of Xilinx Inc Taptite and Trilobular are registered trademarks of Research Engineering amp Manufacturing Inc FireWire is the registered trademark of Apple Inc Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U S and other countries Handle Graphics MATLAB Real Time Workshop Simulink Stateflow and xPC TargetBox are registered trademarks and TargetBox and Target Language Compiler are trademarks of The MathWorks Inc Tektronix Tek and Tektronix Enabling Technology are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc The Bluetooth word mark is a registered trademark owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc The ExpressCard word mark and logos are owned by PCMCIA and any use of such marks by National Instruments is under license The mark LabWindows is used under a license from Microsoft Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Other product and company names mentioned herein are trademarks or trade names of their respective companies Members of the National Instruments Alliance Partner Program are business entities independent from National Instruments and have no agency partnership or joint venture relationship with National Instruments 312 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series
158. en PFI Driver module s are inserted in the assigned slot In order to utilize this direct command functionality the PFI Driver module must be placed into Direct Mode or TMP Mode via the PFI X Module Control tab of the PFI and LS Driver X Setup window Digital Input Channel Signals Channel Name State Freq Hz DC PW ms Invert filter us 9411 3 DIO fa ol 0 00 O active on 0 9411 3 DI1 Mi off 0 00 off asero 0 9411 3 DI2 M of 0 00 O actve ion 0 9411 3 DI3 a of 0 00 Off actverich fo 9411 3 DI4 a of 0 00 Off actverich O 9411 3 DIS M of 0 00 Off aciverich JO VR Hall Ch1 if Off 0 00 ofaxemmlo VR Hall Ch2 a ol 0 00 Of aciverich O VR Hall Ch3 a ol 0 00 Ol actverich fo VR Hall Ch4 a ol 0 00 Off aciverion JO VR Hall chS a ol 0 00 Off aciverion o VR Hall Ch6 ui Ol oooi oMawemnlo 142 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Tip Strip Digital and VR Hall input channel data and configuration Units Frequency Hz Duty Cycle Pulse Width msec Filter usec Detail This display area shows the status of each NI 9411 digital input The status parameters shown are State Frequency Duty Cycle and Pulse Width This display area also provides controls for signal inverting and filtering for each input When the Invert button is set to Ac
159. ensure that BATT 0 and GND 9 are not connected in reverse polarity The BATT 0 terminal will accept positive 7 32VDC with respect to the GND 9 terminal Please refer to the user manual for details To provide system level protection against reverse battery polarity implement the following simple external main power relay circuit Q Li ji af Gr lt o i Ge Fa ri ri m Battery LT System Power Tyco Relay PN V23232 A0001 X003 12V Tyco Relay PN V23232 A0002 4009 24V Bosch Relay PN 0 332 002 156 12V Bosch Relay PN 0 332 002 256 24V Figure 2 1 a Reverse Battery Protection Diagram Notes 1 The relay shown is a type of automotive relay which includes an internal series diode with terminal 85 This diode will prevent reverse battery from energizing the relay 2 Terminals 30 and 87 are screw terminals and should be connected with soldered ring terminals 3 Terminals 85 and 86 are 0 250 X 0 031 inch 6 3 X 0 8 mm push on terminals 4 A fuse is recommended between the battery and relay 5 An optional switch may be placed in series with relay terminal 86 6 Simply placing a high current capacity diode in series with the system power is not an acceptable method of reverse battery protection because it will not allow the NI Powertrain Controls modules to perform current recirculation while switching inductive loads 7 The relay is currently available from www ni com SS he Nm
160. er Setup the TMP parameters of this tab are not applicable When TMP Mode is selected in the PFI Module Control tab of the PFI and LS Driver Setup the EPT parameters of this tab are not applicable The lowside driver channels of the PFI Driver module do not have the ability to be operated engine synchronously and are not configured from this tab refer to PFI and LS Driver Setup window The PFI Driver modules are optional modules for DI Driver Systems and these tabs are not applicable when the modules are not present E s Pulse Generation Setup Pulse Enable EPT Mode Timing DBTDC PFI Driver Duration Ch1 msec PFI i only Duration Ch1 CAD Duration Ch2 msec Duration Ch2 CAD Duration Ch3 msec Duration cha can SE Duration Ch4 msec Duration Ch4 CAD SkipFire_PFI_Chni SkipFire_PFI_Chn2 stipFre_Pr_chns SkipFire_PFI_Chn4 PFI1_SkipFire_Cycles en PFI1_SkipFire_OnCycle Pulse Generation is not relevant to Low Side Channels TMP Mode Pulse Enable OFF PFI Driver PFI 1 4 only Delay msec Duration Chi msec TMP OneShot_PFI_Chn1 SO O NN GO LL T TMP OneShot_PFI_Chn2 Duration Ch2 msec Duration Ch3 msec Duration Ch4 msec TMP OneShot_PFI_Chn3 TMP OneShot_PFI_Chn4 Pulse Enable Pulse Enable Tip Strip Enables injection pulse Detail When ON the EPT Mo
161. er masking requirement of the Z pulse If the engine is a 2 stroke then the EncZMask button of the EPT tab should be set to EncZ Passed If the optical encoder is mounted to the camshaft then NumberOfCrank Teeth should be set to the encoder pulse count divided by two Stroke should set to 4 STROKE and the EncZMask button should be set to EncZ Passed This setup will track 720 degrees With encoder patterns position 0 and tooth 0 correspond to the rising edge of the first CrankSig tooth following the rising edge of the EncZ input NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 177 4 11 1 EPT Tab Engine Position Tracking Setup TOC Channel Mapping EPT_Type f fai E I JL e a EPT NM TE ngineSpeed CrankStalled i TNM7 1000 001 RPM seams j ul MissedCrankFlag EngineStatus SyncStopped 3 oe SyncFlagClear nous MissedGapFlag RUNNING MaxCAT StallSpeed MissedCamFlag 5360 CAT 25 RPM sno FAULT MissedPlusiFlag SIMULATE EngineSimEnable CrankCount CrankRun Threshold AutoClearFlagWhileCranking SimulatedSpeed 15 pulses 350 RPM 1000 RPM NumberOfCrankTeeth CamExtEnable CamOffsetEnable 60 pulses NumberOfMissingTeeth CamExtension CamOffset fi ltpuses f fpuises CamHistory Retard PlusiLocation f pos Normal EncZ Masked EncZMask EPT Type EPT_ Type EPT ENC 2 EPT ENC 4 EPT N M 7 EPT N 1 9 Tip Strip Selects pattern type for the EPT function De
162. er reset button Wait 1 minute for the LEDs to start blinking If they do not start blinking follow the instructions below for restoring a backup image zip file to the system controller If a system backup image is not available please contact the National Instruments support team A DI Driver System software backup image can be created by following the instructions in Backing Up the DI Driver System Software Image section It is recommended this procedure be performed after the system has been calibrated and ready for deployment WARNING Restoring a software image to the system controller will overwrite the entire system hard drive If a critical calibration file is stored on the controller it should be retrieved before restoring the backup image Step 1 below provides the optional instructions for retrieving the calibration file NOTE The system controller network interface settings are not changed by restoring the software image The DI Driver System must be in static IP address mode for the backup to restore correctly For more information on changing your system to static IP mode see Changing The Network Settings Of The DI Driver System 1 Using an FTP client connect to the DI Driver System controller and browse to C ni rt LabVIEW Data Copy any cdl calibration files from the cRIO controller to the PC for backup The default calibration file is named DefaultCal cdl This is important because the image restoration process will overw
163. erate PID outputs that are inversely proportional to the error Setpoint Process Variable IMV_Kp Action NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 229 IMV_Kp_ Action Tip Strip Proportional contribution of IMV PID controller Detail Indicates the contribution of the proportional term to the total PID output 10 MV Ti mmv rjo min Tip Strip Integral time constant for IMV PID controller lower stronger action 0 disabled Units min Detail Integral time constant for the IMV PID controller A value of zero disables integral contribution to the PID output Smaller non zero values cause more contribution to the PID output Larger values cause less contribution to the PID output Negative values should not be used 17 IMV_Ti_ Action Tip Strip Integral contribution of IMV PID controller Detail Indicates the contribution of the integral term to the total PID output 18 mv Td 4 IMV_Td E o min Tip Strip Derivative time constant for IMV PID controller higher stronger action 0 disabled Units min Detail Derivative time constant for the IMV PID controller A value of zero disables derivative contribution to the PID output Smaller values cause less contribution to the PID output Larger values cause more contribution to the PID output Negative values should not be used IMV_Td_ Action Tip Strip Derivative contribution of IMV PID controller Det
164. es User Manual National Instruments 121 Detail Specifies Derivative time for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is less than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position The derivative time is proportional to the electro mechanical time constant of the throttle body Larger times intensify the derivative action When TD is set to zero the derivative action is disabled LHPsnBand_ChX LHPsnBand Chi 0 2 deg Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 limp home angle error threshold Units or deg Detail Limp home compensation uLH_ChX is updated when PosSetpoint_ChX is within LH Position Band of LHPsn_Out_ChX above or below uLH_ChX Ep Im Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 limp home voltage addition Units V Detail Voltage added or subtracted to the PID output when Position Setpoint is in the vicinity of LHPsn_Out_ChX As Position Setpoint moves through the limp home region ULHc_ChX is updated to a positive or negative value negative closing force positive opening force and added to the PID output in order to assist throttle control through the region 11 ULHLag ChX ULHLag_Chi 20 06 IE Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 lag filter time applied to limp home compensation Units s seconds Detail Specifies lag filter time applied to the limp home compensation A lag time prevents uLHc_ChX from reversing directions too fast US ChX 122 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual US Chi Sos i Tip Strip H
165. es the pump current required for maintaining a reference voltage of 450 millivolts across the wide band sensor element This is also the current required for maintaining a stoichiometric gas mixture within the sensor element UEGOX Lambda 1 Lambda Tip Strip Lambda Detail The actual air fuel mass ratio divided by the stoichiometric air fuel mass ratio Lambda is equivalent to 1 Phi UEGOX Phi 1 Phi Tip Strip Reported Equivalence Ratio Detail The actual fuel air mass ratio divided by the stoichiometric fuel air mass ratio Phi is equivalent to 1 Lambda a UEGOX AF Ratio 14 7 AFR Tip Strip Air Fuel Ratio Detail The actual mass air fuel ratio UEGOX Sensor Fault NO FAULT Tip Strip Sensor fault status Detail Indicates UEGO Sensor Fault status 132 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual NO FAULT No faults exist with the sensor signal wires SHORT TO GND OR BATT A short to ground or battery is present on one of the sensor signal wires 1a UEGOX Back Pressure UEGO1 Back Pressure 1 13 bar Tip Strip Manual Back Pressure Detail The air fuel ratio results are dependent on exhaust system pressure Many engine systems will have exhaust systems which are very near atmospheric pressure In this case this control may be set to a constant value of 1 013 bar However if exhaust system pressure is expected to depart from atmospheric pressure at the location of the sensor then the pressure s
166. espectively It is recommended that the Start and End windows are offset by One Crank Angle degree from these absolute bounds respectively ESTTL1 X Firing Window Start Defines the start of the window in Degrees Before Top Dead Center DBTDC The TDC reference for the window is the DCX value associated with the applicable ESTTL1 module channel ESTTL1 X_Firing_Window_End Defines the end of the window in Degrees Before Top Dead Center DBTDC The TDC reference for the window is the DCX value associated with the applicable ESTTL1 module channel NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 95 4 3 2 ChX Tabs The purpose of the ChX tabs is to enable individual ESTTL1 channel outputs 1 8 and configure spark pulse generation parameters so ESTTL Spark Setup ESTTL1 SkipFire Cycles ESTTL1_SkipFire_OnCycle Sip Sif ESTIL 1 TDC Channel Mapping ESTTL1 1_SparkTiming Efo DBTDC ESTTL1 1_MainDwell 0 25 msec ESTTL1 ChaniEnable Channel Enable ESTTL1 1_MaxDwell ET BF msec ESTTL1_SkipFireChani Enable Skip Enable Main Timing DBTDC Rack Restrike Delay 1 Restrike ike Restrike Delay 2 Delay Delay 4 HE bo Restrike ae El Dwell 1 ike ike Dwell Dwell Z 3 Restrike Dwell 4 ESTTL1 1_Restrike1 Enable Restrike Enable ESTTL1 1_Restrike2Enable ESTTL1 1_Restrike3Enable Restrike Enable ESTTL1 1_Restrike4 Enable ESTTL1 1_Restrike1 Delay a 0 msec ESTTL1
167. f Injection SOI Mode and End of Injection EOI Mode When SOI mode is selected the EOI Timing parameters will be disabled and retain their most recently entered end of injection angle When EOI mode is selected the SOI Timing parameters will be disabled and retain their most recently entered start of injection angle j DIX Adv Settings DIL Adv Settings Tip Strip Press this button to define duration for each Driver channel Detail Pressing this button launches the DI1 Advanced Configuration control window The DI1 Advanced Configuration window allows a user to program individual injection pulse durations for each pulse in an injection sequence 156 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Tip Strip Defines whether the DI Driver module is in uniform channel duration or individual channel duration mode Detail Shows the state of the Enable Individual DIX Channel Duration control in the corresponding DIX Advance Settings window When the control is disabled the indicator appears green and says the channels all have uniform duration as pictured above When enabled the indicator appears blue and says the channels have individual durations enabled as pictured on Channel 2 in the window shown at the beginning of DI EPT Tab SkipFire_DI1_ChnX SkipFire_DI1_Chni SkipFire_DIi_Chn2 SkipFire_DIi_Chn3 Tip Strip Enables Skip Fire on DI channel when EPT Mode is selected Detail Enables the skip
168. fire sequence defined by SkipFire Cycles and SkipFire OnCycle for their assigned DI channels It also manipulates the corresponding SkipFire DI1_ChnX buttons in the DI1 Adv Settings Window 10 SkipFire_Cycles SkipFire_Cycles Sla j i a Tip Strip Specifies the period length in number of cycles for the Skip Fire Sequence in EPT Mode Min 1 Detail Specifies the number of cycles included in a Skip Fire Sequence when the DI injector is operated in EPT mode For example if the number 7 is entered the DI injector will continuously repeat a seven cycle sequence as long as SkipFire DI1_ChnX is enabled for the desired channel It is also manipulated by the corresponding SkipFire Cycles control in all the DIX Advanced Settings windows 11 a SkipFire OnCycle SkipFire_OnCycle Tip Strip Specifies the number of active cycles during Skip Fire Sequencee in EPT Mode Min 1 Detail Specifies the number of active cycles included in a Skip Fire Sequence when the DI injector is operated in EPT mode For example if the number 4 is entered and DI SkipFire Cycles is set to 7 the DI injector will continuously repeat a seven cycle sequence with four active cycles followed by three inactive cycles as NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 157 long as SkipFire_ DI1_ChnX is enabled for the desired channel It is also manipulated by the corresponding SkipFire OnCycle control in all the DIX Advanced Settings windows
169. first tooth following each crank tooth gap The CamSig input is ignored CrankCount will increment from 0 to NumberOfCrankTeeth 1 During crank tooth gaps CrankCount will continue to increment at the location of each missing tooth For example if NumberOfCrankTeeth N 60 and NumberOfMissing Teeth M 2 then CrankCount would increment from 0 to 59 such that teeth 58 and 59 would correspond to the two missing teeth and tooth 0 would correspond to the tooth following missing tooth 59 4 Stroke Applications Position 0 and tooth O coincide with the first tooth following the crank tooth gap while the CamSig input is TRUE The CamSig is only used for achieving initial sync Once sync is achieved it is maintained according to the location of each gap However CamSig is still monitored to report whether the signal is normally alternating high and low at each gap The CamHistory indicator of the EPT tab reports whether the signal is Normal Always High Always Low or an unexpected pattern reported as Error CrankCount will increment from 0 to 2 NumberOfCrank Teeth 1 During crank tooth gaps CrankCount will continue to increment at the location of each missing tooth For example if NumberOfCrankTeeth N 60 and NumberOfMissing Teeth M 2 then CrankCount would increment from 0 to 119 such that teeth 58 and 59 would correspond to the two missing teeth while CamSig is FALSE Teeth 118 and 119 would correspond to the two mi
170. following parameters IPhaseDrive 2 3 4 5 6 f 8 248 lassa Lal Ll La aad Tip Strip Selects low voltage or high voltage for the associated phase Detail When operating solenoid injectors selecting these buttons will toggle the voltage drive source of the associated phase between high voltage HV and battery voltage LV IPhaseDrive HV LV IPhaseArray is used differently in piezo mode by enabling DIX _PiezoEnable The eight elements of the IPhaseArray are divided into two groups The first four elements are used for charging the piezo load at the beginning of injection and the last four elements are used for discharging the piezo load at the end of injection The ability to select HV or LV for each phase is not available for piezo injector operation because the high voltage driver circuit is always used as shown below 1 2 3 5 6 8 pnt on oo 70 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 13 IPhaseCurrentUpper IPhaseCurrentUpper amps 20 fis 10 it fo fo it fo Tip Strip Upper current dithering setpoint Units Amps Detail Upper threshold for current dithering set point in Amps i IPhaseCurrentLower IPhaseCurrentLower Amps j19 14 Mo Mo Mo jo Mo Mo Tip Strip Lower current dithering setpoint Units Amps Detail Lower threshold for current dithering set point in Amps 13 IPhaseDuration iPhaseDuration msec 0 2 os o Mo Jo Vo Le Vo Tip Strip Duration of phase 0 hold to e
171. for details about configuring the rail pressure control function Typical IMV and HPV solenoids require up to 3A continuous current operation Therefore it is important to utilize the LS channel locking feature which locks LS1 with LS2 and locks LS3 with LS4 via the PFI and LS Driver Setup window The locked channel pairs can be used to operate the IMV and HPV with up to 3A continuous current Figure 3 4 a shows an example wiring diagram for wiring an IMV to a locked LS1 and LS2 pair and wiring a HPV to a locked LS3 and LS4 pair Any of the NI 9220 analog inputs can be assigned to the rail pressure control feedback via the Rail Pressure Control Setup window 62 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Battery or Power Supply 12V Typical gt 5A 4 k A PFI Module Connector Figure 3 4 a Diagram of Typical Wiring of an Inlet Metering Valve IMV and a High Pressure Valve HPV to a PFI Driver Module NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 63 3 9 Optimizing the DI Driver System When connecting multiple injectors to a DI Driver System there are a few optimizations to consider Simultaneous or Overlapping Injection Events A DI Driver module uses multiplexed circuitry to provide up to three driver channels within the module for solenoid direct injectors and two channels per module for piezoelectric direct injectors Therefore only one channel within the module may be operat
172. functionality set to Disabled DIX _OneShotTime DI 1_OneShotTime 1 5 msec Tip Strip Duration of one shot command Units msec Detail Duration of one shot pulses in msec NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 69 DIX_HVTarget DI1_HVT arget 75 LV Tip Strip DI Driver high voltage setpoint for internal boost supply Units V Detail The working voltage set point of the internal boost power supply 7 DIX_BackBoostTime DI1_BackBoostTime l 0 15 msec Tip Strip Time period during which injector solenoid energy is directed back to the module boost power supply after end of pulse Units msec Detail The time period at the end of the injection pulse for which the back electromotive force EMF of the injector solenoid is directed to the internal boost power supply IPhaseArray When operating solenoid injectors the IPhaseArray defines up to eight sequential current drive phases within each injection command Each phase is implemented sequentially and can specify upper and lower current dithering setpoints phase duration and drive circuit high voltage or battery voltage The high voltage drive circuit should only be used as little as necessary so that the internal boost power supply energy is conserved and not overloaded Please refer to the DI Driver Rev F manual for various PhaseArray configurations and the resulting current profile of the Solenoid injector The IPhaseArray consists of the
173. g in a square wave pulse as a trigger tooth passes the sensor The NI 9411 will accept a high digital voltage level up to 24V Other types of Hall effect sensors have an open collector or open drain output which requires a pullup resistor typically 5 KOhm connected between the sensor output and the sensor power supply voltage The pullup resistor should be installed as physically close to the NI 9411 module as possible The sensor data sheet should be consulted for properly connecting the sensor to power ground and the NI 9411 digital input channel The NI 9411 supports both single ended and differential digital signal types Hall effect sensors typically have single ended outputs and should be wired to the a input pin of its associated digital input channel while leaving the b pin disconnected or floating This configuration causes a default 1 5V threshold for detecting a low FALSE or 0 or high TRUE or 1 digital input If the sensor requires a different switching threshold then a voltage other than 1 5 V can be wired to the b pin This can be accomplished by a simple resistor voltage divider close to the module Sometimes optical encoders have a differential or complementary pair of outputs for each signal In this case the T1 39 differential pair should be connected to the a and b pins of the NI 9411 input channel In all cases the sensor ground should be connected to the NI 9411 COM pin as a voltage
174. g UEGOX Enable ose Tip Strip Enable UEGO Channel Detail Allows each individual sensor interface to be enabled or disabled UEGOX_Temp 500 c Tip Strip UEGO Temperature Units C Detail The controlled temperature in degrees Celsius of the wide band sensor element f UEGOX Heater Duty Cycle 0 2 Tip Strip UEGO heater duty cycle Units Detail Indicates the heater duty cycle applied to UEGOX channel for debug purposes UEGOX Hot Tip Strip Sensor Hot Indicator Detail The target sensor temperature is 750 degrees Celcius When TRUE the wide band sensor element temperature has entered a controlled temperature range above 730 degrees Celsius and the air fuel ratio and related values are valid When FALSE the air fuel ratio and related values are not valid UEGOX_Hot will transition from TRUE to FALSE when going below 700 degrees Celsius a UEGOX Heater Fault NO FAULT Tip Strip UEGO heater fault status Detail Indicates UEGO Sensor heater fault status NO FAULT No faults exist with the sensor heater wires SHORT TO GROUND A short to ground is present on one of the sensor heater wires NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 131 OPEN CIRCUIT An open circuit is present on one of the sensor heater wires SHORT TO BATTERY A short to battery is present on one of the sensor heater wires 10 JEGOX Ip 0 mA Tip Strip UEGO Current Units mA milliamps Detail Indicat
175. gap or Plus1 tooth Always High Indicated when the cam signal is constantly high upon each crank trigger wheel feature M tooth gap or Plus1 tooth NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 185 Always Low Indicated when the cam signal is constantly low upon each crank trigger wheel feature M tooth gap or Plus1 tooth An Error condition of the parameter does not cause a loss of sync a CamSelect Enc Masked Enc Masl Tip Strip Selects which Cam signal is used for EPT Detail The DI Driver System supports up to two cam signals for the purpose of variable valve timing control For EPT N M and N 1 patterns this setting toggles between the use of Cam1 or Cam2 for EPT synchronization For EPT encoder patterns this setting determines which cam signal is used for masking of the EncZ signal when an encoder is mounted to the crankshaft of a 4 STROKE engine EncZMask rnc Masked Enc Mask Tip Strip Selects whether encoder Z signal is masked by the selected cam signal or passed directly to the EPT function Detail When set to EncZ Masked the EncZ signal will be logically ANDed with the cam signal selected by CamSelect Therefore the cam signal must be TRUE to allow the EncZ signal to pass through to the EPT When set to EncZ Passed the EncZ signal will always be passed through to the EPT regardless of the cam signal level Typically when an encoder is mounted to the crankshaft of a 4 stroke engine EncZMask sho
176. greater than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position in the Control Calibration Out column TIPos_Out_ChX TIFos 0 ut_Ch1 0 15 s Tip Strip H Bridge channel X integral time for PID when Theta is greater than limp home angle Units s Seconds Detail Indicates Integral time for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is greater than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position The integral time is equivalent to the electro mechanical time constant of the throttle body Smaller integral times intensify the integral action When TI is set to zero the integral action is disabled TDPos Out _ChX TDPos_Out_Ch1 0 02 s Tip Strip H Bridge channel X derivative time for PID when Theta is greater than limp home angle Units s Seconds Detail Indicates Derivative time for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is greater than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position The derivative time is proportional to the electro mechanical time constant of the throttle body Larger times intensify the derivative action When TD is set to zero the derivative action is disabled KRNeg_ Out _ChX KRNeg_Out_Ch1 1 V Tip Strip H Bridge channel X proportional gain for H Bridge channel PID when Theta is less than limp home angle Units V Detail Proportional gain for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is less than or equal to LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position in the Control Calibration Out column TINeg_Out_ChX
177. h up to View Cart gt NI Combustion Analysis System 20 Hz host display update rate Save and Share Cart Software for LabVIEW Enlarge Picture Calibration saving capabilities that save CalPoint gt NI Engine Control System values to target as new default startup values My Parts List Simply download and install the free deployment PAR Se cee gt NI Software Calibration version with no activation necessary ee Management Toolkit products while you browse Pricing PartNumber Description Est Ship US Dollars Qty 783396 35 NI Software Calibration Management 5 10 1 009 00 9g Toolkit Add to Cart gt gt Guarantee your price for 30 days learn more Instant Quote Save for Later Enter your NI User Account information as directed If you do not have an NI User Account create one for free and then proceed 14 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 20 e https lumen ni com nicif us B X E NI Softwa anag create en User Recount NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS United States Download the NI Software Calibration Management Toolkit for LabVIEW Create an NI User Account or Log In Country Why create an account United States x Download free evaluation software nee Save products and create custom quotes Access technical resources Confirm Password Interact in the developer community We respect and value your privacy Learn how we protect yo
178. have the same selected digital signal source Across a given row once a digital signal source is selected it will be grayed out Each of the destination controls listed below have a similar drop down selection of digital signal source and are described below Not Assigned NI9411_ 3 0 NI9411 3 1 NI9411 3 2 NI9411 3 3 NI9411 3 4 NI9411 3 5 VR Hall Ch1i VR Hall Ch2 VR Hall Ch3 VR Hall Ch4 VR Hall Ch5 VR Hall Ch6 Exp Aux PWM 1 Exp Aux PWM 2 Exp Aux PWM 3 Exp Aux PWM 4 Exp Crank_DigChanAsn Exp_Crank_DigChanAsn Not Assigned Tip Strip Assigns digital signal source to crank signal Detail Signal directed to the EPT crank trigger input The EPT is configured via the Engine Position Tracking Setup window This signal is applicable for all EPT pattern types When tracking encoder patterns assign the high resolution encoder A signal to the crank signal Exp EncZ DigChanAsn Exp Enc DigChanAsn Not Assigned Tip Strip Assigns digital signal source to encoder Z signal Detail Signal directed to the EPT cam trigger input through an optional masking AND gate with either Cam1 or Cam2 The EPT is configured via the Engine Position Tracking Setup window This signal is applicable for encoder NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 141 patterns only When the encoder is mounted to the crankshaft of a four stroke engine then a cam signal must be provided to mask every other encoder Z puls
179. he command to the associated DI Driver module channel will be active for the specified duration When OFF the command will not be implemented The timing of the adjacent pulses will remain the same whether the pulse is ON or OFF 154 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual SOI Timing sorting oeo 30 120 20 ls ifo IFz Tip Strip Start Of Injection angle with respect to TDC Units DBTDC Detail When DIX Timing Mode is set to SOI this parameter specifies the Start of Injection SOI timing in Degrees before TDC When DIX Timing Mode is set to EOI this parameter is disabled and retains its most recent value Inji SOI 24 Inj2 SOI e gt Inj SO Inj3 SOI _ Inj5 SOI Inj4SOl gt E s l f lin Inj1 Duration Inj2 Duration Inj3 Duration Inj4 Duration iInj5 Duration Inj6 Duration a lt x O F Inji Pulse Inj2Pulse Inj3 Pulse Inj4Pulse Inj5 Pulse Inj6 Pulse Figure 4 10 2 a Pulse Train for SOI Timing Mode The reference timing is TDC position for each individual cylinder Applicable to EPT mode Duration em our oec SA ES CN CN CN Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec Detail Specifies the time duration of the injection pulse The ON OFF button above each Timing and Duration parameter determines whether the pulse will be active or ina
180. heck that external signal shielding and routing are optimal and that there is plenty of signal edge margin for cam belt or chain stretch The EPT Diagnostics tab can be used to capture the crank and cam signals for diagnosing post filter problems with extraneous pulses or pulse alignment The EPT Diagnostics tab can continuously display crank and cam signals and then be stopped for analysis The signals can be captured upon a loss of sync trigger to look at the crank and cam signals captured before the loss of sync EPT Pattern Specific Information N M Patterns Pattern Description 172 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual N M patterns have N evenly spaced teeth and M missing adjacent teeth gap on the crankshaft trigger wheel M is limited to 1 or 2 missing teeth N is stated in terms of evenly spaced teeth as if there were no missing teeth For example a 60 2 pattern would consist of 58 physical teeth followed by two missing teeth EPT N M function can be configured to track 360 or 720 degrees depending upon an optional camshaft input When tracking 360 degrees for 2 stroke engines the camshaft input is ignored This is designated by configuring the function with Stroke 2 STROKE When tracking 720 degrees for 4 stroke engines the camshaft input signal must be TRUE during every other crank tooth gap This is designated by configuring the VI with Stroke 4 STROKE 2 Stroke Applications Position 0 and tooth O coincide with the
181. heta is greater than limp home angle Units s seconds Detail Specifies Derivative time for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is greater than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position The derivative time is proportional to the electro mechanical time constant of the throttle body Larger times intensify the derivative action When TD is set to zero the derivative action is disabled This parameter is changed by a control calibration procedure KRNeg ChX KRNeg_Ch1 Sja lwdegl Tip Strip H Bridge channel X proportional gain for H Bridge channel PID when Theta is less than limp home angle Units V Detail Proportional gain for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is less than or equal to LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position in the Control Calibration Out column TINeg_ChX TINeg_Ch1 01 ts Tip Strip H Bridge channel X integral time for PID when Theta is less than limp home angle Units s Seconds Detail Specifies Integral time for the throttle control PID function while PosSetpoint_ChX is less than LHPsn_Out_ChX Limp Home position The integral time is equivalent to the electro mechanical time constant of the throttle body Smaller integral times intensify the integral action When TI is set to zero the integral action is disabled TDNeg_ChX TDNeg_Chi _ Tip Strip H Bridge channel X derivative time for PID when Theta is less than limp home angle Units s Seconds NI EDIDS 2400 Seri
182. hould be wired to this control 16 UEGOX Lambda Range UEGO1 Lambda Range 065 Air Tip Strip UEGO Lambda Range Detail Adjusts the amplification range for lambda measurement Two amplification modes are available One mode having an amplifier gain factor of 8 allows for measurements of lambda from 0 65 to air The other mode having an amplifier gain factor of 17 allows for measurements of lambda 0 75 to air It is recommended to use the gain factor of 17 for operation above lambda 1 5 This gain factor provides better resolution in the lean region The gain factor can be changed at any time during operation tg UEGO amp EGO Filter Cutoff Freq UEGO amp EGO Filter Cutoff Freq 10 Hz Tip Strip UEGO and EGO filter cutoff frequency Units Hz Detail The cutoff frequency for a second order Butterworth filter applied to all UEGO and EGO channel results Stoichiometric A F Ratio Stoichiometric A F Ratio 14 7 kg kg NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 133 Tip Strip Stoichiometric A F Ratio Units Kg Detail The stoichiometric air fuel ratio of the calibrated fuel type 19 UEGO Calibration Ip Array LSU 4 9 and UEGO Calibration Ip Array LSU 4 2 LEGO Calibration Ip Array LSU 4_9 le mA ho P H ho T 1243 Tip Strip UEGO Calibration Ip Array LSU 4 9 Detail The array of pump current values corresponding to Lambda values for a given sensor type and fuel
183. i Host Configuration Only Host Configuration Only PFI LS2_ChanEnable PF LS2 TimingMode PFI LS2 Frequency Pe PFI2 LS2_ChanEnable PFI21S2 TimingMode PS2 Frequency OFF Frequency Hz OFF Frequency Hz PF LS2 ControlMode PFHLS2 DutyOyde PFI PFI2 L52 ControMode PFI24S24 Dutycyde Duty Cyde 50 l Duty de 96 PFI LS3_ChanEnable henri 3 Host Configuration Only OFF Host Configuration PFI2 LS3_ChanEnable PFI21S3 TimingMode PFIZ1S34 Frequency PFI LS3 TimingMode PFI LS3 Frequency f OFF Frequency fio Hz Frequency Hz i Lock PFI LS3and4 L _ j ee Lock PFI2 LS3and4 PFI2 LS3 ControMode PFI2 LS3 DutyCycle PFI LS3 ControlMode PFI LS3 Dutyoy FI F f UNLOCKED UNLOCKED Duty Cycle 50 2 Duty Cycle 50 fi Host Configuration Only Host Configuration Only PFI LS4_ChanEnable PFI LS4 TimingMode PFI LS4 Frequency PFI2 1S4_ChanEnable PFI2 L54 TimingMode PFI2 LS4 Frequency oF ic Frequency 100 j Hz OFF Frequency 100 Hz PFI LS4 ControMode PFILS4 DutyCycie PF LS4 Contraode PFI2 LS4 DutyCycle Duty de Fo je f Duty so ll NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 87 PFI LSX_ChanEnable PFI LS1_ChanEnable OFF Tip Strip Enables lowside channel Detail When ON PFI LSX channel is enabled for PWM operation When PFI LS12 Lock is ON then
184. ications A single optical encoder will typically have three different outputs named A B and Z Signals A and B are quadrature encoded 90 degrees out of phase while Z is a single reference pulse per 360 degrees rotation of the encoder shaft Signal A or B not both typically A may be wired to the Crank digital input while signal Z must be wired to the EncZ digital input Encoders having pulse counts of 360 to 3600 pulses per rotation are common for research engine control applications although any pulse count may be used The EPT ENC function will then extrapolate this to an improved resolution depending on the EPT extrapolation level If the optical encoder is mounted to the crankshaft then NumberOfCrankTeeth should be set to the encoder pulse count and Stroke should be set according to the engine type 2 STROKE or 4 STROKE If the engine is a 4 stroke then a cam phase signal must be present and logically gated EncZMask with the Z pulse so that every other Z pulse is allowed to pass through The gating function is accomplished by setting the EncZMask button to EncZ Masked The result will be that the EPT function will see two full rotations of crank pulses for every Z pulse The cam phase signal may be a complex pattern as long as it provides a consistent TRUE state for one Z pulse and a FALSE state for the next repeating this pattern The Cam offset and extension functions can be used to adjust the cam phase signal in order to meet the prop
185. ified in the ESTTL1 X MainDwell The leading edge will be determined by the current requested Dwell and the current engine speed ESTTL1 X_SparkTiming will always take precedence over EST TL1 X_MainDwell in the presence of engine speed fluctuations If the engine speed increases after the spark pulse has started then the actual dwell will be slightly shorter than the requested Dwell to ensure that correct spark timing is achieved Likewise if the engine speed decreases after the spark pulse has started then the actual dwell be will slightly longer than the requested Dwell NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 97 Main Timing DBTDC ES Restrike Pulses Main Dwell Dwell Dwell 1 Dwell 1 3 3 Dwell 4 Figure 4 3 2 1 1 Pulse Train illustration for Spark Main and four Restrike pulses ESTTL1 X_RestrikeYEnable ESTTL1 1_Restrike1 Enable Restrike Enable Tip Strip Enables a spark restrike pulse Detail Enables Restrike pulse Y associated with channel X on ESTTL 1 module ESTTL1 X_RestrikeYDelay ESTTL1 1_Restrikel Delay a 0 msec Tip Strip Delay of a spark restrike pulse with respect to the end of a preceeding pulse command Units msec Detail Specifies a delay in msec of a spark restrike pulse Y with respect to the trailing edge of a preceeding pulse command see Figure 4 3 2 1 1 for illustration i ESTTL1 X_RestrikeYDwell ESTTL1 1_Restrike1 Dwell Be tmeec Tip Strip Sp
186. ifies the Start of Injection SOI timing in Degrees before TDC When DIX Timing Mode is set to EOI this parameter is disabled and retains its most recent value 4 Inj1 SOI wM Inj2 SOI In SOI Inj3 SOI Inj5 SOI Inj SOI lt gt li i F f x Inj1 Duration IInj2 Duration Inj3 Duration Inj4 Duration Inj5 Duration Inj6 Duration ee ee ee nn x O f Inj1 Pulse Inj2Pulse Inj3 Pulse Inj Pulse Inj5Pulse Inj6 Pulse Figure 4 10 2 1 a Pulse Train for SOI Timing Mode The reference timing is TDC position for each individual cylinder Applicable to EPT mode EOI Timing eor mmn owo SO 20 to 5 ou 20 Tip Strip End Of Injection angle with respect to TDC Units DBTDC Detail When DIX Timing Mode is set to EOI this parameter specifies the End of Injection EOI timing in Degrees before TDC When DIX Timing Mode is set to SOI this parameter is disabled and retains its most recent value 4 Inj1 EOI Inj2 EOI jni6 EO Inj3 EOI Inj5 EO Inj4 EO lt gt Le Inj5 Duration Inj6 Duration lt _ gt EE Inj1 Duration Inj2 Duration Inj3 Duration Inj4 Duration EL LUS nid Durs TDCX Inj1 Pulse Inj2 Pulse Inj3 Pulse Inj Pulse
187. in 12 of each NI 9411 module should be connected to the external commanding system ground otherwise the correct logic level of the signal will not be sensed by the NI 9411 module For single ended digital commands the 15 pin D Sub a pins of the NI 9411 digital input channels must be connected to the signal while leaving the b pins disconnected or floating For differential or complimentary digital commands the positive 66 7 and negative signal pair should connect to the a and b pins respectively It is good practice to use external 1K pull down or pull up resistors on each digital input command line in case the commands are unintentionally disconnected For an active high command the digital input should be pulled low such that the pulldown resistor is connected between the digital input and ground For an active low command the digital input should be pulled high such that the pull up resistor is connected between the digital input and 5V or the main power source If 5V is used then the 5V output pins 4 5 of the NI 9411 module may be used for this purpose and the Vsup and COM screw terminals must be powered Using External ECU Port Fuel Injector or Ignition Driver Outputs When using another engine control system to command the DI Driver System it is likely that the port fuel injector or ignition driver outputs of the engine controller will be used Typically port fuel injector or ignition driver outputs are
188. ines which analog input within the Module Data cluster is the primary position sensor signal and which is the secondary position sensor signal 110 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual FALSE Use Analog1 V as the primary position sensor signal Use Analog2 V as the secondary position sensor signal TRUE Use Analog2 V as the primary position sensor signal Use Analog V as the secondary position sensor signal ATTENTION This parameter should only be modified during IDLE mode If this input is modified then initialize must be set to TRUE for the new value to take affect Init_ChX Int Chi Disabled Tip Strip Captures the Position Cal In and Primary Position inputs for position calibration Do not set true during CONTROL mode Detail When TRUE captures the Position Cal In and Primary Position inputs for proper position calibration Do not set this input to TRUE during CONTROL mode Freq ChX Freg_Chi 500 Hz Tip Strip Switching PWM frequency for driving Throttle actuator Units Hz Detail Indicates switching Pulse Width Modulation PWM frequency for driving Throttle actuator PosSetpoint_ChX PosSetpoint_Ch1 E 90 Tip Strip Throttle Channel X Position Setpoint Units Detail Indicates the throttle position setpoint in percentage NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 111 4 5 2 Channel X Position Calibration Tab The purpose of the Channel X Positio
189. ing_Window_Start a 60 DBTDC DI1_Firing_Window_End 60 DBTDC DI2_Firing_Window_Start 60 DBTDC DI2_Firing_Window_End 60 DBTDC DI3_Firing_Window_Start 2160 DBTDC DI3_Firing_Window_End fe 60 toeToc DI4_Firing_Window_Start Eco lier DHA Firing Window_End Fo DBTDC Tip Strip Start of angle based window around all injection events for a channel End of angle based window around all injection events for a channel Units DBTDC Detail The three channels within a DI Driver module share driver circuitry and are multiplexed Only one channel within a DI Driver module is able to operate at one time Therefore angle based firing windows are used to define a period during which an injection event can take place for a given DI Driver channel A firing window is created around each DI Driver channel specified by a firing window start and end parameter for each DI Driver module The firing window must not be greater than a span of 240 degrees such that the firing windows around each of the three channels overlap If the windows around each of the three DI Driver channels overlap then the Firing Window Overlap Detected Indicator will be set TRUE and one or more of the three injector channels may not operate DIX Firing_Window_ Start Defines the start of the window in Degrees Before Top Dead Center DBTDC The TDC reference for the window is the DCX value associated with the app
190. ion sensors for redundancy If redundancy is required the analog inputs of the throttle driver module will be consumed for a single throttle body If redundancy is not required two throttle bodies may be used with a single position sensor signal used from each throttle body The array AnalogXRange ChY contains the minimum and maximum position sensor signal voltages for Analog1 and Analog2 channels of the module respectively Element 0 The position sensor signal voltage which corresponds to the minimum position of the throttle plate Element 1 The position sensor signal voltage which corresponds to the maximum position of the throttle plate Notes lf accurate position sensor signal voltages are already known then they should be entered to this array and a position calibration process is not necessary If it is desired to run a calibration process then the AnalogXRange_ChY values should be initialized with proper values for the calibration process to be successful The analog input range for the Throttle Driver module is 0 to 5V If the polarity of the position sensor output is positive then enter OV for element 0 and 5V for element 1 lf the polarity of the position sensor output is negative then enter 5V for element 0 and OV for element 1 Typically electronic throttle bodies have redundant position sensors such that one of the signals will have positive polarity and the other will have negative polarity PsnRange_In_ChX PsnRange_In
191. ional integral and derivative contributions to the PID output See the equation in Auxiliary PID Controller Setup for reference Smaller values cause less proportional contribution to the PID output Larger values cause more proportional contribution to the PID output Negative values will generate PID outputs that are inversely proportional to the error Setpoint Process Variable a HPV_Kp_Action HPY_Kp_ Action Tip Strip Proportional contribution of HPV PID controller Detail Indicates the contribution of the proportional term to the total PID output HPV_Ti HPV Ti Eo _ min Tip Strip Integral time constant for HPV PID controller lower stronger action 0 disabled 234 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Units min Detail Integral time constant A value of zero disables integral contribution to the PID output Smaller non zero values cause more contribution to the PID output Larger values cause less contribution to the PID output Negative values should not be used HPV_Ti_Action HPV_Ti_Action Tip Strip Integral contribution of HPV PID controller Detail Indicates the contribution of the integral term to the total PID output 40 HPV_Td HPV Td jo min Tip Strip Derivative time constant for HPV PID controller higher stronger action 0 disabled Units min Detail Derivative time constant A value of zero disables derivative contribution to the PID output Sm
192. ip Defines whether the DI Driver module is in uniform or individual mode Detail Activates the individual channel duration controls shown on this screen and also controls the Uniform Individual Channel Duration Indicator on the DI EPT Pulse Generation Tab Duration Ch2 and Ch3 mu Duration Ch2 msec Duration Ch2 CAD Duration Ch3 msec Duration Ch3 CAD 648 Detail Please see information for channel 1 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 161 Average Duration Detail Displays the average duration of the injection commands for all three channels 10 SkipFire D ChnX SkipFire_DI1_Chni SkipFire_DIi_Chn2 SkipFire_DI1_Chn3 Tip Strip Enables Skip Fire on DI channel when EPT Mode is selected Detail Enables the skip fire sequence defined by SkipFire Cycles and SkipFire OnCycle for their assigned DI channels It is also manipulated by the corresponding SkipFire DI1_ChnX buttons on the DI EPT Pulse Generation Tab SkipFire_Cycles SkipFire_Cycles Sif Tip Strip Specifies the period length in number of cycles for the skip fire sequence in EPT Mode Min 1 Detail Specifies the number of cycles included in a skip fire sequence when the DI injector is operated in EPT mode For example if the number 7 is entered the DI injector will continuously repeat a seven cycle sequence as long as SkipFire DI1_Ch
193. iring File DB_Pls pes ee ER ux_ _ Config Aux_ _ Config EL a ant E Auxilary_PID_Config Auxilary_PID_Config 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Pairing File DI2_Pls Aud Plot Aux_Plot 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Host VI DIL_Pls_Ger Aux2 Plot Aux2_Plot 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Pairing File DIL_Pls Aux3_Plot Aux3_Plot 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Host VI Control Exe Aux4_Plot Aux4 Plot 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Pairing File Control Cal_Mode_Config Cal_Mode_Config 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Host VI Aux4_Plot CalScope CalScope 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Pairing File Aux4_P ee 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Host VI Aux3_Plot AR EE DIL_Scope DIL_Scope 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Pairing File Aux3_P DI2_Config DI2_Config 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Host VI Aux2_Plota DI2_Scope DI2_Scope 5 5 2014 10 50 20 AM Dairine Fila Arw DS wf 1 2 iA 14 Press the green run button 2nd from left to start the DI Driver System main user interface The main user interface window contains a list of all setup windows used to configure the various DI Driver System functions Double clicking on a setup window name will open the window and make the listed name bold Multiple setup windows may be open simultaneously Pressing the X in the upper right corner of each window will close the window Also double clicking the bolded window name within the main window list will close the window A single click of a bolded window name will bring
194. isplayed in the EPT Scope after pressing the Update control NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 197 4 11 4 EPT Diagnostics Tab a Engine Position Tracking Setup i 190000 Engine Speed 901 015 EPT Scope EPT Scope Tip Strip Displays scope traces determined by setup Units Samples Detail Displays the logic level of each EPT function input Scope Controls 198 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Cursors x Y 230000 7 BE Cursor2 245000 7 4 Pr Sync Pa Ext Cam Masked Z 4r _ a gt E 5 lia J JL k Tip Strip Scope Controls Update Refreshes the EPT scope display Clear Clears the EPT scope display Detail Used to manipulate the EPT Scope display and define cursors for measuring time and logic level of the various signals Scope Definitions Count Pulses of a Crank between Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 Result 25 Tip Strip Defines information to be shown on scope trace Detail This collection of parameters is used to count pulses rising edges or falling edges of a specified signal between the cursors in the EPT Scope Scope Channel Assignments Crank_DigChanAsn Cami_DigChanAsn Engine Speed nano Nr 9411 12 901 015 RPM Encoder DigChanAsn Cam2_DigChanAsn Engine Status Not Assigned gt Not Assigne
195. jection occurs SkipFire OnCycle Only one Skip Fire Sequence can be defined for the entire DI Driver System but it can be enabled on all present channels Changing SkipFire Cycles or SkipFire OnCycle from this window programmatically changes the value of that parameter on the DI EPT Tab and all other DIX Advanced Settings windows Similarly changing the value of each SkipFire DI1_ChnX parameter programmatically updates the value of the corresponding parameters on the DI EPT Tab x DI1 EPT Pulse Strategy Pulse 1 Pulse 2 DI Driver 1 hason on Con J Lor il J aea SOI Timing DETDC j EOI Timing D8TOC 30 _ far cote ape a ae sorre OnCyde Duration chi cAn 3 6 1 2 6 BEN uen con M an o 576 146 a SkipFire_O14_Chn3 Enable Individual SkipFire_Cycies Dli Channel Pulse Pulse 1 Pulse 2 Pulse 3 Pulse 6 n Tip Strip Enables injection pulse Detail When ON the command to the associated DI Driver module channel will be active for the specified duration When OFF the command will be inactive These controls also manipulate the corresponding Pulse controls on the main DI EPT Tab SOI Timing sorma oo 30 l o l o Rs Tip Strip Start Of Injection angle with respect to TDC Units DBTDC NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 159 Detail When DIX Timing Mode is set to SOI this parameter spec
196. ket Contact 205090 1 Norcomp D Sub Connector Hood 15P 45 Degree 971 015 020R121 Paladin Tools Crimper 26 20 AWG PA 1460 AMP D Sub Pin Extractor Tool 91067 2 Table 3 3 3 4 b NI 9411 Module Breakout Harness Part List 54 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Direct Mode and TMP Mode Commands When operating DI Driver modules and or the PFI Driver module in Direct mode or Triggered Multi Pulse TMP mode any of the NI 9411 digital input channels up to 12 can be assigned to command any of the DI Driver and PFI Driver channels via the Digital Input Setup Window Engine Position Tracking Signals When operating DI Driver modules and or the PFI Driver module in Engine Position Tracking EPT mode the NI 9411 digital inputs are not needed to command driver channels directly because they are commanded by angle based setpoints by the software EPT function However NI 9411 digital inputs are required for receiving crank and cam or encoder position signals Any of the NI 9411 digital input channels can be assigned to crank cam and encoder position inputs to the EPT function via the Digital Input Setup Window Refer to the Engine Position Tracking Setup Window for more information about crank cam and encoder sensor signal types and their compatibility with the NI 9411 module Refer to the NI 9411 Operating Instructions and Specifications for detailed information about digital input specifications The 15 pin D Sub COM p
197. l However the general PID equation used for PID control within this system is according to PID Output Ke e t e t at Lex c Td Where PV Process Variable e t Error Setpoint Process Variable as a function of time Kc Proportional gain Ti Integral time constant Td Derivative time constant J e t _ Integral of error as a function of time There are many internet articles and books available covering PID control theory One recommended internet resource for PID control theory is at http www ni com white paper 3782 en The core of the DI Driver System PID control function is very similar to the LabVIEW code described in the above recommended article This document assumes that the reader understands the purpose of PID setpoints CalPoints and gains s Auxilary PID Controller Setup o x Aux PID 1 Aux PID 2 Aux PID 3 Aux PID 4 Aux PID 5 Aux PID 6 Aux PID 7 Aux PID 8 AuxPID1_EnablePID Aux PID 1 Plot AuxPID_1_FlexControlParameters f ICS D11_Duration_Inj1_Uniform_EPT AuxPID1_ProcessVariableSelect AuxPID1_PIDSetpoint Ar 0 AuxPID1_FlexControlParamWrite l Disabled AuxPID1_ProcessVariable _AuxPID1_FF 0 5 lo 3 J J AuxPID1_FinalOutput i 0 005 Appy PING output AuxPID1_Kc_ AuxPID1 Kc_Action AuxPID1_PIDOutput AuxPID1_ManualOverride AE pren J AuxPID1_PIDMax 0 005 j Disabled AuxPID1_Ti AuxPID1 Ti Acti
198. l If a DI driver module is inserted in the assigned slot externally powered and DIX_ModuleEnable is ON then the controller begins communicating with the module and allows the module to operate DIX_Mode NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 67 fy Direct Cal TMP i ne ee ee ee ee ie es el Tip Strip Selects operating mode for DI Driver module Detail Operating mode applied to the associated DI Driver module Each DI Driver module can be independently assigned a mode of operation which will apply to all channels of the associated DI Driver module The DIX_Mode refers to the mode of sending injection commands to the channels of the associated module It is still necessary to configure the current and voltage drive profile via this DIX_Driver Setup window Direct Mode The DI Driver module channels are commanded directly by external digital inputs of the NI 9411 modules The digital input which commands each channel can be configured via the Digital Input Setup window The digital input level which commands the DI Driver channel ON is configured via the Invert buttons of the Digital Input Setup window The duration of the injection command is determined by the direct duration of the digital input The maximum duration allowed is 5 msec If longer durations are required consult with your National Instruments sales engineer or support team Calibration Mode Calibration mode is for the purpose
199. l The basic entity of a database is a cluster A cluster is the description of a single network for example a CAN bus For CAN the cluster contains only the baud rate Usually a database contains only one cluster For example the NI CAN database and vector CANdb formats support only one cluster However FIBEX supports multiple clusters per database you could for example describe all of a car s networks in a single database Deployed ECUs Deployed ECUs Analog ECU Analog ECU Analog Cluster Tip Strip A list of ECUs from selected ECU database on the controller Detail ECUs appear in the NI XNET Database Editor only as transmitters and receivers of frames within clusters They are not separate entities This means that the same ECU might appear in different clusters of the database but in the exported FIBEX file it appears as different ECU entities Read from CAN Bus j Add Insert NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 257 Add Insert Tip Strip Add Insert item onto the Read from CAN Bus List box Detail Clicking Add Insert button to start mapping a variable from CAN signal list to a variable on the Flex Control Parameter list When there are duplicate line items they will be highlighted red and the CAN Init button will be grayed out and disabled Delete Tip Strip Delete selected item from the Read from CAN Bus List box Move Up Move Up Tip Strip Move selec
200. l boost power supply is enabled and will maintain the working voltage specified by DIX _HVTarget When OFF the module internal boost power supply is disabled The actual boost voltage is displayed in the Internal High Voltage indicator within this window For more information on the module internal boost power supply please see Powering the System DIX_InjectionEnable DI1_InjectionEnable Tip Strip Enables all channels of module 68 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail When ON the module injection control circuitry is enabled When OFF the module injection control circuitry is disabled This parameter does not generate any injection pulses but only enables the driver circuitry to operate when fuel commands are generated j DIX_ChanXEnable DI1 ChantEnable on DIL Chan2Enable on DIL Chan3Enable Tip Strip Enables channel regardless of mode Detail When ON the associated channel is enabled to operate DIX_OneShot DIi_OneShot oF Tip Strip Generates one shot command to selected channel Detail When pressed the DI Driver module will deliver a one shot pulse to the channel selected in DIX OneShotSelect having a duration specified by DIX_OneShotTime This button returns to the OFF state automatically DIX_OneShotSelect lt Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Tip Strip Selects channel for one shot command Detail Selects the DI Driver channel to which a one shot pulse is delivered To disable one shot
201. l sensed by the NI 9220 module ii AIX_Conv AIO Conv 0 014287 O0 Tip Strip Calibration table Detail 1D Lookup table for converting the analog input to engineering units It is assumed that the conversion is linear and the table is 2x2 The X values correspond to the AIX Raw V while the Y values correspond to the engineering parameter AIX u such as Rail Pressure bar J AIX AIO 1800 1500 1000 200 0 395 339 Tip Strip Output from calibration table Units Same as AIX Units Detail Engineering parameter such as Rail Pressure bar which is interpolated by the AlX_Conv 1D Table The unit u indicates the units specified in AIX Units Enable_AIX Filt Enable Enable AIO Filt Tip Strip Enable use of filter NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 147 Detail Enable filtering of the incoming voltage signal read by the 9220 module Init_AIX_Filt Disable init_AI0_ Fit Tip Strip Re intialize filter to change break frequency Detail When pressed reinitializes the oe order filter on AIX_Raw The filter should be reinitialized when changing AIX_FilterBreak AIX_FilterBreak 25 l AI0_FilterBreak Tip Strip Filter cutoff frequency Units Hz Detail Lowpass cutoff frequency of a one order filter on raw voltage SimEnable_AIX Disabled SimEnable AIO Tip Strip Enable simulation of this parameter in engineering units Detail When TRUE
202. les to Log Not Selected Plot lt Not Selected AIO Name AIO AIO Units All Name Ali AT Units Al Name AI2 AI2 Units AIS Name AI3 AIS Units DIL Battery Voltage V Wi 90411 1 0 State 9411 1 0 Freg Hz Detail The variables to be logged are specified in an array of drop down selection lists A logging parameter plot is available within the window and parameters may be individually selected for plotting a Log Scope NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 283 F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D I 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 Sample 1 4 Detail Plot of selected Variables to Log Units samples 284 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 29 Faults Window The purpose of the Faults window is to show the status of each fault within the DI Driver System The faults are displayed in alphabetical order TT ECS ES Le LE RE fe fo ON DIDI Fli_Opencreut peh DIOH Fl2_Opentrciat O OTL FR_Opencrent ec D OR RA Lini GIDN IPS aoe DION PS_OwerLoad DIDI Short_Crcuit A ee SS eee et ee ee ee ee 557 001 DIDIA _Opentrcut 1 ow 12 31 1 D O12 H _Limt rary Le qi D DIz HighVolkageDwive Tver Len al DIDIZ LowvokageDrive nl a F E piDimoduereme 0 1 ii eri uno asr 0 8 57 00 0 DIDIZ PS_GverLoad DIDIZ Short_Creuit eee Dpencreur TA Jo x fi wertaw uno jus CE CE CT ES EE LS 857000 D
203. libration Options Snapshot Hel p g p p p ED a q 5 i i F ko EJ L j T i a Target Items Host Items Name Type Control Ind Units Description D Help Button Boolean Control AI Initialized Boolean Indicator Alo Single Float Indicator Output from ci ee an Control Al0_Conv 1D Table Control v Calibration tak 7 r Al0_FilterBreak Single Float Control Hz Filter cutoff fr RPC_Enabled seuss AI0_Name String Control Text name O SADI_SIZ Es ux Indicator AI0 Raw Single Float Indicator v Raw voltage ir _Subhost FP Stat Array 1D Enum U32 Indicator A10_Units String Control Text units SubHosttist 132 7 Control All Single Float Indicator Output from ci SubHostColor Array 1D U32 Indicator Al1_Conv 1D Table Control v Calibration tak SubHostRef List Array 1D Refnum Indicator Al1_FilterBreak Single Float Control Hz Filter cutoff fr SubHosts List Array 1D Cluster Tindicator AI1 Name String Control Text name T j Ali Raw Single Float Indicator V Raw voltage ir AI1_Units String Control Text units 1 J z Messages Pairings Time Message Class Group Name Host Item Ey 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Host VI DI4_Pls_Ger D Exec Initialized Initialized 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Pairing File DI4_Pls 9411_Config 9411_Config D Exec RPC_Enabled RPC_Enabled 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Host VI DB_Pls_Ger Active_FlexParam_Display Active_FlexParam D Exec SADI_SIZE SADI_SIZE 5 5 2014 10 50 30 AM Pa
204. licable DI Driver module channel DIX_Firing_Window_End Defines the end of the window in Degrees Before Top Dead Center DBTDC The TDC reference for the window is the DCX value associated with the applicable DI Driver module channel Firing Window Overlap Detected w Firing Window Overlap Detected Tip Strip Indicates that the firing window for one channel overlaps with the next multiplexed channel within the module Detail This indicator will be set to TRUE if any firing window overlap is detected in any of the channels within a single DI Driver or PFI Driver module PFIX_TDC 190 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual fe ci PFI1_TDC TDCS Ame PFI2_TDC TOCS TDC10 TDC1i Toc4 pri4_toc TDC12 oc pr c Tip Strip Selects Top Dead Center reference associated with driver channel Detail TDC parameters are mapped to a specific PFI Driver channel by selecting a DCX from the drop down list in each PFIX_TDC parameter where X is the PFI Driver channel number PFI Firing Window_ Start PFI Firing Window_End PFI Firing Window Start 310 DBTDC PFI Hiring_Window_End 211250 DBTDC Tip Strip Start of angle based window around all injection events for a channel End of angle based window around all injection events for a channel Units DBTDC Detail The four PFI channels within the PFI Driver module share software functions and are multiplexed Only one PFI channel within the PFI Driver m
205. lly shut down and rely on external power Using an external high voltage supply is occasionally necessary depending on injector operating requirements Contact your National Instruments sales engineer or support team to determine if your application requires an external high voltage supply 74 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 24 OverLoad Integrator Hi U S l l o Hi E Overload Integrator T 4 ih i P i Tip Strip Indicates level of internal boost power supply load Units Detail The DI driver module maintains an integrator of power supply usage An internal counter increments with each internal power supply voltage boost and decrements according to a fixed time interval If the integrator winds up to 100 percent then an overload fault will be set This is an indication that the module temperature would soon rise beyond its maximum operating temperature if not stopped The module temperature fault may be tripped before the overload fault depending on the actual conditions DIX _PSChargeFault DI1_PSChargeFault Tip Strip DI Driver internal boost power supply charging fault Detail Indicates that the internal boost power supply is not able to increase the voltage within 255 boost pulses This is a critical fault and will shut down the internal boost power supply and all injector channels an DIX_PSOverloadFault DI1_PSOverloadFault Tip Strip Internal boost power supply charging fault
206. ltage Limit GEN Current Limit LOCKOUT 195 IV 144 64 M ol A GEN Address GEN BaudRate GEN Voltage Output GEN Current Output els E 0 15 Ir Io a TDK Error Status Error Description 272 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Reset Reset Tip Strip Resets TDK High Voltage power supply GEN Control Mode GEN Control Mode LOCKOUT Tip Strip Indicates TDK High Voltage Power Supply Control Mode Detail By default the TDK supply control mode should be in LOCKOUT mode which means the device front panel will be inoperable L OverVoltage Limit OverVoltage Limit 195 V Tip Strip TDK Genesys Power High Voltage Power Supply OverVoltage Protection Detail The OverVoltage limit is set to 195V The external high voltage supply to be applied to the DI Driver module is limited to 190V and thus the limit on the GEN Voltage Limit parameter This should give enough room for the user to operate up to 190V without error GEN Address GEN Address com Tip Strip TDK Genesys Power Supply instrument address Detail By default the TDK supply instrument address is set to 6 j GEN BaudRate GEN BaudRate Eo NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 273 Tip Strip TDK Genesys Power Supply instrument RS232 serial communication baud rate Default 9600 Detail By default the serial communication with the instrument is set to 9600 Output Enable Output Enable
207. luding enabling the channel setting operating mode of a throttle channel and assigning position control setpoints Channel X Position Calibration Used for configuring monitoring a group of parameters related to the throttle position calibration process associated with throttle Channel X Channel X Control Calibration Used for configuring a collection of calibration parameters used to control throttle position associated with throttle Channel X s Throttle Driver Setup ThrottleM oduleEnable Channel 1 Control Channel 1 Position Calibration Channel 1 Control Calibration l ModulePresent HiSense 0 55 A H Sense 0 06 A ThrottleAni 339 Vv ThrottleAn2 as lu HiFault H2Fault Battery 13 86 v Temperature 38 05 c Throttle Channel 2 ModeRequest_Ch1 Alconrroi ModeStatus_Ch1 CONTROL PrimaryPsnSwitch_ Chi Analog 1 Int_Chi Freq Chi 500 Hz PosSetpoint_Chi So m ThrottleModuleEnable ThrottleModuleEnable ON Tip Strip Enables Throttle Driver Module operation 106 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual uPID_Ch1 PrimaryPsn_Ch1 SecondaryPsn_Chi AboveLH Chi Pen_Fault_Ch1 uLimit_Ch1 Mo rautt uLHc Chi mo es M u_ Ch1 pe jm Detail If a Throttle driver module is inserted in the assigned slot externally powered and ThrottleModuleEnable is ON then the controller
208. matically Use the following settings 19 2 168 1 100 IP Address 299 233 0 0 Subnet Mask 299 299 299 299 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DNS Server Apply Change You must reboot the DI Driver System for this change to take effect Note you will also need to find the target again in SCM NI DIDS 2F131F1 Target Name Apply Change NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 291 4 30 3 Run Time Info The Run Time Info tab of the Execution Information window displays the execution time of various software processes and parameters related to the controller hardware Execution Information El ee Static Info Network Run Time Info Expansion Misc Execution Info mit p Process PlsGen_ Process a _OP Table OP Process ae DI PFI_Config_ Process a e HonCrit PlsGen Process Al a ration Em i o _ res CPU_Load D gt Chassis Temp ne gt Storage Space Used DE EG USB _Drive_Space_ Used fo bytes USB_Drive_Present 292 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 30 4 Expansion Misc Execution Info The Expansion Execution Info tab of the Execution Information window displays the execution time of various software processes and parameters related to the Inputs Outputs on the MXle expansion chassis Static Info Network Run Time Info Expansion Misc Execution Info ns of so toe ESTTL_Process es Readinp_Process _
209. meters O DN IPhaseDuration Element LEGO Parameters DO _IPhaseDuration_Elements Engine Postion Tracking Parameters P OU _IPhaseDuration_Elementd 7 DH IPhaseDuration Elements DRE On JPhaseDuration_Element sorseessesssesssssssersess3s CAN Signal Not Ausiliary PID Parameters j DH _IPhaseDuration Element 2 Rail Pressure Control Pararneters a i DH _ PhaseDuration_ Elements Auxiliary PWM Parameters DIL Enable _Injl_EPT CAN Write Signal nano Ear F naa 2 Expansion Aundliary PWM Parameters b Oi Enable Inj EPT Operating Point Parameters DH_Enable_Inj3_EPT Log Data Parameters b DH _Enable_Inpl_EPT NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 259 Read from CAN Bus Signal List CAN Read Signal Flex Control Parameter Uservariable1 gt UserVariablel 0 000000 D130 D130 Detail A list of mapped CAN Signal to Flex Control Parameter Write to CAN Bus 6 Add insert Add Insert Tip Strip Add Insert item onto the Write to CAN Bus List box Detail Clicking Add Insert button to start mapping a variable from the CalPoints Select list to a variable on the CAN Signal list When there are duplicate line items they will be highlighted red and the CAN_ Run button will be grayed out and disabled Delete Delete Tip Strip Delete selected item from the Write to CAN Bus List box Move Up Move Up Tip Strip Move selected item up the Write to CAN Bus List box
210. mitted Received Frames dialog You can drag and drop frames from the Available Frames list to the Transmitted Frames or Received Frames lists The signals on the Transmitted Frames will now appear on the Write to CAN Bus Tx CAN Signal list The signals on the Received Frames will now appear on the Read from CAN Bus Rx CAN Signal list The same ECU cannot transmit and receive a frame therefore each frame can appear in only one list Click the appropriate list header to specify whether the frame lists are sorted by name or ID NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 267 a File Edit Options Help c i Networks 22 Analog_Cluster res AID Read mmm A110_Write mm A111 Write mma A112_Write Tene A113_Write mm Al14 Write pens A115_Write jane ATL Read fens AT Read res ATS Read Tas Al4 Read res AIS Read fens ATG Read res ATT Read iene AIS_Write jews ATS Write El gy lt ECUs gt a M an Transmitted Frames LA Received Frames nas A111_ Write m ALL Write mas A113_Write rams Al14 Write name A115_Write name AIS_Write rs AIS_Write AIO Read mm AT Read mm AI Read mma ATS Read mm Al4_Read mma AIS_Read mm AIG_Read mm AIF Read 268 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 23 1 2 Manage NI XNET Databases Dialog Another helpful tool within the Database Editor is the Manage NI XNET Databases Dialog tool which can be used to create and delete database alia
211. mperature 108 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 5 1 Channel X Control Tab The purpose of the Channel X Control Tab is to configure a particular throttle module channel so Throttle Driver Setup ThrottleModuleEnable Channel 1 Control Channel 1 Position Calibration Channel 1 Control Calibration ModulePresent HiSense 067 a H Sense 006 A ThrottleAni 339 VI ThrottleAn2 1 54 V HiFault H2Fault Battery 13 86 v Temperature 37 64 Irc 4 ChXEnable ChiEnable Enabled Throttle Channel 2 ChiEnable ModeRequest_Ch1 fe CONTROL Mons Chi contro PrimaryPsnSwitch_Chi Analog 1 Init_Ch1 Freg_Ch1 2500 IH k PosSetpoint_Chi Sro Tip Strip Enable H Bridge channel X Pi PrimaryPsn_Ch1 li L SecondaryPsn_Ch1 T boveLH_Ch1 an i mn cu T O y H E a O g ae J A Detail When this button is enabled and ModulePresent is lit ON H bridge channel X is enabled ModeRequest_ChX NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 109 ModeRequest_Ch1 CONTROL POSITION CALIBRATION CONTROL Tip Strip Sets the requested throttle mode Detail Requested operating mode for throttle Channel X IDLE The throttle motor voltage is OV Primary Position is calculated according to Position Calibration Out parameters POSITION CALIBRATION
212. mproved by a factor of 217 128 Each individual extrapolated angle unit between the physical crank teeth is called a Crank Angle Tick CAT CAT Crank Angle Ticks Single unit of angular measure of the EPT function Reported as a power of two angular ticks of crank position travel having a resolution dependent on EXTRAP and the number of physical teeth per crankshaft rotation For example if using the N M EPT VI which has an extrapolation of 7 the number of CAT per crank tooth would be 247 128 and angular position would be evenly incremented by 128 CAT from one physical tooth to the next If a 60 2 pattern were used the maximum number of CAT per crankshaft rotation would be 60 128 7680 If the engine was a 4 stroke the total number of CAT per engine cycle would be 2 60 128 15360 MAX_CAT Maximum Crank Angle Ticks per engine cycle EPT Function Commonality EPT Input Signals All EPT functions have a common internal core that tracks angular position The supporting internal logic around the core interprets the incoming crank and cam position pulses according to an expected pattern Each EPT function has a Boolean crankshaft and camshaft input These signals may be connected via any available NI 9411 digital input source within the DI Driver System The pattern input signals are named according to the most common engine applications such that there is a crankshaft trigger wheel and an optional 4 stroke camshaft trigger wheel NI EDIDS 2400 Serie
213. n Calibration Tab is to configure parameters associated with throttle position calibration so Throttle Driver Setup ThrottleModuleEnable Channel 1 Control Channel 1 Position Calibration Channel 1 Control Calibration ModulePresent PsnCalinitDelay_Ch1 __ Postion Calibration In Postion Calibration Out ON an ls L AnalogiRange _Ch1 PrimaryAnalogRar Chi TE logiRange ryAnalogRange_ PsnCalReturnFromPosDelay_Ch1 los 0 51 1 02 Er 4 63 4 62 v v F 1 s 4 63 445 v 4 wv la 3 4 v PsnRange_In_Chi PsnRange_Out_Chi uPsnCalNeg_Init_Ch1 ob o GE D 100 100 uPsnCalPos_Init_Chi 0 5 uPsnCalInc Chi sioz ll uPsnCalDec_Chl PsnCalComplete_Ch1 TRE P ile VI uPsnCalPos_Ch1 4 6 D uPsnCalInc_Thresh_Ch1 TE MI uPsnCalNeg_Ch1 3 8 uPsnCalDec_Thresh_Chi uLimitPos_Ch1 NO FAULT ra ES uLimitNeg_Ch1 _NO FAULT PsnCalOffset_Ch1 Y PsnCalDiff_Fault_Ch1 NO FAULT 110 005 LV Battery 13 85 v L Temperature 39 24 C Throttle Channel 2 le PsnCalDiff Thresh_Ch1 BE v PsnCallnitDelay_ChX PsnCalinitDelay_Ch1 ap js Tip Strip Time delay from the start of pos cal init to the start of pos cal Units s seconds Detail Indicates time delay in seconds from the start of position calibration initialization phase to start of positive calibration This time allows the throttle plate to re
214. n Chassis This setup window is only applicable if the ESTTL module is inserted in the assigned slot NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 91 4 3 1 ESTTL 1 TDC Channel Mapping Tab The purpose of the ESTTL 1 TDC Channel Mapping Tab is to assign Top Dead Center TDC values to each ignition coil command s gt ESTTL Spark Setup ESTTL1_SkipFire_Cycles Gmm BR ESTTLI_SkipFire_OnCycle ESTTL 1 TDC Channel Mapping chi ch ch3 ch ch5 chs Honom So cap Toc1 o CAD mal Dao CAD Trocs aso CAD walle TDCS 300 cap TDC6 1540 can TDC 120 CAD Tpcs 360 CAD T C9 600 CAD TDC10 180 CAD TDC11 420 CAD 660 CAD TDC12 ESTILI amp _TDC r ama ESTTL1 SkipFire Cycles ESTTL1_SkipFire_Cycles Ar L ESTTL1 1_Firing_Window_Start 359 DBTDC ESTTL1 2_Firing_Window_Start SEMI ESTTL1 3_Firing_ Window Start 259 DBTDC ESTTL1 4 _Firing_ Window Start 359 DBTDC ESTTL1 5_Firing_Window Start Hess DBTDC ESTTL1 6_Firing_Window_Start Baso DBTDC ESTTL1 _Firing_Window_Start s E 359 peTDC ESTTL1 8_Firing_Window Start B 359 DBTDC ESTTL1 1_Firing_Window_End 235 psToc ESTTL1 2_Firing_Window_End 359 DBTDC ESTTL1 3_Firing_Window_End 2 35 memc ESTTL1 4 _Firing_Window_End 359 leva ESTTL1 5_Firing_Window_End DBTDC ESTTL1 6_Firing_Window_End E 359
215. nX is enabled for the desired channel It is also manipulated by the corresponding SkipFire Cycles controls on the DI EPT Pulse Generation Tab and the other DIX Advanced Settings windows SkipFire OnCycle SkipFire_OnCycle 1 Tip Strip Specifies the number of active cycles during skip fire sequence in EPT Mode Min 1 Detail Specifies the number of active cycles included in a skip fire sequence when the DI injector is operated in EPT mode For example if the number 4 is entered and DI SkipFire Cycles is set to 7 the DI injector will continuously repeat a seven cycle sequence with four active cycles followed by three inactive cycles as long as SkipFire_ DI1_ChnxX is enabled for the desired channel It is also manipulated by the corresponding SkipFire OnCycle control on the DI EPT Pulse Generation Tab and the other DIX Advanced Settings windows 162 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 10 3 PFI X Tabs The PFI X tabs are intended for configuring both EPT and TMP operating modes for the PFI channels of the PFI Driver module X The EPT and TMP injection pulse command sequences support one pulse and apply it to all four PFI channels of the module The individual channel enable buttons operating mode and current profile parameters for the PFI Driver module are configured via the PFI and LS Driver Setup window When the EPT Mode is selected in the PFI Module Control tab of the PFI and LS Driv
216. nable Tip Strip Enables piezo operating mode Detail When ON enables piezo injector operation DIX BackBoostTime will not be used and the control will be disabled PhaseArray is used differently in piezo mode DIX_Piezolnvert DIi_ PiezolInvert Tip Strip Enables inverted piezo operating mode Detail When ON enables inverted Piezo operation In contrast to normal piezo mode the first four IPhaseArray elements are used for discharge and the last four elements are used for charge as shown below When operating in inverted piezo mode in addition to adding inductor and shorting of channel 3 channel 2 must be disconnected Therefore a DI Driver module can only drive one inverted piezo injector Please refer to the DI Driver Rev F manual for details on inverted piezo operation 6 8 1 2 3 5 rot fil lol oa 9 DIX_Scope DI1 Scope Tip Strip DI Scope current and voltage trace 72 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail When icon is pressed it will display a dialog with a graph showing current in Amps during the most recent injection command to the associated DI Driver module If multiple channels within the module are operating it is not possible to identify which channel is being displayed Note that the resolution of the current display is approximately 10 usec sampling interval and is for reference only A box instrument oscilloscope and current probe may be necessary for more detailed informati
217. nal Modules NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 45 3 3 2 Powering the System Warning The external battery supply input terminals on the NI 9751 DI Driver and NI 9758 PFI Driver modules are not reverse voltage polarity protected Connecting power to the module in reverse polarity will damage the modules This event is not covered by the warranty Please refer to the Reverse Battery Polarity Notice for a recommended solution for protecting a system from reverse battery polarity The DI Driver System requires external DC power to the following system components Conionent Power Ground Valtsae Rande Maximum p Terminal Label Terminal Label g g Required Power cRIO 9082 V C 9 30 V 15 W 3 6 9 12 Channel Systems 3 3 2 a Power Supply Specifications for I O Hardware The NI 9411 module only needs external power supplied to the screw terminal block if 5V regulated output power is required from the 15 pin D Sub connector to an optical encoder Do not connect external power to the 15 pin D Sub NI recommends the following power supply options for powering the system components NI Part Number Model Number Input Voltage Output Voltage Output Current 783168 01 QS10 121 100 240 VAC 12 15 V 781095 01 PS 17 85 276 VAC 24 28 V 20A 3 3 2 6 Power Supply Recommendations for the DI Driver System The power supplies listed above are not included with the DI Driver System but are avail
218. ncFlagClear button on the EPT tab An obvious possible reason for such errors would be that the crank or cam trigger wheel pattern does not match the configuration of the selected EPT function If this is the case the EPT will either not sync at all or will lose sync almost immediately after initial sync Assuming that the trigger wheel pattern is correct there is another common source of sync errors which is electrical noise This problem is discussed below along with some diagnostic techniques Electrical Noise Electrical noise can be picked up and manifested in a wide variety of ways There are a few guidelines that should be followed for ensuring appropriate immunization against electrical noise It is unlikely that noise will be introduced on the crank or cam signals between the NI 9411 module and the cRIO controller It is most likely that electrical noise will be picked up along the wires between the sensor and the external connection to the NI 9411 module If possible the wiring for sensors should be twisted shielded pairs and as short as possible There should be few electrical connections between the sensor and the module The signals should be routed away if possible from high current wires such as injector wires or dynamometer wiring The NI 9411 module should have a sensor signal ground connected to its COM pin Efforts should be made to fully understand all ground connections within the system making sure that ground connections are made
219. nd of command Units msec Detail Duration in milliseconds of each phase When the duration is reached operation proceeds to the next phase A special duration value of zero means that operation will remain in that phase until the end of the injection command A typical IPhase array configuration for operating piezo direct injectors is shown below 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 PhaseDrivefHV LV Up un 4 up Up _ Donn Down pown pown IPhaseCurrentUpper Amps 8 8 8 8 E 8 E 8 IPhaseCurrentLower Amps 7 i7 i7 i7 7 7 i7 i7 IPhaseDuration msec 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 0 025 0 025 0 025 0 16 bix Phase1FirstPeakEnable OFF DI1_Phase1FirstPeakEnable Tip Strip Causes phase 2 to begin after current reaches first peak Detail Phase1FirstPeakEnable is a software option of the DI Driver module to transfer operation from the first phase to the second phase upon reaching the first current peak corresponding to the first phase IPhaseCurrentUpper The first IPhaseDuration should be set to a minimum value long enough for the first peak to be reached NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 71 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fi 8 enon il ol ll ol lala IPhaseCurrentUpper Amps 20 i5 10 Jo fo fo Jo Jo IPhaseCurrentLower Amps 19 bi 14 E Jo fo Jo Jo Jo IPhaseDuration msec 0 2 Lo Jo Jo fo Jo Jo Jo 17 DIX_PiezoEnable OFF DI1_Phase1FirstPeakEnable DI1_PiezoE
220. nds to download several files from the DI Driver System including the user interface windows SCM will store these files in the Windows user Documents LabVIEW Data SCM Data directory The location of these files and the IP address of the system controller will be remembered on each successive opening of the SCM console and are used to establish a connection with the system Therefore this Search for SCM Target step only needs to be done once or each time the IP address of the system controller is changed Search For Target Select Target 192 168 1100 DL_Driver_System Download Files z Search Cancel s FTP Download Progress 13 After the FTP Download process is complete the SCM console will be populated with information as shown below If the Host VI list lower center is not populated as shown below it may be that the FTP download process NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 23 did not fully complete If this is the case please attempt the Search for SCM Target step again If the FTP download process fully completes the green run button 2nd from left will be enabled s Software Calibration Management 192 168 1 100 gt DIDS_Host vi File Edit Operate Pairings Ca
221. nj2_Chan3_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj3_Uniform_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj3_Chan1_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj3_Chan2_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj3_Chan3_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj4_Uniform_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj4_Chan1_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj4_Chan2_EPT TA Tip Strip Selects destination of the direct mapping input Detail Array of Flex Control Parameter selectors Each selector maps the DirectMap_X_InputSelector to a Flex Control Parameter The selected parameter will be overwritten by the DirectMap_ X_InputSelector value The Flex Control Parameters can be selected one of two ways by left unclicking and searching through the full list of Flex Control Parameters shown above or by right unclicking and searching through a hierarchical list of menus to find the particular Flex Control Parameter of interest as shown below DirectMap_1_FlexControlParameters DI Driver 1 Parameters E gt 7 DI Driver 2 Parameters gt DI2 DI Driver 3 Parameters gt a D DI Driver 4 Parameters gt w PFI LS Driver 1 Parameters gt PFI Mode a PFIL_Enabl D4 Engine Position Tracking Parameters gt al PFI2_Enable a Not ae sens gt PFB_Enable Auxiliary PID Parameters gt PFI4_Enable Not Rail Pressure Control Parameters gt LS1_Enable Auxiliary PWM Parameters gt LS2_Enable Not Operating Point Parameters gt LS3_Enable gt LS4_Enable Log Data Parameters mgs t Seerrer PFI_Timing_Inj_EPT PFI_Duration_Chan1_EPT PFI_D
222. nnected 4 Networks in public places such as airports or coffee shops Windows Firewall state On Incoming connections Block all connections to programs that are not on the list of allowed programs Active public networks corp natinst com See also Li E Notification state Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new Action Center program Network and Sharing Center If Windows Firewall is on and it is desired to turn it off select Turn Windows Firewall on or off from the left menu and select the radio buttons as shown below 32 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual GO o Windows Firewall Customize Settings 4 Customize settings for each type of network You can modify the firewall settings for each type of network location that you use What are network locations Home or work private network location settings a o Turn on Windows Firewall 7 Block all incoming connections including those in the list of allowed programs Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new program x Turn off Windows Firewall not recommended Public network location settings 6 Turn on Windows Firewall 7 Block all incoming connections including those in the list of allowed programs Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new program x Turn off Windows Firewall not recommended To check the list of Allowed Programs return to the main Windows Firewall window and select Allow a program or feature through Wind
223. ntrol Parameters The input values correspond to the input parameter as specified in DirectMap X_InputSelector The direct mapping output is routed to the Flex Control Parameters selected in DirectMap X_FlexControlParameters The Flex Control Parameters are a list of many controls from the various setup windows of the DI Driver System When a Flex Control Parameter is selected here the value from the DirectMap X_InputSelector will overwrite that parameter The Direct Map function is only active when it is enabled via Enable DirectMap_X button s Direct Mapping Setup DirectMap_9 DirectMap_10 DirectMap_11 DirectMap_1 DirectMap_2 DirectMap_3 DirectMap_4 Enable DirectMap_1 DirectMap_1_InputSelector Hi Hot Selected DirectMap_1_InputValue 0 Enable DirectMap_ X Enable DirectMap 1 Tip Strip Enables DirectMap X DirectMap_13 DirectMap_14 DirectMap_15 DirectMap_16 DirectMap_5 DirectMap_6 DirectMap 7 DirectMap 8 DirectMap_1_ FlexControlParameters Detail When ON the direct mapping is enabled and the selected Flex Control Parameters will be overwritten by the direct mapping input DirectMap_X_InputSelector NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 209 DirectMap_1_InputSelector UserVariable1 9411_1 5 DC a 9411_2 0 State 9411_2 0 Freq Hz 9411_2 0 DC 9411_2 1 State 9411_2 1 Freq Hz 9411_2 1 DC 9411_2 2 State 9411_2 2 F
224. nual ay Error in NI XNET User Interface An unexpected error occurred within the NI ANET user interface When you contact National Instruments technical support please describe what you were doing in the user interface when the error occurred and provide the error code below error code BFF63102 message NI ANET Hex OxBFF63102 File transfer to the LabVIEW Real Time RT target failed because the required files could not be accessed Solution You may have executed a VI that opened the database but did not close If that is the case you should change the VI to call Database Close then reboot the RT controller to continue NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 271 4 24 TDK HV Supply Control Setup Window The purpose of the TDK HV Supply Control Setup window is to remotely configure the TDK High Voltage Power Supply via cabling shown below for providing external high voltage power supply to the DI Driver module s pins 7 and 8 on the DI Driver connector The DB9 to RJ45 cable pin out is shown below according to the TDK power supply manual downloadable from TDK website TDK Rear Panel RS232 Connector In Er af ee C I i c PINNO NAME PINNO J N 2 J RX 7 Ls PAIR RS 3 Se rj al Fig 7 3 RS232 cable with DB9 connector P N GEN 232 9 connector 9082 TDK Lambda HV PS Controlwi Output Enable gt OFF GEN Control Mode OverVoltage Limit GEN Vo
225. o 9411 2 DI5 us ol oooi Off actverion JO Tip Strip Digital input channel data and configuration Units Frequency Hz Duty Cycle Pulse Width msec Filter usec Detail This display area shows the status of each NI 9411 digital input The status parameters shown are State Frequency Duty Cycle and Pulse Width This display area also provides controls for signal inverting and filtering for each input When the Invert button is set to Active High the digital input signal is unaffected When the Invert button is set to Active Low every destination will see the signal as inverted NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 139 4 8 Expansion Digital and VR Hall Input Setup Window The purpose of the Expansion Chassis Digital Input Setup window is to configure the routing of 9411 digital input channels the NI 9760 VR Hall input channels and four internally generated digital PWM signals to various destination functions on the MXI Expansion Chassis The window also shows the status of each NI 9411 and VR Hall inputs s Expansion Chassis Digital and VR Hall Input Setup Exp_Crank_DigChanAsn Exp_EncZ_DigChanAsn Exp_Cami_DigChanAsn Exp_Cam2_DigChanAsn Exp_PFIL 1_DigChanAsn Exp PFI1 2 DigChanAsn Exp PFI1 3 DigChanAsn Exp_PFI1 4_DigChanAsn A A A Exp_PFI2 1_DigChanAsn Exp_PFI2 2_DigChanAsn Exp_PFI2 3_DigChanAsn Exp_PFI2 4_DigChanAsn f Not Assigned Q Not Assigned O Not Assigned Q Not Assigned
226. o the link local address follow the instructions above for Use SCM Backup Target Feature to Discover the IP Address to identify the exact link local IP address 30 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 2 3 4 SCM and Windows Firewall After installing SCM if Windows Firewall is enabled SCM should be added to the list of Allowed Programs to communicate through the Windows Firewall Since SCM must communicate with the DI Driver System via a Ethernet LAN port it is important that Windows Firewall be configured to allow SCM and its associated programs access to the network SCM and its associated programs use UDP TCP IP and FTP protocols Sometimes certain Windows settings prevent SCM from being added to the Allowed Programs list The Allowed Programs list can be checked by following the instructions below The PC used for interfacing with the DI Driver System may have the Windows Firewall turned off In this case the Allowed Programs list is not applicable and does not need to be checked If the Windows Firewall is turned on it may be possible to turn it off if allowed by the network administrator Some PCs may use a different software firewall other than Windows Firewall and will need to be configured properly to allow SCM to communicate with the DI Driver System IP address via UDP TCP IP and FTP protocols Checking the Windows Firewall Allowed Programs List The Windows Firewall configuration can be opened by going to the Wind
227. ocess will take about 3 minutes 9 When the restoration process is completed press the Back button to close the Restore Target dialog to return to the Real Time System Backup dialog 10 Press the Exit button to close the Real Time System Backup dialog 11 After the image restoration process the DI Driver System will be rebooted automatically Wait for the USER1 and USER FPGAT LEDs to start blinking indicating the DI Driver System application is running 12 If calibration files were backed up in step 1 use an FTP client to restore any cdl calibration files The cdl calibration files on the system controller should be located at C ni rt LabVIEW Data After restoring the calibration file reset the controller or cycle the power 42 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 3 Hardware NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 43 3 3 1 C Series Module Slot Assignments NI EDIDS 2403 EDIDS 2406 NI EDIDS 2409 and NI EDIDS 2012 3 6 9 and 12 Channel Direct Injector Driver Systems The NI EDIDS 2403 NI EDIDS 2406 NI EDIDS 2409 and NI EDIDS 2412 DI Driver Systems include a 8 slot CRIO 9082 integrated controller The slot assignments for the NI EDIDS 2403 NI EDIDS 2406 NI EDIDS 2409 and NI EDIDS 2412 DI Driver Systems are shown in figure 3 3 1 a It is possible to upgrade any system to a NI EDIDS 2412 DI Driver System by adding a NI 9411 and NI 9751 DI Driver module s System 1 0 may be expanded
228. odule is able to operate at one time Therefore angle based firing windows are used to define a period during which an injection event can take place for a given PFI channel A firing window is created around each PFI channel specified by a firing window start and end parameter for the PFI Driver module The firing window must not be greater than a span of 180 degrees such that the firing windows around each of the four channels overlap If the windows around each of the four PFI channels overlap then the Firing Window Overlap Detected Indicator will be set TRUE and one or more of the four injector channels may not operate PFI Firing_Window Start Defines the start of the window in Degrees Before Top Dead Center DBTDC The TDC reference for the window is the DCX value associated with the applicable PFI channel PFI_Firing Window_End Defines the end of the window in Degrees Before Top Dead Center DBTDC The TDC reference for the window is the DCX value associated with the applicable PFI channel NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 191 4 11 3 Cam Phase Capture Tab The purpose of the Cam Phase Capture Tab is to configure the cam capture function and monitor the captured rising edges of each cam signal This function is designed for Variable Valve Actuation VVA control The PFI Driver module lowside driver channels can be used to implement PID control of VVA oil control valves The auxiliary PID functions can be used
229. of 400 to 500 millivolts for a period of 1 second FOULED SENSOR When a narrow band sensor is fouled or aged the sensor value will transition from rich to lean and from lean to rich much slower than that of a normally operating sensor This enumeration is reported when the sensor value takes longer than 1 second to transition from below 300 millivolts to above 600 millivolts or vice versa RICH The sensor is sourcing a voltage of greater than 600 millivolts LEAN The sensor is sourcing a voltage of less than 300 millivolts NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 135 4 7 Digital Input Setup Window The purpose of the Digital Input Setup window is to configure the routing of NI 9411 digital input channels and four internally generated digital PWM signals to various destination functions of the DI Driver System The window also shows the status of each NI 9411 digital input s Digital Input Setup Crank_DigChanAsn S Not Assigned DI1_Chani_DigChanAsn Not Assigned DI2_Chani_DigChanAsn 5 Mot Assigned DI3_ Chani_DigChanAsn 1 Not Assigned DI4_Chani_DigChanAsn Encoder _DigChanAsn Not Assigned DI1_Chan2_DigChanAsn a Not Assigned DI2_Chan2_DigChanAsn A Not Assigned DI3_Chan2_DigChanAsn Not Assigned DI4_Chan2_DigChanAsn Cami_DigChanAsn Cam2_DigChanAsn Mot Assigned Not Assigned DIi_Chan3_DigChanAsn CalSeqStart_DigChanAsn N
230. oint to point network connection is made between the Windows PC and the system controller both Default Gateway and DNS Server addresses may be set to 0 0 0 0 26 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual The Windows PC used to interface with the system must have a similar IP address and Subnet mask as the system controller but the IP address must be different in the last address number If the Windows PC and the system controller are placed in DHCP mode and connected to a network router acting as a DHCP server then both devices will be served IP addresses on the same subnet automatically If the system controller must be served an IP address from a router automatically then select the Obtain an IP address automatically radio button This will cause the other IP address settings to be disabled and the controller s network interface will be placed in DHCP mode NI does not recommend using DHCP mode for the DI Driver System controller because the IP address may change each time the system is powered Each time the IP address changes the Search for SCM Target dialog must be opened within the SCM console to locate the system on the network If the system controller network interface is in DHCP mode and the controller is not connected to a DHCP router the controller will default to a link local IP address of 169 254 X X If this happens a connection with the system can still be established via direct point to point if the Windows PC LAN IP a
231. ompletes a beep sound will be generated and the controller will be rebooted Wait for the USER1 and USER FPGA1 LEDs to start blinking and then use the Search for Target feature of SCM to reconnect to the controller and download the new user interface files from the controller It is important to check the Download Files check box within the Search for Target dialog in order to have the user interface files compatible with the updated system software s Search For Target Select Target NI DIDS 2F1 0126 192 168 1 100 D _Driver_ System W Download Files Search NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 37 3 2 5 Backing Up the DI Driver System Software Image A DI Driver System software backup image can be created by following the instructions below It is recommended this procedure be performed after the system has been calibrated and ready for deployment Note The DI Driver System must be in static IP address mode for the backup to restore correctly For more information on changing your system to static IP mode see Changing The Network Settings Of The DI Driver system 1 Open the SCM console and select Backup Target from the File menu to open the Real Time System Backup dialog 2 Select the Backup Real Time System button to open the Backup Target dialog Select the Browse button to open the Select RT System dialog Bi Backup Target IP Address Target Description Note Reboot c
232. on The voltage trace shown is not recorded within injection commands Therefore the voltage trace will be constant with the last value recorded before the injection command Also the current trace is not recorded outside of the injection command and will be displayed as zero s DI Driver 1 Scope Injector Current Bg Power Supply i OFF DI1_ScopeRefresh 30 150 28 140 26 130 t m o A a5eyoA A E A E E E E A A LE 0 000 0 500 1 000 1 500 2 000 2 500 3 000 3 500 4 000 4 500 5 000 5 500 6 000 6 500 7 000 7 500 Time msec When DIX_ScopeRefresh is pressed the graph will refresh with injector current in Amps during the most recent injection command to the associated DI Driver module If multiple channels within the module are operating it is not possible to identify which channel is being displayed Note that the resolution of the current display is approximately 10 usec sampling interval and is for reference only A box instrument oscilloscope and current probe may be necessary for more detailed information The voltage trace shown is not recorded within injection commands Therefore the voltage trace will be constant with the last value recorded before the injection command Also the current trace is not recorded outside of the injection command and will be displayed as zero Module Temp Module Temp Units C Detail Indicates the internal DI Driver module temperature The shu
233. on f 1 AuxPID1_ManualOutput AuxPID1_Td_ AuxPID1 Td_Action Aux 1D1_PIDMin AuxPIDX_EnablePID NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 219 AuxPID1 EnablePID Tip Strip Enables PID controller function AuxPIDX_ProcessVariableSelect AuxPID1 ProcessVariableSelect Not Selected AIO All Al AIS DIL Battery Voltage V 9411_1 0 State a Tip Strip Select feedback variable for PID control Detail Drop down selection control for selecting the process variable input for the PID controller The available parameters for selection are analog inputs battery voltage digital input parameters cam phase engine speed and user variables FF AuxPIDX_ProcessVariable AuxPID1 ProcessVariable Tip Strip Feedback value to PID controller Units Same as Process Variable Could be V bar RPM etc Detail Displays current value of the parameter selected in AuxPIDX_ProcessVariableSelect L AuxPIDX PIDSetpoint AuxPID1 PIDSetpaint b Tip Strip PID controller setpoint Detail The control setpoint to the Aux PID X function This parameter can be manually entered or overwritten by lookup table outputs or operating points AuxPIDX_Kc 220 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual AuUxPIDI Ke Tip Strip PID proportional gain Detail Proportional gain A value of zero disables proportional integral and derivative contributions to the PID
234. on hardware Achieving Sync In order for position tracking sync to start a few conditions must be met First some pattern specific values must be set correctly to the EPT function such as NumberOfCrank Teeth NumberOfMissing Teeth if N M Stroke and StallSpeed Next the SyncEnable must be turned ON Next the EngineSpeed must exceed the StallSpeed When the stall soeed RPM is exceeded the CrankStalled indicator will be set to Spinning and the EPT function begins counting a complete cycle of crank teeth After a complete engine cycle of crank teeth is received the EPT function begins looking for the first occurrence of a unique feature of the crankshaft and camshaft pattern which identifies an absolute position For example if an N M pattern is being used the function searches for the occurrence of the M tooth gap This is the moment of achieving sync When sync is achieved the SyncStopped indicator is set to Sync and the angular position of the crankshaft will be tracked As sync is maintained CrankCount will show the latest crankshaft tooth count with respect to absolute 0 position Each EPT function will have different rules for achieving and maintaining sync as well as location for absolute position 0 This information is contained in the EPT Pattern Specific Information section below CrankCount During sync the EPT function provides the latest crank tooth count at the CrankCount indicator referenced to tooth 0 Tooth 0 is
235. onous 1 Timing DBTDC Duration Figure 4 4 2 1 Pulse Train illustration for Auxiliary Digital pulses ESTTL2 X_SyncTiming ESTTL2 1_5ynecTiming ls petma Tip Strip Sync timing for auxiliary pulse generation with respect to a reference TDC Units DBTDC Detail An angle based timing with respect to TDCX that is used as a reference for auxiliary digital pulse see Figure 4 4 2 7 for illustration ESTTL2 X_PulseDelay ESTTL2 1_PulseDelay Blo tmsea Tip Strip Delay of an auxiliary pulse with respect to an engine synchronous position Units msec Detail Specifies a delay in msec of auxiliary digital pulse with respect to ESTTL2 X_SyncTiming see Figure 4 4 2 1 for illustration ESTTL2 X PulseDwell ESTTL2 1 PulseDuration Go 0 msec Tip Strip Auxiliary Pulse duration Units msec 104 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail Specifies the time duration of auxiliary digital pulse see Figure 4 4 2 7 for illustration NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 105 4 5 Throttle Driver Setup Window The purpose of the Throttle Driver Setup window is to configure the operation of the throttle driver module The window consists of a pane containing module parameters and a tabbed pane containing two channel tabs marked Channel 1 and Channel 2 Within a channel tab there is another tabbed pane containing three tabs Channel X Control Tab Used for configuring a throttle channel inc
236. ontroller in safe mode Backup Target 3 This will cause SCM to search the network for a National Instruments RT controller such as the cRIO 9082 Select the line associated with the system Press OK to close the dialog and return to the Backup Target dialog 38 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual M Select RT System Remote RT Systems IP address MAC address Name Model 197 168 1100 O00 80 2F 13 FD 67 WNI DIDS 0172C cRIO 9022 Cancel 4 The selected target IP Address should be listed in the IP Address field and additional target information will be shown in the Target Description field 5 In the lower half of the Backup Target dialog press the Backup Target button to browse the PC to specify the location to save the DI Driver System software image zip file Select OK to close the location selection dialog 7 During the image backup process the PC cursor will indicate busy while hovering over the Backup Target dialog The process will take about 3 minutes 8 When the backup process is completed press the Back button to close the Backup Target dialog to return to the Real Time System Backup dialog 9 Press the Exit button to close the Real Time System Backup dialog NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 39 3 2 6 Restoring A Backup Image To The DI Driver System Controller If the USER1 and USER FPGA1 LEDs are not blinking at all please try pressing and immediately releasing the controll
237. ore the Plus1 tooth is detected In other words evenly spaced teeth are received at the location where a Plus1 tooth is expected This condition causes a loss of sync Re sync is not allowed until the flag is cleared by pressing the SyncFlagClear button c AutoClearFlagWhileCranking NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 183 AutoClearFlagWhileCranking OFF Tip Strip Auto clears EPT errors during EngineStatus CRANKING Detail Sometimes as the engine stops the crankshaft may spin in a way that causes an erroneous loss of sync as the crankshaft comes to a rest and a fault flag will be set This can often be prevented by increasing the StallSpeed value However if an EPT fault flag is set when the engine stops the DI Driver System can optionally automatically clear any EPT fault flags during the next cranking of the engine for starting When this button is ON then EPT error flags will be automatically cleared while EngineStatus indicates CRANKING 23 CamOffsetEnable CamOffsetEnable Disabled Tip Strip Enables the cam signal to be offset by a specified number of crank pulses Detail The DI Driver System provides an optional offset function applied to the cam signal selected by CamSelect The offset function offsets the cam signal by the number of crank teeth specified by CamOffset The starting reference for the offset is the rising edge of the cam signal input to the function The resulting offset cam signal
238. osition Calibration In If the calibration process is not run then Position Calibration Out will continue to reflect the corresponding values of Position Calibration In If the calibration process is run then Position Cal Out parameters will be updated to the values learned from the calibration process The SecondaryAnalogRange array will be set according to the value of PrimaryPsnSwitch_ChX Boolean input PsnCalComplete_ChX NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 117 PsnCalComplete_Ch1 TRUE Tip Strip Indicates successful completion of the position calibration process Detail Indicates whether a successful calibration process was completed This Boolean will NOT be set to TRUE if either of the following Booleans are set to TRUE uLimitPos ChX uLimitNeg_ChX uLimitPos ChX uLimitPos_Ch1 NO FAULT Tip Strip Indicates driver voltage limits are exceeded during positive position calibration Detail Indicates the maximum positive voltage applied to the throttle motor upon finding the maximum position sensor signal uLimitNeg_ChX uLimitNeg_Ch1 NO FAULT Tip Strip Indicates driver voltage limits are exceeded during negative position calibration Detail Indicates the maximum negative voltage applied to the throttle motor upon finding the minimum position sensor signal 19 psnCalDiff Fault ChX PsnCalDitt_Fault_ Chi NO FAULT Tip Strip Indicates the threshold difference between min and max
239. ot Assigned a Not Assigned DI2_Chan3_DigChanAsn A Not Assigned DI3_Chan3_DigChanAsn Not Assigned DI4_Chan3_DigChanAsn Not Assigned A Not Assigned a Not Assigned Channel Name Freg Hz Dc Invert Filter us 9411 1 DI0 9411 1 DI1 9411 1 DI2 9411 1 DI3 9411 1 DI4 9411 1 DI5 9411 2 DI0 9411 2 DI1 9411 2 DI2 9411 2 DI3 9411 2 DI4 9411 2 DI5 State PW ms O LL LL 5 s A L MIT A i T B18 16 5 l E E la la l A a A Ji aE H S There are twenty destination functions which can be assigned a digital input or internal PWM signal source There are up to sixteen digital signal sources The Crank Cam and Encoder destinations are always applicable The number of applicable DI Driver module channel destinations depends on the number of DI Driver modules available in the system and the slots in which they are inserted For example if there are two DI Driver modules inserted in the DI1 and DI2 slots then only destinations DI1_XXX and DI2_ XXX are applicable If there is only one DI Driver module inserted in the DI4 slot then only destinations DI4_ XXX are applicable The number of applicable digital signal sources depends on the NI 9411 digital input modules inserted in the system and the slots in which they are inserted If there are two NI 9411 modules inserted in the assigned slots then
240. ou may use NI software only to reproduce materials that you may reproduce in accordance with the terms of any applicable license or other legal restriction End User License Agreements and Third Party Legal Notices You can find end user license agreements EULAs and third party legal notices in the following locations Notices are located in the lt National Instruments gt _Legal Information and lt National Instruments gt directories EULAs are located in the lt National Instruments gt Shared MDF Legal icense directory Review lt National Instruments gt _Legal Information txt for information on including legal information in installers built with NI products NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 311 8 3 Trademarks Refer to the NI Trademarks and Logo Guidelines at ni com trademarks for more information on National Instruments trademarks ARM Keil and pVision are trademarks or registered of ARM Ltd or its subsidiaries LEGO the LEGO logo WEDO and MINDSTORMS are trademarks of the LEGO Group 2013 The LEGO Group TETRIX by Pitsco is a trademark of Pitsco Inc 2013 FIELDBUS FOUNDATION and FOUNDATION are trademarks of the Fieldbus Foundation EtherCAT is a registered trademark of and licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH CANopen is a registered Community Trademark of CAN in Automation e V DeviceNet and EtherNet IP are trademarks of ODVA Go SensorDAQ and Vernier are registered trad
241. ows Firewall from the left menu NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 33 G E All Control Panel tems Windows Firewall Allowed Programs 4 Allow programs to communicate through Windows Firewall To add change or remove allowed programs and ports click Change settings What are the risks of allowing a program to communicate He Change settings Allowed programs and features Name Home Work Private Public O Remote Desktop RemoteFX LJ Remote Event Log Management O Remote Scheduled Tasks Management O Remote Service Management O Remote Volume Management OOOOOd OOOOOd LJ Routing and Remote Access SCM Console O Secure Socket Tunneling Protocol LI SNMP Trap O Windows Collaboration Computer Name Registration Service K K O Windows Communication Foundation OOOOO OOOOOd O Windows Firewall Remote Management ee Allow another program Scroll through the list of programs and look for the following programs SCM Console NI Backup and Restore NI SCM Calibration Difference NI SCM Calibration File Manager NI SCM Fault Display Confirm that both Home Work Private and Public check boxes are checked Select OK and close the Windows Firewall window If the above programs are not in the list select Allow another program to open the Add a Program dialog to add each of the programs After adding the programs confirm that both Home Work Private and Public check boxe
242. ows Start menu and entering Windows Firewall in the search field Programs 1 i Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Control Panel 3 i Windows Firewall iy Allow a program through Windows Firewall P Check security status 3 4 See more results Windows Firewall Shutdown F CRE Select Windows Firewall from the Start Menu search results to open the configuration window The screen shot below is a general representation of what may be seen if the Windows Firewall is on NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 31 Control Panel Hon i i hole Help protect your computer with Windows Firewall Allow a Bat By feature Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gaining access to your computer through Windows Firewall through the Internet or a network a Change notification settings How does a firewall help protect my computer Turn Windows Firewall on or What are network locations off WS Restore default m Home or work private networks Not Connected A Advanced settings Networks at home or work where you know and trust the people and devices on the network Troubleshoot my network Windows Firewall state On Incoming connections Bleck all connections te programs that are not on the list of allowed programs Active home or work private networks None Notification state Notify me when Windows Firewall blocks a new program Public networks Co
243. pes When tracking encoder patterns assign the high resolution encoder A signal to the crank signal EncoderZ_DigChanAsn Encoder DigChanAsn re Not Assigned NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 137 Tip Strip Assigns digital signal source to encoder Z signal Detail Signal directed to the EPT cam trigger input through an optional masking AND gate with either Cam1 or Cam2 The EPT is configured via the Engine Position Tracking Setup window This signal is applicable for encoder patterns only When the encoder is mounted to the crankshaft of a four stroke engine then a cam signal must be provided to mask every other encoder Z pulse FALSE Mask TRUE Pass When the encoder is mounted to the crankshaft of a two stroke engine or the camshaft of a four stroke engine then masking may be disabled via the Engine Position Tracking Setup window EncZMask control so that every encoder Z pulse passes through to the EPT cam input CamX_DigChanAsn Cami_DigChanAsn Cam 2_DigChanAsn Not Assigned Tip Strip Assigns digital signal source to cam signal Detail There are two available Cam signal destinations named Cam1 and Cam2 Both have similar function For EPT encoder patterns one of the Cam signals can be selected via the Engine Position Tracking Setup window as the mask for the encoder Z pulse For EPT N M or N 1 patterns one of the cam signals can be selected as the direct EPT cam trigger input for fo
244. ptional NI 9155 MXle Expansion Chassis e NI 9411 6 Channel 500 ns 5 to 24 V Differential Digital Input Module P N 779005 01 e NI 9754 8 Channel TTL Output Module for Engine Synchronous Digital Output P N 782077 01 e NI 9757 2 Channel Bosch LSU 4 2 or 4 9 wideband sensor controller module P N 782079 01 e NI 9758 PFI Driver Module P N 782080 01 e NI 9759 Electronic Throttle Driver Module P N 782081 01 2 Piezo Injector Inductors P N 782082 01 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 11 Piezo Injector Inductor Packs Included In Each DI Driver System DI Driver System Number of Inductors EDIDS 2403 2 1 pack D EDIDS 2406 4 2 packs a EDIDS 2409 6 3 packs EDIDS 2412 8 4 packs Table 3 1 b Number of Inductors Included With The DI Driver System 3 Reverse Battery Protection Relay P N 782784 01 4 NI 9411 Module Breakout Harness es per NI 9411 Module P N 782784 01 NI 9411 Breakout Harnesses Included In Each DI Driver System DI Driver System Number of Harnesses EDIDS 2412 Table 3 1 c Number of Harnesses Included With The DI Driver System 12 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 2 Software NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 13 3 2 1 SCM Software Installation Software Download At the time of shipping the DI Driver System controller is pre programmed with the latest version of software However in order to interact with
245. quency Period Tip Strip Format of PWM signal command 50 AuxPWM1 Frequency AuxPWM3 Frequency 100 Hz AuxPWM3 DutyCycle ES AuxPWM4 Frequency AuxPWM4 DutyCycle AuxPWM2 Period fo te AuxPWM2 PulseWidth 5 ms Detail Selects the specification mode for the time between rising edges of the PWM signal The options are Frequency or Period The fields for Frequency or Period will be enabled according to the selection AuxPWMX ControlMode AuxPWM1 ControlMode Duty Cycle Pulse Width Tip Strip Format of PWM signal command NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 239 Detail Selects the specification mode for the time between rising and falling edges of the PWM signal The options are Duty Cycle or Pulse Width The fields for Duty Cycle or Pulse Width will be enabled according to the selection AuxPWMX Frequency AuxPWM1 Frequency 100 Hz Tip Strip Frequency of PWM signal Units Hz Detail When AuxPWMX TimingMode is set to Frequency this field is enabled for specifying the time between rising edges of the PWM signal AuxPWMX DutyCycle AuxPVW M1 DutyCycle l 20 2 Tip Strip Duty cycle of PWM signal Units Detail When AuxPWMX ControlMode is set to Duty Cycle this field is enabled for specifying the time between rising and falling edges of the PWM signal AuxPWMX Period AuxPVWVM1 Period l 10 ms
246. r Manual NI 9754 ESTTL User Manual NI 9757 02 User Manual NI 9758 PFI Driver User Manual NI 9759 Throttle Driver User Manual NI 9760 VR Hall User Manual PS 17 Power Supply User Manual QS10 121 Power Supply User Manual 58 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 3 5 Optional Enclosure System National Instruments offers an option enclosure system for the Expandable DI Driver System which is a 19 inch rack of 7 rack units height The NI Powertrain Controls Group will integrate a customer s EDIDS bundle into the enclosure system The enclosure system includes the following 1 Programmable power supplies for all power electronics a Optional single programmable power supply for all power electronics 30V 50A b Optional dual half rack programmable power supplies 30V 25A and 150V 5A or 300V 2 5A 2 12V 15A power supply for controller power and O2 sensor power 3 5V 1A power supply for sensor power 4 Fusing 5 A C power entry and power strip 6 Local ESTOP and remote ESTOP control 7 Engineered internal power distribution 8 CRIO 9082 auxiliary communications breakout for Ethernet USB and RS232 9 Circular Plastic Connectors on front panels with all modules slots pre wired Contact the NI Powertrain Controls Group or your local sales representative for purchasing information PERMET C Direct Injector Driver System em oo SS RS 232 AF4
247. r Manual National Instruments 89 PFI LSX DutyCycle PFI LS1 DutyCycle 50 96 Tip Strip Duty cycle of lowside PWM command Units Detail Specifies the duty cycle of PWM operation for the associated PFI LS channel 10 PFI LSX Period PFI L51 Period 10 ms Tip Strip Period of lowside PWM command Units msec Detail Specifies the period of PWM operation for the associated PFI LS channel 11 PFI LSX PulseWidth PFI LS1 PulseWidth 5 ms Tip Strip Pulse width of lowside PWM command Units msec Detail Specifies the pulsewidth of PWM operation for the associated PFI LS channel 90 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 3 ESTTL Spark Setup The purpose of the ESTTL Spark Setup window is to configure the operation of the first Engine Synchronous TTL ESTTL1 Output module The TTL outputs of this module in the third slot of the MXle Expansion Chassis are intended to be used for commands to smart ignition coils The ESTTL Spark Setup window contains a tabbed pane with nine tabs ESTTL 1 TDC Channel Mapping Tab Used for assigning Top Dead Center TDC values to each ignition coil commands Ch1 8 Tabs Used for configuring spark command pulse sequences that are associated with each of the eight ESTTL 1 output channels Each of the ESTTL 1 output channels are non multiplexed and therefore can be independently controlled The ESTTL module is an optional module for the NI 9155 MXle Expansio
248. r Manual Tip Strip Starts the EPT scope Detail When pressed the EPT diagnostic function will begin to acquire EPT signals While the acquisition is running this control can be pressed again to abort the acquisition Data Buffer Full Data Buffer Full Tip Strip Indicates data stream is too fast and some samples may have been lost Detail Indicates that the sampling rate is too fast for all samples to be recorded This can happen if the engine speed and sampling rate specified in the Scope Mode Options are too high i EPT Sync w EPI Sync Clr Flag Tip Strip Indicates if the system is currently in sync Clr Flag Clears EPT errors Detail When TRUE indicates that the EPT function is in sync When FALSE indicates that the EPT function is not in sync Scope Mode Options EPT Scope Mode Fixed Sample Samples Per Rev Number of Samples 36000 al 144000 Tip Strip Defines amount and type of information to be displayed in scope trace Detail When set to Fixed Sample the data acquisition will upon the press of Run EPT Scope and stop after the specified number of points is collected The data will be displayed in the EPT Scope after pressing the Update control When set to Stop On Sync Stopped the data acquisition will begin filling the buffer upon the press of Run EPT Scope and continue acquiring data and purging the buffer until there is a loss of sync Then the data acquisition will stop and the data will be d
249. rayed out and the IMV will be controlled by a constant duty cycle and frequency Clear RailP Fault Clear RailP Fault Tip Strip Clears faults related to rail pressure control Detail Clears RailP_ Fault after the fault has been resolved RPC Plot RPC Plot Tip Strip Opens a plot window of RailP_ Setpoint RailP IMV_DC and HPV_DC ail Pressure 228 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 11 IMV_Enable IMV_Enable OFF Tip Strip Enables PWM control of IMV Detail Enables the final PWM parameters to the lowside channels configured for IMV via the PFI and LS Driver 1 Setup window IMV_LSChanAsn IMV_LSChanAsn J Tip Strip Indicates the PFI Driver lowside channels assigned to drive the IMV The channel assignment is configured via the PFI and LS Driver 1 Setup window 13 IMV_Freq IMV_Freg 175 Hz Tip Strip Operating Frequency of IMV PWM command Units Hz Detail Frequency of the PWM signal to the IMV solenoid IMV_Kc IMV_Kc 0 9 bar Tip Strip IMV PID proportional gain Units bar Detail Proportional gain A value of zero disables proportional integral and derivative contributions to the PID output See the equation in Auxiliary PID Controller Setup for reference Smaller values cause less proportional contribution to the PID output Larger values cause more proportional contribution to the PID output Negative values will gen
250. re setup section s DI Driver 1 Setup ON DI1_ModulePresent DIH_HVTarget 75 lv DI1_Phase1FirstPeakEnable DI1_PSChargeFault o DI1_PiezoEnable Low DI1_ModuleEnable on DI1_BackBoostTime 0 15 msec orf DI1 Piezolnvert Le Es o a grag DI1_ShortCircuitFault mA rai amp DI1_ModuleTempFault Eon JOT1_Injecton nable Phase ll ail dd d sd sg d vis torvoroneonver an olagevrivetra IPhaseCurrentUpper Amps 20 15 10 0 Fh i on DI1_ChaniEnable PhaseOurrentiower ampsifiio is D om es cu on DI1_FI10penCircuit au D11_Chan2Enabie EL LL LL LE 011 000 on DI1_Chan3Enable DI1_OneShot DI1 Scope DI1_FI30penCircuit e DI1_HighVoltageLimitFault OFF Dit SS Chan 1 Module Temp Fe hoa s oO Teveebecectoceeboenes amp DI1_LowVoltageDriverFault DI1_ClearFaults _J orr DI1_OpenCrrcuitOverride 75 Iv 0 8 M 0 0 f SZ Overload Integrator Internal Hi DIX_ModulePresent on DI1_ ModulePresent Tip Strip Indicates DI Driver module present and externally powered Detail Indicates the presence and recognition of the associated DI Driver module The module will only be recognized when DIX ModuleEnable is ON a DI Driver module is inserted in the assigned slot and the module is properly externally powered DIX_ModuleEnable on DI1_ModuleEnable Tip Strip Enables DI Driver module operation Detai
251. recommends using crimped ferrules on all wires entering screw terminal connections DI Driver System Component Diagrams and Connector Pinouts NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 47 3 3 3 Connecting Injectors Sensors and Actuators 48 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 3 3 3 1 Direct Injectors to DI Driver Channels Connecting Direct Injectors to the Direct Injector DI Driver Module Direct injectors have two pins or wire leads For solenoid injectors the polarity of the injector leads typically does not matter However the polarity does matter for piezo injectors Each DI Driver module has three channels and provides a positive and negative terminal for each channel labeled INJX and INJX where X represents the channel number Solenoid and piezo injectors cannot be mixed within a DI Driver module The DI Driver module supports three channels for solenoid injectors and two channels for piezo injectors When the module is configured for piezo mode channels 1 and 2 are available as driver channels while channel 3 is unavailable and must be wired with a shorting jumper across the positive and negative terminals Solenoid Injector Wiring Typical wiring for solenoid injectors to a DI Driver module is shown in figure 3 3 3 1 a Battery or Power Supply 12 24V Typical 75W Recommended wire 16AWG 200V or higher BATT Automotive 20A Fuse S pa INL res N I l J Lo
252. req Hz 9411_2 2 DC 9411_2 3 State 9411_2 3 Freq Hz 9411_2 3 DC 9411_2 4 State 9411_2 4 Freq Hz 9411_2 4 DC 9411_2 5 State 9411_2 5 Freq Hz 9411_2 5 DC Cami Phase DBTDC Cam2 Phase DBTDC Engine Speed RPM UserVariable2 UserVariable3 UserVariable4 UserVariables UserVariable6 UserVariable7 UserVariable8 3 Tip Strip Assigns signal source to the Flex Control Parameter array Detail Drop down selection control for selecting the input parameter for direct mapping The available parameters for selection are analog inputs battery voltage digital input parameters cam phase engine speed and user variables DirectMap_X_InputValue DirectMap 1 InputValue 0 Tip Strip Shows the value of the selected direct mapping input DirectMap_X_FlexControlParameters 210 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual DirectMap_1_FlexControlParameters DI1_IPhaseDuration_Element6 gt DI1_IPhaseDuration_Element7 DI1_IPhaseDuration_Element8 DIi_Enable_Inj1_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj2_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj3_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj4_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj5_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj6_EPT DI1_Timing_Inji_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj2_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj3_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj4_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj5_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj6_EPT DH _Duration_Inji_Uniform_EPT DIi_Duration_Inj1_Chan1_EPT y DI1_Duration_Inji_Chan2_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj1_Chan3_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj2_Uniform_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj2_Chan1_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj2_Chan2_EPT DI1_Duration_I
253. ring_Window_End 359 pBTDC lt 359 mea ESTTL2 2 Fring Window _Start ESTTL2 2 Fring Window_End is 359 DBTDC aes DBTDC ESTTL2 3 _Firing_ Window Start a Feng Window End afs DBTDC GES DBTDC esr Fe Window _ Start ESTTL24 Fring Window_End as pstoc dE DBTDC sus Fring Window Start ESTTL2 5 Firing_ Window End fal 359 359 DE TDC 359 DBTDC ESTTL2 6 Firing Window Start ESTTL2 6 Fring_Window_ End 350 DBTDC 235 pBToc ESTTL2 7 Firing_ Window Start Frino Window_End AG DBTDC JE DBTDC ESTTI2S Firing Window Start ESTTL2 8 Firing_ Window_End SIE 359 1 DBTDC al 359 DBTDC Tip Strip Start of adeh based window around all engine synchronous TTL trigger based events for a channel End of angle based window around all injection events for a channel Units DBTDC Detail Even though the channels within the ESTTL2 module are independent and the output pulses can overlap the pulse sequence needs to be reset each engine cycle The span of this window depends on the stroke of the engine For example for 2 Stroke engines the span is 360 Crank Angles i e 180 degrees around the reference TDC For 4 Stroke engines the span is 720 Crank Angles two crank rotations i e 360 degrees around the reference TDC The window may not overlap from cycle to cycle For example for 4 Stroke engines the ESTTL2 X Firing Window_ Start and ESTTL2 X_Firing_Window
254. riod National Instruments does not warrant that the operation of the software shall be uninterrupted or error free A Return Material Authorization RMA number must be obtained from the factory and clearly marked on the outside of the package before any equipment will be accepted for warranty work National Instruments will pay the shipping costs of returning to the owner parts which are covered by warranty National Instruments believes that the information in this document is accurate The document has been carefully reviewed for technical accuracy In the event that technical or typographical errors exist National Instruments reserves the right to make changes to subsequent editions of this document without prior notice to holders of this edition The reader should consult National Instruments if errors are suspected In no event shall National Instruments be liable for any damages arising out of or related to this document or the information contained in it EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED HEREIN NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE CUSTOMER S RIGHT TO RECOVER DAMAGES CAUSED BY FAULT OR NEGLIGENCE ON THE PART OF NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT THERETOFORE PAID BY THE CUSTOMER NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF DATA PROFITS USE OF PRODUCTS OR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMA
255. rip Current setpoint for this phase Duration for this phase Units Setpoint Amps Duration msec Detail These parameters configure the current and duration of the two phase within each injection command When the duration is reached operation proceeds to the next phase A special duration value of zero means that operation will remain in that phase until the end of the injection command Using the values specified in the above control image the current profile to the injector would be 4A for 1 5 msec followed by 1A for the remainder of the injection command PFIX_ChanEnable PFIi_ChanEnable OF Tip Strip Enables PFI channel Detail Enables individual PFIX Channel of the PFI Driver module PFIX_RecircAlways PFI1 RecircAlways OF Tip Strip Allows current to recirculate always while command is ON and OFF Detail When ON the current to the load is allowed to re circulate or freewheel at all times When OFF the current to the load is allowed to re circulate only during injection commands while current is being controled to the specified level When OFF the current to the load is cutoff sharply at the end of the injection command with the use of a zener diode internal to the module Setpoint Amps PFI4_RecircAlways Duration msec ___ OFF NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 85 See descriptions for PFI 1 86 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 2 3 LS 1 4 Tab
256. rising edge of the crank signal The resulting signal may need to be extended The input to the cam offset function is from the digital input assigned to the Cam1 or Cam2 signal via the Digital Input Setup window The output of the CamOffset function is delivered to the CamExtension function The offset and the extended cam signals may be monitored in the EPT Diagnostics tab 184 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 5 CamExtEnable CamExtEnable pn Tip Strip Enables the cam signal to be extended by a specified number of crank pulses Detail The DI Driver System provides an optional extension function applied to the cam signal selected by CamSelect The extension function extends the cam signal by the number of crank teeth specified by CamExtension The starting reference for the extension is the rising edge of the cam signal input to the function Therefore the resulting extended cam signal will be shorter than the input cam signal if the CamExtension value is shorter than the cam input signal The input to the CamExtension function is from the output of the CamOffset function The output of the cam extension function is delivered to the EncZMask function for encoder patterns and delivered directly to the EPT function for N M and N 1 patterns When Enabled the cam signal is extended When Disabled the cam signal is unaltered The offset and the extended cam signals may be monitored in the EPT Diagnostics tab CamExtension CamE
257. rite all files on the controller This step is only necessary if calibration files have previously been saved and contain important system settings 2 Open the SCM console and select Backup Target from the File menu to open the Real Time System Backup dialog Press the Restore Real Time System button to open the Restore Target dialog M Real Time Backup and R EE Restore Real Time System 3 Press the Browse button to open the Select RT System dialog to allow SCM to find the system on the network 40 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual BI Restore Target IP Address Target Descripton Note Reboot controller in safe mode Restore Target 4 Select the line associated with the system Press OK to close the dialog and return to the Restore Target dialog M Select RT System Remote RT Systems IP address MAC address Name Model 192 168 1100 00 80 2F 13 FD 6 7 MI DIDS O0172C cRIO 9022 5 The selected target IP Address should be listed in the IP Address field and additional target information will be shown in the Target Description field 6 In the lower half of the Restore Target dialog press the Restore Target button to browse the PC for the DI Driver System software image zip file Select the zip file and press OK NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 41 8 During the image restoration process the PC cursor will indicate busy while hovering over the Restore Target dialog The pr
258. river module s Pulse Generation Setup LL MI D Delay msec Uniform Dur msec 05 Duration Ch2 msec THP onset emt Enable Individual 1 nest ca pn wont pn no ii il Duration Ch3 msec 2 ai na os on En Ga oss joss DI Driver 3 Delay msec Uniform Dur msec Duration Ch2 msec i Inj 1 Tg Inj 2 nl Inj 3 on Inj 4 Timing Inj 5 Timing Inj 6 Timing Inj 1Duration Inj 2 Duration Inj 3 Duration Inj 4 Duration Inj 5 Duration Inj 6 Duration 4 gt gt gt nigger Inj1 Pulse Inj2 Pulse Inj3 Pulse Inj4 Pulse Inj5 Pulse Inj6 Pulse Figure 4 10 1 a Pulse Train illustration for TMP TMP OneShot and PID PWM TMP Mode TMP OneShot_DIX_ChnX 150 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Tip Strip Manually triggers TMP injection command sequence Detail Pressing this button will trigger the configured TMP command sequence to the associated DI Driver module channel The sequence will be triggered once with each button press Tip Strip Enables individual channel duration setpoint for each channel Detail When ON this button will enables individual channel durations for each if the three DI Driver module channels When OFF each channel receives a uniform duration command Pulse Pulse 1 Pulse 2 Pulse 3 Tip Strip Enables injection pulse Detail When ON the command to the associa
259. rols which require a single point precision numeric value Some Flex Control Parameters are Boolean controls which require a value of 0 or 1 to represent FALSE or TRUE respectively Other Flex Control Parameters are mode controls from various system setup windows which have drop down text descriptions The text descriptions should not be entered in these table fields Instead the integer representation should be entered starting with O for the first drop down selection 252 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 22 User Variables Sixteen Flex Control Parameters are available as general purpose variable storage They are named UserVariable1 through UserVariable16 The User Variables Window is used to document and manually specify the value of each user variable If a lookup table output value is mapped to one of these user variables then the lookup table output value will overwrite the user variable in this tab User variables can also be selected as inputs to the lookup tables It is important that the user variables not be selected as both input and output parameters s User Variables Setup EIRE Index User Variable Value User Variable Name eis uen 230 S a Variable storage for Lambda set point for 1D table lookup Variable storage setpoint from 1D lookup table en rer HE A a fo ren a i N H po H un LS A So nn us us as ns ll SERRES E RS ER A TT A TT as ns RER CS E RER CE NS A RER
260. rror we system Error 2_ LOFF Manually Set OP Undefined Trigger Behavior Number of OP is Error OP lahest Takes Priority ultip le Tr ig jer Beh av Number of OP Loops jis Ignore System Error Import From File 4 1 air 0 oes z OP Loops Completed Operating Points OP O PERDRE Active Operating Point Operating Point 0 Iss Operating Point Name HVTraget_70 I HVTarget_80 l E HVTarget_90 HVTarget_100 Process Variables Time ee 100000 100000 100000 Flex Control Ih Enable OP Enable OP NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 245 Tip Strip Enable operating point function Detail When ON operating points are active according to the operating point table and the table values will override the parameter values specified elsewhere within the DI Driver System setup windows When OFF the parameter values will remain set to the most recent values used from the operating point table For example HV Target for DI Driver Module 1 may be set to 50V via the DI1 Setup window The Operating Point Setup window may implement a time based table for incrementing HV Target by 10V every 10 seconds from 50V to 100V At the end of the operating point cycle HVTarget will be left at the last operating point of 100V If it is desired that HVTarget be set back to 50V then an additional operating point should be
261. rs Low impedance injectors will have approximately 2 ohms resistance across the solenoid The low resistance allows higher current through the solenoid to enable faster valve opening times However the high current is not needed for the entire duration of the injection event in order to keep the valve open The initial current level is referred to as the peak current phase and the current level for the remaining injection duration is referred to as the hold current phase Typically the peak current phase is 4A and the hold current phase is 1A Driving High Impedance Injectors High impedance injectors will have approximately 12 ohms resistance across the solenoid Typically less than 1 amp is required to open and hold the solenoid valve Only one current control phase is required to operate high impedance injectors at a constant current level Refer to the PFI amp LS Driver Setup Window for detailed information on configuring PFI Driver channels Wiring diagram for up to four port fuel injectors to the PFI channels of the PFI Driver module is shown in diagram 3 3 3 2 a NI recommends using 18 AWG wire or larger for port fuel injectors NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 51 Battery or Power Supply 12V Typical gt SA PFI Module Connector Port Fuel Injectors Figure 3 3 3 2 a Diagram of Typical Wiring of Port Fuel Injectors to a PFI Driver Module 52 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manu
262. s are checked 34 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Add a Program Select the program you want to add or dick Browse to find one that is not listed and then dick OK d Microsoft Security Essentials Microsoft Silverlight NI Distributed System Manager 2014 imal NI SCM Backup and Restore 2014 E NI SCM Calibration Difference 2014 B NI SCM Calibration File Manager 2014 NI SCM Console 2014 E NI SCM Fault Display 2014 NI Update Service VI Package Manager F VI Package Manager Uninstall Path C Program Files x86 National Instruments What are the risks of unblocking a program You can choose which network location types to add this program to Ca NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 35 3 2 4 Updating DI Driver System Controller Software Occasionally NI will generate updates to the DI Driver System controller software and provide a link to the latest update software on the DI Driver System product page The software update is provided in the form of a upd file downloaded in a zip file and is a complete hard drive image replacement for the cRIO controller NI provides an updater utility for download from the DI Driver System product page The utility is called the DI Driver System Updater and is provided in the form of a zip file along with the upd file The zip file contains a exe file which must be executed on the same Windows PC where SCM is installed Note The
263. s User Manual National Instruments 169 However it is also possible to operate with a single trigger wheel mounted to a camshaft of a 4 stroke engine This would require routing the physical camshaft trigger wheel sensor signal into the Crank_DigChanAsn of the DI Driver System Refer to the Digital Input Setup window description for assigning NI 9411 digital inputs to internal signals Digital Signal Filtering It is often necessary to implement filtering of the crank and or cam signals prior to entering the EPT function The DI Driver System software provides an integrating filter function which rejects positive and negative digital signal pulses having a pulse width less than the filter time Refer to the Digital Input Setup window description for further information about filtering the NI 9411 digital inputs EPT Pattern Simulation All EPT functions contain a built in pattern simulation tool specific to the pattern for which the EPT function was configured Pattern simulation is turned on simply by setting EngineSimEnable button of the EPT tab to TRUE and setting the SimulatedSpeed to an appropriate value for the simulated speed When simulation is turned on the Crank and Cam inputs to the EPT function are internally disconnected and replaced by the internally simulated counterparts The simulation feature allows the designer to bench test the DI Driver System functionality at any stage of the development without the need for external simulati
264. s per engine cycle A Crank Angle Tick CAT is a single unit of angular measure by the EPT function MaxCAT is reported as power of two angular ticks of crank position travel having a resolution dependent on binary extrapolation level and the number of physical teeth per crankshaft rotation For example if using the N M EPT VI which has an extrapolation of 7 the number of CAT per crank tooth would be 217 128 and the internally calculated CurrentPosition would be evenly incremented by 128 CAT from one physical tooth to the next If a 60 2 pattern were used and the engine was a 2 stroke the MaxCAT per engine cycle would be 60 128 7680 If the engine was a 4 stroke the MaxCAT per engine cycle would be 2 60 128 15360 CrankCount CrankCount 15 pulses Tip Strip EPT crank pulse count while in sync Units pulses Detail The latest tooth count referenced to crank tooth 0 Tooth 0 is determined according to the pattern that is being tracked and is discussed within the pattern specific EPT documentation Also see the description for GlobalT DC Offset CrankCount is provided in terms of a complete engine cycle and is reported as if there were no missing or extra teeth in the pattern For example if PATTERN N M NumberOfCrankTeeth 60 and Stroke 4 STROKE then CrankCount will range from 0 to 119 k CrankStalled NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 181 CrankStalled Tip Strip Indicates engine
265. s will be highlighted red and when there are duplicate Tx CAN signals the CAN _ Run button will be disabled Write to CAN Bus Signal List NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 261 Process Variable ie CAN Write Signal Engine Speed RPM gt EngineSpeed 0 000000 D130 0130 Detail A list of mapped CalPoints to CAN Signal a XNET Error XNET Error Detail Reports any XNET error and the associated code and description 262 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 23 1 NI XNET Database Editor The downloaded XNET driver comes with the NI XNET Database Editor The purpose of the NI XNET Database Editor is to create and maintain embedded network databases The Database Editor is a generic embedded network tool and hence it supports CAN LIN and FlexRay communication protocols Since the DI Driver System only supports CAN interface only CAN communication will be discussed in this document The database editor comes with a built in user manual so this document will only touch on relevant features typically used in conjunction with the DI Driver system application y 39 NI XNET Database Editor File Edit Options Help lt oc a ey Rs e 3 NI XNET Tools and Utilities Help w fr Hide Locate Back Options Contents index Search Favorites 2 NI XNET Tools ard Utilities Help 92 Related Documertation D Messurement amp Automation Exple 7 Bus Monitor D Da
266. ses and to deploy and undeploy databases to your DI Driver System controller 2 Manage NI XNET Databases icii i NIET ANET Databases on My Computer Alias Filepath NIXNET_exampleL DF C Users Public Documents National Instruments NI XNET Examples NIXNET_exampleLDF NT 9755 NOx XNET CAN Datab DA Driven Products NO Software VAN Ox Aneti NMI 9755 MOx ANET CAN Database xml D130 C Users RY apaulo Desktop D130 xml NI 9755 NOx ANET CAN Databe C Users R apaulo Desktop NI 9755 NOx XNET CAN Database xml NIXNET_example C Users Public Documents National Instruments NI XNET Examples NIXNET_exarmple xml Analog C Users RY apaulo Desktop Analog xml 4 ll Deploy IP Address of RT Target 197 168 100 Connect ANET Databases on RT Target Alias Undeploy NIXNET_exarmpleLDF NI9755 NOx XNET CAN Database NI9755 NOx ANET CAN Database 2 NIXNET_example 1 Add Alias PRE Detail Click to browse to a database file on the Windows PC and assign an alias name that will be associated to that database Remove Alias Detail Remove Alias on the list of recognized database on the Windows PC You must select a database to remove You can select multiple entries by holding the lt Shift gt lt left click gt key for a range of entries or holding the lt Ctrl gt lt left click gt for multiple single entries NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 269 ANET Databases on My Computer Alias Filepath C Users P
267. sition will upon the press of Run EPT Scope and stop after the specified number of points is collected The data will be displayed in the EPT Scope after pressing the Update control When set to Stop On Sync Stopped the data acquisition will begin filling the buffer upon the press of Run EPT Scope and continue acquiring data and purging the buffer until there is a loss of sync Then the data acquisition will stop and the data will be displayed in the EPT Scope after pressing the Update control 200 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 13 Calibration Mode Setup Window The purpose of the Calibration Mode Setup window is to configure a series of uniform injection command pulses to the enabled channel of each DI Driver module Only one channel of each DI Driver may be enabled at a time otherwise no commands will be delivered to a module with multiple channels enabled This window is only applicable when one or more DI Driver Driver modules are configured for Calibration mode s Calibration Mode Setup CalSeq Start CalSeq Running RemoteStartEnable Remote Start CalSeq Pause CalSeg Reset CalSeqgStart_DigChanAsn Pause Reset E Not Assigned CalSeg Duration CalSeq Period con CalSeq Pulses CalSeq Start CalSeq Start Tip Strip Starts the specified pulse sequence Detail When pressed starts delivering the number of injection command pulses specified by CalSeq Pulses according to the specified CalSeq Perio
268. speed is below StallSpeed Detail Indicates STALLED when the engine speed is below StallSpeed Indicates SPINNING when the engine speed is above StallSpeed 15 SyncStopped SyncStopped Tip Strip Indicates EPT is not in sync with engine Detail Indicates STOPPED while position tracking is not taking place In other words there is no synchronization acquired with the crank and cam signals Indicates SYNC while position tracking is taking place StallSpeed StalSpeed 25 RPM Tip Strip Engine speed at which EPT will lose sync and indicate CrankStalled Units RPM Detail A crankshaft speed less than StallSpeed causes the engine speed to indicate zero CrankStalled to indicate STALLED and EngineStatus to indicate STALLLED 1 CrankRunThreshold CrankRunThreshold 350 RPM Tip Strip Engine speed which determines EngineStatus RUNNING Units RPM Detail The engine speed threshold used to differentiate the EngineStatus between CRANKING and RUNNING MissedCrankFlag __ NoFAULT MissedCrankFlag Tip Strip Indicates that not enough crank pulses were received for complete engine cycle 182 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Detail Set to FAULT upon the detection of a pattern specific crank feature while the CrankCount value has not yet reached the expected value Encoder Patterns Indicates FAULT when an EncZ rising edge occurs before the expected number of Crank teeth have been counted N M
269. ssing teeth while CamSig is TRUE Tooth 0 would correspond to the tooth following missing tooth 119 It is allowed for CamSig to have more than one pulse per cycle as long as the signal is high and low during the correct crank tooth gap for the correct phase of the engine In some applications CamSig may only be a single short pulse which is not high during either crank tooth gaps In this case the CamOffset and CamExtension parameters may be used to move the cam signal forward by a specified number of crank teeth and extend the CamSig for a specified number of crank teeth in order to cover one of the gaps The Cam Offset function results in the cam signal width being equal to one crank tooth period therefore the extension function is required to extend it over the appropriate gap N 1 Patterns Pattern Description N 1 patterns have N evenly spaced teeth and a single additional tooth Plus1 placed between two evenly spaced teeth on the crankshaft trigger wheel There are two different sub configurations within this pattern type specified by the Plus1Location button An advanced Plus1 tooth must be positioned such that it is advanced from the midpoint between two evenly spaced teeth The amount of advance must be at least 4 of the normal tooth spacing retarded Plus1 tooth must be positioned such that it is retarded from the midpoint between two evenly spaced teeth The amount of retard must be at least of the normal tooth spacing N is stat
270. starting with c indicates that the log file will be saved to the cRIO controller local hard drive Data files can optionally be stored to a USB storage device if connected via the USB port on the cRIO controller front panel Typically a USB storage device will be shown in the controller file browser as u NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 279 a s FTP Browser Drive lt c gt Current Path LabVIEW Data D DIDS ini D Faults fdl D SADLini Global Controls Hosts D DIDS_Master par D DIDS_Host vi D NIDIDriverSystemUserGuide chm D DI Driver_System hsf c ni rt LabVIEW Data Cancel New Dir Figure 4 28 a FTP Browser Screenshot File Mode Tip Strip Select to append new data to existing file data Detail When set to Append causes the Log Data function to append data to an existing file specified in the File Path When set to Overwrite causes the Log Data function to create a new file for the data overwriting any existing file Append Suffix Append suff Don t Append Tip Strip Select to append suffix to file name Detail Determines whether the numerical suffix specified in File Name Suffix is appended to the filename File Name Suffix File Name Suffix Efo Tip Strip Suffix to append to file name Detail Specifies the numerical suffix to append to the filename if Append Suffix is set to Append Delimeter 280
271. tabase Edtor e Overview 2 Main Wirdow 2 Main Menu 2 Keyboarc Navigation 2 Selecting Multiple Objects J Right Pane Dialogs 9 Getting Started Dialog Gj 2 FlexRay Quster Dialoc 2 LIN Cluster Dialog 3 PDU Dialog 2 CAN Frame Dialog 2 FlexRay Frame Dialog 7 LIN Frame Dialog 2 Signal Dialog 7 LIN Schedule Dialog 2 CAN ECU Dialog 2 FlexRay ECU Dialog 7 LIN ECU Dialog 2 Tranemtted Received Fi 2 Frame List Dialog 2 Full FlexRay Guster Dialog Important hfomaton 2 Technical Support and Professio p Open an existing database Open an existing database Create a new cluster Getting Started i 5 Perform one of the following tasks SE Open an existing database Open Create Cluster CAN Cluster Dialog You can edit CAN cluster properties in the CAN cluster dialog as shown below M9 Test Database NI XNET Database Editor File Edit Options Help a Networks 39 22 N Cluster Properties 5 ls CAN Framel perl sb H ii CAN Frame 23 FlexRay Cluster ies Flex_Framel Flex_Frame2 H M lt ECUS gt Name CAN _Cluster Baud Rate 590 kBaud Comment Add your comment here Detail Click to open an existing database NI XNET uses the ASAM FIBEX database storage format FIBEX Fleld Bus EXchange is a vendor independent exchange format for embedded network data It is an XML based text format The Database Editor can read and wri
272. tail EPT function selection for pattern type and extrapolation level Some pattern type selections only support one level of extrapolation due to the typical number of crank teeth for that pattern type Refer to tables 4 11 a and 4 11 b in the Engine Position Tracking Setup window section for pattern support details EPT ENC 2 Supports encoder pattern types and extrapolates to 2 2 4 Crank Angle Ticks CAT between each crank tooth EPT ENC 4 Supports encoder pattern types and extrapolates to 2 4 16 CAT between each crank tooth EPT N M 7 Supports N M pattern types and extrapolates to 2 7 128 CAT between each crank tooth M can be one or two missing adjacent teeth EPT N 1 9 Supports N 1 pattern types and extrapolates to 2 9 512 CAT between each crank tooth 178 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual SyncEnable Tip Strip Enables EPT to sync Detail When ON sync is enabled and position tracking will take place if valid crank and cam signal patterns are presented to the EPT function at an engine speed greater than the stall speed SyncFlagClear OFF SyncFlagClear Tip Strip Clears EPT errors Detail When ON any of the following errors will be cleared MissedCrankFlag MissedGapFlag MissedCamFlag and MissedPlus1Flag This button will reset itself after being pressed Stroke Tip Strip Piston strokes per engine cycle Detail When 2 STROKE the EPT is tracking teeth from 0 to NumberOfCrankTeeth When 4 STROKE
273. tal command s General Purpose ESTTL Setup ESTIL 2 TDC Channel Mapping GlobalTDCOffset bo CAD TRt1 l o CAD 240 TDC3 480 can wel Slop TDCS 300 caD GlobalTDCOffset fo joo ESTTL2 1_ TDC my Tc ESTTL2 2 TDC no ESTIL2 5_TDC ESTTL 2 Pulse Generation Setup ESTTL2 1_Firing_Window_Start GE DBTDC ESTTL2 2_Firing_Window_Start B a59 DBTDC ESTTL2 3_Firing_Window_Start F 4 359 DBTDC ESTTL2 4_ Firing_Window_Start fps DBTDC ESTTL2 5_Firing_Window_Start EB a59 DBTDC ESTTL2 6_Firing_Window_Start B 359 DBTDC ESTTL2 7 Hiring_Window_ Start fe 359 DETDC ESTTL2 8 Firing_Window_Start a 359 DBTDC Tip Strip Global TDC offset between absolute 0 and TDC1 Units CAD ESTTL2 1_Firing_Window_End Ass mmc ESTTL2 2_Firing_Window_End F Hj DBTDC ESTTL2 3_Firing_Window_End B 59 DBTDC ESTTL2 4_Firing_Window_End Ass mmc ESTTL2 5_Firing_Window_End B F5 DB TDC ESTTL2 6_Firing_Window_End B 359 DBTDC ESTTL2 7 Firing_Window_End Ass mmc ESTTL2 8_ Firing Window_End B F5 DBTOC Detail Crank angle degrees between the EPT absolute zero position and TDC1 When TDC1 is before EPT absolute zero position then GlobalTDCOffset is negative When TDC1 is after EPT absolute zero position then GlobalT DC Offset is positive The absolute
274. tant to utilize the LS channel locking feature which locks LS1 with LS2 and locks LS3 with LS4 The locked channel pairs can be used to operate the IMV and HPV with up to 3A continuous current The example wiring diagram figure 4 10 a illustrates wiring an IMV to a locked LS1 and LS2 pair and wiring a HPV to a locked LS3 and LS4 pair The LS channel locking feature can be implemented via the PFI and LS Driver 1 Setup window s Rail Pressure Control Setup PFI_ModulePresent RailP_Setpoint Elo bar RailP_Channel los bar RailP_Max_Thresh gt ber RailP_ControlMode RailP_Fault _ No Fault BattV 23 538 V RPC Plot fe IMV PID MODE Clear RailP Fault IMV_Enable IMV_LSChanAsn iu voa IMV_Freq 175 Hz IMV_PIDMax HPV_Enable HPV_LSChanAsn HPV_Freq j 2 1000 Hz Do 2 IMV_PIDMin 20 IMV_Ti_Action IMV_Td_Action min min rt Stal f IMV_ManualOverride HPV_PIDFFf 120 IMV PID OFF A j MIMEL f IMV_NonPIDFF F 0 1MV_ManualDC Bo Jr HPV_NonPIDFF F Jfa 96 HPV_MaxDCCalc lo HPV_MaxDc o IMV_MaxDCCalc 0 IMV_DC 0 IMV_MaxDC 0 IMV_NomResistance 2 5 IMV_MinDC lo 9 IMV_Current 0 HPV_MinDC o bar EE HPV_Ti_Action paas HPV_Td_Action
275. tdown fault threshold is 80 C If the internal module temperature reaches 80 C a DIX_ModuleTempFault will be indicated and the internal boost power supply and injector drive channels will be disabled until the fault is cleared Battery Voltage NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 73 Battery Voltage Tip Strip DI Driver battery voltage level Units V Detail Indicates the external battery voltage supply level to DI Driver module terminals 0 BATT and 9 GND This should be in the range of 9 32V While the internal boost supply will function from the 9 32V battery voltage it will operate more efficiently and cooler if the battery voltage is in the range of 24V as opposed to 12V The performance and power dissipation of the module and internal boost power supply are dependent on the injector load and rate of injection events 22 Internal High Voltage 3200 S 150 Snooi 50 0 SS Tip Strip Internal boost supply high voltage level Units V Detail Indicates the actual internal boost power supply voltage 23 External High Voltage External High Voltage Tip Strip High voltage level supplied externally to terminal 7 of DI Driver to override internal boost supply Units V Detail Indicates the external high voltage supply level If the external high voltage supply pin 7 EXT PWR is connected to a level greater than 24V then the internal boost power supply will automatica
276. te this format NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 263 In addition the Database Editor can import the NI CAN database format ncd vector CANdb format dbc and LIN description file format ldf and convert them to FIBEX Create a new cluster Create a new cluster Create Cluster Detail Click Create Cluster button to create a new database A cluster is the description of a single network For CAN the cluster contains only the baud rate Usually a database contains only one cluster For example the NI CAN database and vector CANdb formats support only one cluster However FIBEX supports multiple clusters per database you could for example describe all of a vehicle s networks in a single database 264 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 23 1 1 CAN Signal Dialog Signal properties within a cluster can be configured in the Database Editor Signal dialog Please refer to the Database Editor built in manual for details of a specific signal property Note on Data Type property You must select Floating Point type given that all variables in the CalPoint Select and Flex Control Parameter list are of Floating Point type a5 Analog NI XNET Database Editor File Edit Options Help El pa Metworks El LE Analog_Cluster Tes AIO Read eel tems ANO Write ame AI Read ES ATO Write Tene ATT Write mm AN Write Signal Type Static Start Bit 56 El AN Write E me AN3 Write Mod
277. ted lt Not Selected a AIO All AI2 AB DI1 Battery Voltage V 9411_1 0 State 9411_1 0 Freq Hz 9411_1 0 DC 9411_1 1 State 9411_1 1 Freq Hz 9411 1 1 DC 9411_1 2 State 9411_1 2 Freq Hz 9411_1 2 DC r 9411_1 3 State 9411_1 3 Freq Hz 9411_1 3 DC 9411_1 4 State 9411_1 4 Freq Hz 9411_1 4 DC 9411_1 5 State W Tip Strip Assigns signal source to the 1D lookup table X array Detail Drop down selection control for selecting the input parameter for the X values of the lookup table The available parameters for selection are analog inputs battery voltage digital input parameters cam phase engine speed and user variables Table1D_X_Description Table1D_1_ Description Converting frequency to simulated engine speed Detail Text field for entering a lookup table description TableiD_ X TableiD_1 Tip Strip 1D conversion table Detail The X column is for input and the Y column is for the output conversion Linear interpolation is done between the values 214 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Table1D_X_FlexControlParameters Table1D_1_HexControlParameters Not Selected lt Not Selected Enable_Operating_Points Pause OP ResetOP Log_Data File Name Suffix Append Suffix Max Log File Size Max Log Samples Append_To_File SamplePeriod SimulatedSpeed DI1_Mode DI2_Mode DIB_Mode DI4 Mode PFI_ Mode DI1_ChaniEnable DI1_Chan2Enable DI
278. ted DI Driver module channel will be active for the specified duration When OFF the command will be inactive low but the specified delay and duration will still be implemented without effecting the adjacent pulses Delay coy so 0 iil CCC Tip Strip Time until beginning of this injection pulse Units msec Detail For Inj 1 specifies the delay of the start of Inj 1 from the trigger event For all other pulses specifies the delay of the start of Inj X from the end of the previous pulse NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 151 Uniform Duration Ch1 Duration oncom ou rse ES CN Co Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec Detail Specifies the time duration of the injection pulse The ON OFF button above the Delay and Duration parameters determines whether the pulse will be active or inactive The control sends commands to Ch 1 if the Enable Individual DIX Channel Duration parameter is enabled and to all three channels if the parameter is disabled Ch2 Duration Duration cr msec GES MES COST CH CH CO Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec Detail Specifies the time duration of the injection pulse The ON OFF button above the Delay and Duration parameters determines whether the pulse will be active or inactive The control sends commands to Ch 2 if the Enable Individual DIX Channel Duration parameter is enabled and is not active if the parame
279. ted item up the Read from CAN Bus List box Move Down Move Down Tip Strip Move selected item down the Read from CAN Bus List box 13 CAN Signal Not Selected CAN Signal Tip Strip CAN signal list when according to a selected database on the Deployed Databases list Detail This list will be populated according to signals defined in the selected database on the controller Flex Control Parameter 258 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual DirectMap_1_FlexControlParameters DI1_Duration_Inj1_Uniform_EPT DI1_IPhaseDuration_Element6 a DI1_IPhaseDuration_Element7 DI1_IPhaseDuration_Elements DI1_Enable_Inji_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj2_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj3_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj4_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj5_EPT DI1_Enable_Inj6_EPT DI1_Timing_Inji_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj2_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj3_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj4_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj5_EPT DI1_Timing_Inj6_EPT DH_Duration_Inji_Uniform_EPT DH _Duration_Inji_Chani_EPT y DIi_Duration_Inji_Chan2_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj1_Chan3_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj2_Uniform_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj2_Chan1_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj2_Chan2_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj2_Chan3_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj3_Uniform_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj3_Chan1_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj3_Chan2_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj3_Chan3_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj4_Uniform_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj4_Chan1_EPT DI1_Duration_Inj4_Chan2_EPT lo MM Flex Control Parameter a Not Selected Tip Strip Selects destination of the CAN signal to be mapped Detail A list
280. ter is disabled Ch3 Duration oon es S SN SN CN G GR Tip Strip Duration of injection pulse Units msec Detail Specifies the time duration of the injection pulse The ON OFF button above the Delay and Duration parameters determines whether the pulse will be active or inactive The control sends commands to Ch 3 if the Enable Individual DIX Channel Duration parameter is enabled and is not active if the parameter is disabled Direct Injector Driver Modules 2 4 152 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual DI Driver 3 __on Delay msec Uniform Dur msec Detail Please see information for DI Driver 1 NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 153 4 10 2 DI EPT Tab The DI EPT tab is for configuring EPT injection command pulse sequences with up to 6 pulses per sequence Figures 4 10 2 a and 4 10 2 b below are timing diagrams showing the effect of each DIX Timing Mode parameter An independent EPT command sequence is provided for each DI Driver module The EPT command sequence associated with a DI Driver module can be configured to apply to all channels of that module or it can be configured so that each individual channel receives different injection durations Each command pulse sequence can be independently configured to operate in Start of Injection SOI mode or End of Injection EOI mode according to a specified angle with respect to the channel s Top Dead Center TDC referen
281. the CamSig input of the EPT function Encoder style patterns are a very common form of engine position tracking in both production and research engine control systems Production Engine Encoder Patterns In production engines an encoder pattern will typically consist of a trigger position sensor sensing a relatively low resolution crankshaft trigger wheel The camshaft trigger position sensor is sensing a single tooth on the cam For this configuration the cam position signal should be routed to the DI Driver System EncZ signal via the Digital Input Setup window and the EncZMask button of the EPT tab should be set to EncZ Passed For this configuration the rising edge of the cam signal should occur as close as possible to the midway point between two crank signals The system designer should also ensure that the camshaft lash due to stretching of the camshaft belt or chain during acceleration or deceleration will not cause the cam signal to move with respect to the crank signals by more than half of the crank tooth spacing For this reason production systems will use a low resolution crank trigger wheel The 176 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual EncZ signal may be inverted via the Digital Inout Setup window to properly present a rising edge between the same two crank rising edges each and every engine cycle Research Engine Encoder Patterns Optical encoders are a common source of signals for this pattern type in research appl
282. ticular Flex Control Parameter of interest as shown in the Direct Mapping Section m 224 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 18 Rail Pressure Control Setup Window The purpose of the Rail Pressure Control RPC Setup window is to configure a dedicated direct injection common rail fuel pressure control function The function writes to the optional PFI Driver 1 module lowside driver channels which are connected to a high pressure pump Inlet Metering Valve IMV and a High Pressure Valve HPV on the rail The RPC function implements two PID controllers one for RPC via the IMV and one for RPC via the HPV Only one PID controller may be enabled at one time either for IMV PID or HPV PID While IMV PID is enabled the HPV must be controlled via constant PWM duty cycle While HPV PID is enabled the IMV must be controlled via constant PWM duty cycle The reason for this is because two PID controllers acting on IMV and HPV simultaneously would conflict Typically RPC is performed using IMV PID control while applying a constant duty cycle to the HPV The RPC function must also have rail pressure feedback from an analog sensor mounted to the fuel rail The analog signal can be connected to any of the four channels of the optional NI 9220 analog input module The utilized analog channel can be selected via this Rail Pressure Control Setup window Typical IMV and HPV solenoids require up to 3A continuous current operation Therefore it is impor
283. tive High the digital input signal is unaffected When the Invert button is set to Active Low every destination will see the signal as inverted VR Hall Module Setup VR Hall Module Setup Ce Tip Strip VR Hall Module Setup Detail Launches the VR Hall Module Setup Window NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 143 4 8 1 VR Hall Input Setup Window The purpose of the VR Hall Input Setup window is to configure the operation of each of the NI 9760 VR Hall input channels Each of the six channels can be configured to operate in one of four modes VR Adaptive Arm the default mode VR Manual Arm Hall or Hall with Pull up In order to utilize signals generated by VR sensors to enable EPT Sync on the cRIO 9082 chassis configure the desired VR Hall channels on this window and then wire the corresponding output pins on the NI 9760 module to pins on one of the NI 9411 Digital Input modules mounted on the cRIO 9082 chassis to send the signal to that chassis Without making that additional wiring connection there is no way to use the NI 9760 to obtain EPT Sync on the CRIO 9082 s VR Hall Input Setup VRHall Module Present VRHallFaultlear Nall PC ModeSelectVRHall_Ch1 Arming_ThresheldVoltageVRHall_Ch1 ModeSelectVRHall_Ch2 Arming _ThresholdVoltageVRHall_Ch2 Fr Adaptive am ModeSelectVRHall_Ch3 Arming_ThresholdVoltageVRHall_Ch3 VR Adaptive Arm ModeSelectVRHall_Ch4 Arming_Threshel
284. to the low side driver channels NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 53 3 3 3 4 Digital Signals to NI 9411 Digital Input Module Each NI 9411 digital input module has six digital inputs Each DI Driver System regardless of number of DI Driver channels contains at least one NI 9411 module in slot one 1 EDIDS 2409 and EDIDS 2412 systems contain an additional NI 9411 module in slot four 4 NI 9411 Module Breakout Harness Each digital input signal pair has a different wire color and is labeled with the associated digital input channel and signal polarity In addition to the signal wire pairs there are 5V output wires red and red black and COM wire black The 5V regulated output is only active if the Vsup and COM screw terminal block is externally powered Wire gauge is 22 AWG Pin Description Pin Wire Color po forme EE CE me pP pe DI1b Green Black Bue Suey SVOR RES Dea Dee A EL Common COM 1200 Black Table 3 3 3 4 a NI 9411 Module Breakout Harness Wire Color The b pins of the NI 9411 should not be connected for single ended digital signals The b pins should be used for optical encoders with differential or complementary outputs Please refer to the NI 9411 Operating Instructions and Specifications for details List of the connector parts used to assemble the NI 9411 module pigtail AMP HDP 20 Series 109 15P Receptacle Housing 205163 1 AMP HDP 20 Series 109 Crimp Soc
285. ttern types Plus1Location tard PlusiLocation Tip Strip Plus1 tooth location with respect to mid point Detail When Advance the EPT is configured to look for a Plus1 tooth which is advanced from the mid point between two evenly spaced crank teeth An advanced Plus1 tooth should be advanced from the mid point by approximately 4 of the normal tooth spacing When Retard the EPT is configured to look for a Plus1 tooth which is retarded from the midpoint between two evenly spaced crank teeth A retarded Plus1 tooth should be retarded from the mid point by approximately of the normal tooth spacing This parameter is only applicable for Plus1 pattern types 0 EngineSpeed EngineSpeed 1000 001 RPM Tip Strip Indicates engine speed Units RPM Detail Engine speed output from the EPT function 180 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual EngineStatus EngineStatus RUNNING Tip Strip Engine status based on StallSpeed and CrankRunThreshold Detail Indicates the status of the engine crankshaft as stalled cranking or running depending on the values of StallSpeed and CrankRunThreshold STALLED Crank speed is less than StallSpeed CRANKING Crank speed is greater than StallSpeed and less than CrankRunThreshold RUNNING Crank speed is greater than CrankRunThreshold E MaxCAT MaxCAT 115360 CAT Tip Strip Maximum crank angle ticks for complete engine cycle Units CAT Detail Maximum Crank Angle Tick
286. turn to the limp home position before positive calibration 112 ni ccom NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual PsnCalReturnFromPosDelay_ChX PsnCalReturnFromPosDelay_Ch1i 1 s Tip Strip Time delay from the end of pos cal to the start of neg cal Units s seconds Detail Indicates time delay in seconds from the end of positive position calibration to start of negative calibration This time must be long enough to allow the throttle plate to return to the limp home position before negative calibration Otherwise the limp home position will not be properly detected PsnCalReturnFromNegDelay_ChX PsnCalReturnFromNegDelay_Chi 1 s Tip Strip Time delay from the end of neg pos cal to the start of pos cal phase Units s Seconds Detail Indicates time delay in seconds from the start of position calibration initialization phase to start of positive calibration This time allows the throttle plate to return to the limp home position before positive calibration uPsnCalPos_Init_ChX uPsnCalPos_Init_Ch1 aa 4 v Tip Strip The initial drive voltage to the throttle motor for positive position calibration Positive Units V Detail Indicates the initial drive voltage to the throttle motor for positive position calibration This voltage should be selected to move the throttle plate most of the way toward maximum position without hitting maximum position This parameter should be a positive value uPsnCalNeg_init_ChX
287. ually Resetting The Controller Network Interface To DHCP cccceceeeee eee ees 28 322 0 4 SCM and Windows Firewall SSSR RS de nine 31 3 2 4 Updating DI Driver System Controller Software Vs 36 3 2 5 Backing Up the DI Driver System Software Image 38 3 2 6 Restoring Backup Image To The DI Driver System Controller 40 SOA a 212 NULS ES eee ee eee ee ee ee eee eee re eee ere 43 29 1 C S res Module SIT ASSIGMMOCIIS carran Re bined nn 44 3202 POWERING ING DY SEIN vaaccentiaseee NS NS hone day eta ane 46 3 3 3 Connecting Injectors Sensors and Actuators ss 48 3 3 3 1 Direct Injectors to DI Driver Channels VV 49 3 9 9 2 PON FUE INJeEClOrs 10 PFI Channels cn cree cd nt 51 3 3 3 3 Proportional Solenoid Valves to PFI Lowside Channels 53 3 3 3 4 Digital Signals to NI 9411 Digital Input Module 54 3 3 3 5 Analog Signals to NI 9220 Analog Input Module ccc ccccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseees 57 3 3 4 DI Driver System Component User Manual Reference 0 ccccccceceseeeceeeceeeeseeeeeeeseeeeees 58 32029 OPa ENGIOSUTE SY SII SES RSR RS ne Modo 59 3 4 Using DI Driver System to Control Fuel Pressure 62 3 0 Optimizing the DI Driver Systemsa se nm n e sant 64 4 Nl Dir ctInector Driver System Interface sas mana nine 65 Ba DL DTIVER SUD VVING OW sororia da etes eat ide 67 l 1 Dl Driver Scope VV INGOW 2 NS sn nette de let en 78 4 2 rt and tS DIVE Seb NWNNdOoW ER en ananas cache 19
288. ublic Documents National Instruments NI ANET Examples NIANET_exarmpleLDF NI9 55 NOx XNET CAN Databe D Drivven Products NOx Software VAN Ox Aneti NI 9 55 NOx XNET CAN Database xml D130 C Users RY apaulo Desktop D130 xml N1 9755 NOx XNET CAN Datab C Users RY apaulo Desktop NI 9755 NOx XNET CAN Database xml NIXNET_ example C Users Public Documents National Instruments NI XNET Examples NIANET_example xml Analog C Users RYapaulo Desktop Analog xml 4 IT 3 IP Address of RT Target Connect IP Address of RT Target 197 1681 100 Detail To deploy undeploy databases to the controller enter the IP Address of the DI Driver System controller you are interfacing to and click the Connect button Deploy Detail Clicking this button will deploy selected database on the Windows PC to the controller UnDeploy Detail Clicking this button will undeploy selected database from the controller Note If a database on the controller is active i e if it is selected on the DI Driver System XNET CAN Setup Window you cannot undeploy the database If you attempt to undeploy an active database you will get an error message that indicates that it is currently being accessed When this happens unselect the database or set it to No Database Selected on the Deployed Databases list on the XNET CAN Setup window and retry the Undeploy operation on the Manage NI XNET Databases Dialog window 270 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Ma
289. uence Exp CalSeq Pulses 206 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Exp CalSeq Pulses 100 Pulses Tip Strip Number of pulses for calibration sequence Units Pulses Detail Number of injection pulses to be commanded during a calibration sequence Exp RemoteStartEnable Exp RemoteStartEnable Remote Start Enable Tip Strip Enables remote start through External Digital Trigger Detail Enables remote start through an external digital trigger configured by Exp CalSegStart_ DigChanAsn Exp CalSeqStart_DigChanAsn Exp CalSeqStart_DigChanAsn NI9411_ 3 0 NI9411 31 NI9411_3 2 NI9411_33 NI9411 3 4 NI9411 35 VR Hall_1 VR Hall_2 VR Hall_3 VR Hall_4 VR Hall_5 VR Hall_6 Aux PWM 5 Aux PWM 6 Aux PWM 7 Aux PWM amp Tip Strip Selects the digital signal used for triggering the calibration sequence Detail Allows the user to select an external digital signal for triggering the start of the calibration sequence 10 Exp CalSeqProgress Exp CalSeq Progress 0 Pulses Tip Strip Indicates sequence progress NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 207 Detail Indicates the progress through the calibration sequence The progress bar fill rate is automatically adjusted for the value of Exp CalSeg Pulses 208 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 15 Direct Mapping The direct mapping feature allows users to directly map DI Driver System inputs and User Variables to Flex Co
290. uld be set to EncZ Masked and a cam phase signal must be used When an encoder is mounted to the crankshaft of a 2 stroke engine or mounted to the camshaft of a 4 stroke engine EncZMask should be set to EncZ Passed and a cam phase signal is not required Crank m i Crank Tip Strip Indicates state of the crank signal Detail Indicates the logic level of the digital input assigned to the Crank signal in the Digital Input Setup window This indicator is not updated at the same rate the signal is changing It is for reference only m Cami Tip Strip Indicates state of the CAM signal Detail Indicates the logic level of the digital input assigned to the Cam1 signal in the Digital Input Setup window This indicator is not updated at the same rate the signal is changing It is for reference only 186 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual LOW Cam Tip Strip Indicates state of the CAM signal Detail Indicates the logic level of the digital input assigned to the Cam2 signal in the Digital Input Setup window This indicator is not updated at the same rate the signal is changing It is for reference only norte nu LOW Enc Tip Strip Indicates state of the CAM signal Detail Indicates the logic level of the digital input assigned to the EncZ signal in the Digital Input Setup window This indicator is not updated at the same rate the signal is changing It is for reference only NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual
291. uotations and arrange field applications engineer visits for you Have one call you now or call 866 463 3364 If you are outside the United States or Canada you can find your local contact information at ni com contact 800 531 5066 Privacy Terms of Use Other Legal info 2014 National Instruments Corporation All rights reserved Software Installation NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 15 After the download is complete browse to the location on disk where the file was saved Extract the contents of the zip file i d Open NISC d Scan with Microsoft Security Essentials Open with Share with Restore previous versions Send to Cut Copy Create shortcut Delete Rename Properties After extracting the file open the created directory and run the Setup exe application If prompted install Microsoft NET Framework 4 0 r amp Local Disk C Es Drivven vmware host Shared Folders H Software Packages vmware host Shared Folders J G CalFiles wmware host Shared Folders K 2 InstallCDs 192 168 0 4 X Sy DrivvenShare 192 168 0 4 Y 2 LabVIEW8_CDs 192 168 0 4 Z e C E gt NLSCM2014 zip 4 Search NL SCM_2014zip p Organize Extract all files J v X a Name Type Compressed size Pa I BE Desktop d Bin File folder mi Downloads d Licenses File folder Recent Places
292. ur personal information Last Name ES By clicking Create Account agree to National Instruments privacy policy 800 531 5066 Privacy Terms of Use Other Legal Info 2014 National Instruments Corporation All rights reserved Download the most recent version of the software When prompted choose the option to save the file Oo FW http www nicom gate gb GB_EVALTLKTC D W NI Software Calibration Manag IY Download the Software Cali X x Google 29 Search S Share More gt gt 4 NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS Download the Software Calibration Management Toolkit for LabVIEW Please click the link below to begin your download LabVIEW 2014 Download NOTE The 2012 Download version originally named CalVIEW does not use traditional NI licensing and requires a different license ID and activation number directly from the NI Powertrain Controls Group Please contact NI Powertrain Controls in San Antonio for help with downloading and activating this version LabVIEW 2012 Download CalVIEW Additional Resources For technical support questions or download issues contact NI support Learn more about NI Powertrain Controls Back to Software Calibration Management Toolkit Product Listing Browse and download more toolkits and add ons at the LabVIEW Tools Network Contact Us NI technical representatives worldwide can answer your hardware and software questions provide q
293. ur stroke engine phase information Other functions can be implemented on the Cam signals for capturing the angle of the cam rising edges configured via the Cam Phase Capture tab of the Engine Position Tracking Setup window 4 DIX _ChanX_DigChanAsn DIi_Chani_DigChanAsn DI1 Chan2 DigChanAsn DIL Chan3 DigChanAsn Tip Strip Assigns digital signal source to channel during Direct and TMP Modes Detail Up to twelve DI Driver channel destinations are available which will directly command the DI Driver channels from the selected digital signal source The application of these destinations depends on which DI Driver modules are inserted in the assigned slots In order to utilize this functionality the associated DI Driver module must be placed into Direct Mode or TMP Mode via the associated DI Driver Setup window 3 Digital Input Channel Signals 138 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual Channel Name State Freq Hz DC PW ms Invert Filter us 9411_1 DI0 100 50 00 S actverich 2 9411 1 D11 ol 0 00 Ol rciverich JO 9411 1 DI2 s ol 0 00 Off acweromno 9411 1 DI3 Me of 0 00 O actverioh o 9411 1 DI4 ls ol oo Oaie O 9411 1 DI5 gy ol 0 00 Ol actverich O 9411 2 DI0 of 0 00 Off Aciverion lo 9411 2 DI1 es O 0 00 oOMawemnlo 9411 2 DI2 Us ol 0 00 ofawemnlo 9411 2 DI3 us ol 0 00 ofaemnlo 9411 2 DI4 Mu ol 0 00 OM actverioh
294. uration_Chan2_EPT PFI_ Duration_Chan3_EPT PFI_Duration_Chan4_EPT PFLTiming_Inj_TMP PFI Duration_Chani_TMP PFI_Duration_Chan2_TMP PFI_Duration_Chan3_TMP PFI_Duration_Chan4_TMP PFILLS1_Frequency PFILLS2_Frequency PFI_LS3_Frequency PFLLS4_ Frequency PFLLS1_DutyCycle PFLLS2_DutyCycle PFI_LS3_DutyCycle PFLLS4_DutyCycle PFI_LS1 Period PFLLS2 Period PFILS3_ Period PAL LS4 Period PFILS1_PulseWidth PFLLS2_PulseWidth PFI_LS3_PulseWidth PFLLS4 PulseWidth NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 211 4 16 Table Setup Window The purpose of the Table Setup window is to configure up to eight one dimensional 1D lookup tables and up to eight two dimensional 2D lookup tables for mapping input values to output values A separate tab is utilized for each lookup table configuration Each tab provides the ability to select from a variety of table input sources and assign the table output to an array of Flex Control Parameter destinations Each lookup table can be individually enabled or disabled The 1D lookup table function will perform a linear interpolation between the X indices which bound the X input value The 2D lookup table function will perform a triple linear interpolation between the X and Y indices which bound the X and Y input values 212 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 16 1 Table1D A 1D lookup table control consists of a set of matching X and Y arrays The X values correspond to the input
295. ve suggestions resolve the system connection problem follow the instructions below to reset the system controller network interface settings to DHCP cRIO 9082 Controller To manually reset the network settings of the cRIO 9082 controller included with 3 6 9 and 12 channel DI Driver Systems follow the steps below 1 Power up the cRIO 9082 controller 2 Switch the IP RESET switch to ON 3 Press and immediately release the reset button This will cause the controller to reboot normally and start the DI Driver System software However the network settings will be reset to DHCP mode Wait about 1 minute for both the USER1 and USER FPGA1 LEDs to start blinking 4 Switch the IP RESET switch to OFF USER FPGAI Note NI does not recommend leaving DHCP mode for the DI Driver System controller because the IP address may change each time the system is powered Each time the IP address changes the Search for SCM Target dialog must be opened within the SCM console to locate the system on the network If the system controller network interface is in DHCP mode and the controller is not connected to a DHCP router the controller will default to a link local IP address of 169 254 X X If this happens a connection with the system can still be established via direct point to point if the Windows PC LAN IP address is configured to a similar IP address but different in the last address number If the system controller is allowed to default t
296. ver ector D nji ir D 15 If it is desired to change the network settings of the DI Driver System controller refer to Changing The Network settings Of The DI Driver System NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 25 3 2 3 2 Changing The Network Settings Of The DI Driver System This section assumes that a connection with the DI Driver System user interface is already established and it is desired to change the IP address If a connection has never been established please refer to Out Of The Box Connection If the IP address of the DI Driver System is unknown and a connection with the user interface cannot be established please refer to Setting the Controller Network Interface To DHCP 1 After starting the system main user interface double click on the Execution Information window sm NI Direct Injector Driver System 7 NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS river System ector D nji IF D 2 After the Execution Information window opens select the Network tab to make changes to the controller network settings The settings shown on this tab are similar to the Windows PC LAN TCP IPv4 Properties dialog The image below shows an example of changing the controller IP address to 192 168 2 34 The Default Gateway and DNS Server IP addresses may be important if the system is connected to a network router A network administrator should be contacted for this information If a direct p
297. versing directions too fast LHPsn_Out_ChX LHPsn_Out_Ch1 5 867 deg Tip Strip H Bridge channel 1 limp home angle Units or deg NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 127 Detail Indicates the default throttle position which results from no power being applied to the motor If this parameter is not known it can be set to any value and the Position Calibration process must be executed The calculated LH Position LHPsn_Out_ChX will be updated in the Control Calibration Out column 1 MotorResistance_Out_ChX MotorResistance Out Chi 2 5 Ohms Tip Strip H Bridge channel X motor resistance Units Ohms Detail Indicates the resistance of the motor winding A digital multi meter DMM can be used to measure this This value is used to determine safe output ranges d Psn_FaultThreshOut_ChX Psn_FaultThreshout_ Chi 10 1 Tip Strip Sets the max allowable disagreement of the Primary and Secondary Positions Detail If the Secondary Position disagrees with the Primary Position by more than the value set in Psn_FaultThresh_ChX then Psn_Fault_ChX will be set to TRUE Position Fault is not a latching Boolean output It is continuously updated according to the latest position readings Note If only a single position sensor is used for a throttle body then this parameter is not applicable 128 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 6 UEGO Setup Window The purpose of the UEGO Setup windo
298. voltage trace shown is not recorded within injection commands Therefore the voltage trace will be constant with the last value recorded before the injection command Also the current trace is not recorded outside of the injection command and will be displayed as zero 78 ni com NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual 4 2 PFI and LS Driver Setup Window The purpose of the PFI and LS Driver Setup window is to configure the operation of the PFI Driver module Three tabs are provided for the following PFI Module Control Tab Enable the PFI Driver module configure the operating mode test PFI channels with one shot pulses and monitor module faults PFI 1 4 Tab Enable individual PFI Driver PFI channels 1 4 and configure current control parameters LS 1 4 Tab Enable individual PFI Driver lowside channels 1 4 and configure the Pulse Width Modulation PWM parameters The PFI Driver module is an optional module for the NI 9155 MXle Expansion Chassis This setup window is only applicable if the PFI Driver module is inserted in the assigned slot NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 79 4 2 1 PFl Module Control Tab The purpose of the PFI Module Control Tab is to enable the PFI Driver module configure the operating mode test PFI channels with one shot pulses and monitor module faults s PFI and LS Driver Setup PFI Module Control teal PFI_ModulePresent on PFI_FaultClear Con PFI_ModuleEnable
299. w is to configure the operation of the UEGO O2 sensor module The DI Driver system supports two Bosch LSU 4 2 or 4 9 wide band UEGO sensors with fuse protected heater control circuits and two Narrow band differential sensor inputs s NI 9757 02 Setup UEGO2 779 977 c 569 023 c FUSE OK 5 12344 96 0 9 UEGO_Battery B 13 7511 v NO FAULT NO FAULT 2 4758 mA 0 mA 12 2328 Lambda 1 0032 Lambda 00 0817474 Phi 0 99681 Phi 179 822 AFR 14 747 AFR NO FAULT NO FAULT B lz Note Module must be UEGO1 Back Pressure UEGO2 Back Pressure powered externally for 1 13 bar 1 13 bar LSU Type indicatior to read accurately UEGO1 Lambda Range UEGO Lambda Range 0 65 Air UEGO amp EGO Filter Cutoff Freq Stoichiometric A F Ratio 10 Hz 14 7 kg kg COLD SENSOR gt EGO2 UEGO Calibration Ip Array LSU 4 9UEGO Calibration Lambda Array LSU 4 9 t f tm Al 5 s0 E a Sfo 0 45 V 19 UEGOModule Present a COLD SENSOR EGO3 0 0243974 0 LEAN 4 ETE L UEGOModule Enable UEGOModule Enable Disable NI EDIDS 2400 Series User Manual National Instruments 129 Tip Strip Specifies Enables O2 sensor module Detail If the O2 sensor module is in the correct slot and UEGOModuleEnable is TRUE then the RT VI begins initializing the wide band sensors bringing them up to temperature and updating sensor results in the UEGO X cluster Warning If the module is present but no sensors
300. will have a width equal to one crank tooth period The offset cam signal will go high at the falling edge of the crankshaft signal immediately following the specified CamOffset number of rising edges of the crank signal The offset cam signal will go low at the following rising edge of the crank signal The resulting signal may need to be extended The input to the cam offset function is from the digital input assigned to the Cam1 or Cam2 signal via the Digital Input Setup window The output of the cam offset function is delivered to the cam extension function When Enabled the cam signal is offset When Disabled the camshaft signal is unaltered The offset and the extended cam signals may be monitored in the EPT Diagnostics tab i CamOffset CamOffset Hi pulses Tip Strip Specifies the number of crank pulses to offset the cam pulse Units pulses Detail The DI Driver System provides an optional offset function applied to the cam signal selected by CamSelect The offset function offsets the cam signal by the number of crank teeth specified by CamOffset The starting reference for the offset is the rising edge of the cam signal input to the function The resulting offset cam signal will have a width equal to one crank tooth period The offset cam signal will go high at the falling edge of the crankshaft signal immediately following the specified CamOffset number of rising edges of the crank signal The offset cam signal will go low at the following
301. xtension 2 1 pulses Tip Strip Specifies the number of crank pulses to extend the cam pulse Units pulses Detail The DI Driver System provides an optional extension function applied to the cam signal selected by CamSelect The extension function extends the cam signal by the number of crank teeth specified by CamExtension The starting reference for the extension is the rising edge of the cam signal input to the function Therefore the resulting extended cam signal will be shorter than the input cam signal if the CamExtension value is shorter than the input signal The input to the cam extension function is from the output of the cam offset function The output of the cam extension function is delivered to the EncZMask function for encoder patterns and delivered directly to the EPT function for N M and N 1 patterns The offset and the extended cam signals may be monitored in the EPT Diagnostics tab 27 CamHistory CamHistory Normal fe Tip Strip Cam Signal Status Detail This parameter is only applicable to EPT types of N M and N 1 When the EPT is in sync reports the state of the cam Normal Error Always High or Always Low Normal Indicated when the cam signal is alternating consistently between high and low upon each crank trigger wheel feature M tooth gap or Plus1 tooth Error Indicated when the cam signal is alternating between high and low but not consistently upon each crank trigger wheel feature M tooth

National Instruments Expandable Direct Injector Driver

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents